Lucent Technologies Telephone 518 458 100 User Manual

PARTNER Endeavor  
Communications System  
Programming and Use  
518-458-100  
Comcode 108340803  
Issue 2 August 1998  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC)  
Interference Information  
References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U.S.  
Class A Compliance  
This equipment, in the 5-Slot configuration and in the 2-Slot configuration with a 362EC  
module or PARTNER MAIL VS, has been tested and found to comply with the limits for  
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference  
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used  
in accordance with the instruction manuals, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference, in which case the user will have to correct the interference at his  
or her own expense.  
FCC Notification and Repair Information  
This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules. In  
compliance with those rules, you are advised of the following:  
Means of Connection: Connection to the telephone network shall be through a  
standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C. These USOCs must be ordered from  
your local telephone company.  
FCC-compliant line cords are provided with Line and Line/Extension Modules for  
connecting to the telephone company-provided USOC RJ11C jacks. Use only FCC-  
compliant line cords and jacks for these connections.  
This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines.  
Notification to the Telephone Companies: Before connecting this equipment, you or  
your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company’s business office of  
the following:  
The telephone number(s) you will be using with this equipment.  
The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN),  
which can be found on the right-hand side of the control unit.  
The facility interface code, which is O2LS2.  
You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is  
permanently disconnected from the line(s).  
REN Information: The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be  
connected to the same telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may  
result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all  
areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed two (2.0). To be certain of the number of  
devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the  
local telephone company.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Repair Instructions: If you experience trouble because your equipment is  
malfunctioning, the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network  
and not use it until the problem has been corrected. Repairs to this equipment can only  
be made by the manufacturer, by its authorized agents, or by others who may be  
authorized by the FCC. In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, please  
contact the Lucent Technologies hotline at 1-800-721-7071 or your local Authorized  
Dealer. For warranty information, see Appendix B.  
Rights of the Local Telephone Company: If this equipment causes harm to the  
telephone network, the local telephone company may discontinue your service  
temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance notice is not  
practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right  
to file a complaint with the FCC.  
Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,  
operations, or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment. If they do,  
you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted  
telephone service.  
Hearing Aid Compatibility: All system phones are compatible with inductively coupled  
hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC.  
Industry Canada (IC) Notification and Repair Information  
The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means  
that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational,  
and safety requirements. The IC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the  
user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that is permissible to connect it to  
the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be  
installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s  
inside wiring for single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certified  
connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that  
compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some  
situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian  
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the  
user to this equipment, or any equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users, for their own protection, should ensure that the electrical ground connections of  
the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are  
connected. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
!
CAUTION:  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should  
contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician, as  
appropriate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To prevent overloading, the Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device  
denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by  
the device. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject  
only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not  
exceed 100.  
IC Certification No: See the label on the side of the control unit.  
CSA Certification No: LR 60486  
Load No: 7  
Renseignements sur la notification du ministére des Industrie Canada et la réparation  
L’étiquette du Ministére des Industrie Canada identifie le matériel homologué. Cette  
étiquette certifie que le matériel est conformé à certaines normes de protection,  
d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications. Le Ministére n’assure  
toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur.  
Avant d’installer ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le raccorder  
aux installations de l’entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit  
également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de peuvent etre prolonges au  
moyen d’un dispositif homologue de raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intérieurs  
de l’enterprise utilisés pour un service individuel à ligne unique peuvent être prolongés  
au moyen d’un dispositif homologué de raccordement (cordon prolongateur  
téléphonique interne). L’abonné ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la conformité  
aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus n’empêchent pas la dégradation du service dans  
certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de télécommunication ne permettent  
pas que l’on raccorde leur matériel à des jacks d’abonné, sauf dans les cas précis  
prévus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises.  
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées par un centre  
d’entretien Canadien autorisé désigné par le foumisseur. La compagnie de  
télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à la suite  
de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais  
fonctionnement.  
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre  
de la source d’énergie électrique, des lignes téléphoniques et des canalisations d’eau  
métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble. Cette précaution est particuliérement  
importante dans les régions rurales.  
!
ADVERTISSEMENT:  
L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir  
racours à un service d’inspection des installations électriques, ou à un electrician,  
selon le cas.  
L’indice de charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour éviter toute  
surcharge, le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut être raccordée a un circuit  
téléphonique boucié utilisé par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit boucié peut être  
constituêe de n’importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des  
indices de charge de l’ensemble des dispositifs ne dépasse pas 100.  
No d’homolagation: Voir l’étiquette sur le côté de l’unité de contrôle.  
No de certification CSA: LR 60486  
L’indice de charge: 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
(I892)  
5-74  
(I77G/I*77G)  
5-109  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
(#728)  
5-203  
Internet  
6-2  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
B-1  
and Ordering Information  
Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty  
and Limitation of Liability  
B-2  
Feedback Form  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Guide  
Purpose  
This guide is intended for the System Manager. It explains what the PARTNER  
Endeavor™ can do, provides instructions for programming and using the system,  
and tells how to get the most out of the system’s many features and capabilities.  
Terminology  
Throughout this guide, the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System is  
referred to simply as the system and Lucent Technologies telephones specifically  
designed to work with the system are called system phones. You can also use  
industry-standard telephones with the system, which are referred to as standard  
phones in this guide. Finally, the PARTNER MAIL VS®, PARTNER® Voice  
Messaging PC Card or PARTNER MAIL® Voice Messaging System, which you  
may have connected to the system, is referred to as the voice messaging system.  
How to Use This Guide  
For information about the following topics, refer to the appropriate chapter:  
Getting Acquainted. Chapter 1 provides an overview of system features  
and hardware components.  
Programming the System. You can change your system’s settings easily  
to accommodate new or expanding needs. Chapter 2 provides general  
programming information, while Chapter 5 provides detailed instructions  
for programming specific system features.  
Training Co-Workers. Chapter 3 explains how system and standard  
phones work with the system. To help train co-workers on telephone  
basics, you can share this information with them.  
Using Auxiliary Equipment. The system supports a wide variety of  
auxiliary equipment, including fax machines, modems, voice messaging  
systems, and call reporting devices. Chapter 4 provides advice on setting  
up these devices to work effectively with the system.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
About This Guide  
Daily Operation. Depending on how your system is set up, you may need  
to oversee some of the system’s daily operations. For example, you may  
need to turn on Night Service at the end of each day before leaving the  
office. Reference information about all features, including descriptions and  
instructions for using each feature, is provided in Chapter 5.  
Solving Problems. Chapter 6 provides information about solving  
problems if your system or telephones malfunction.  
Once you are experienced with the system, use the Table of Contents or Index to  
locate the information you need.  
Throughout this guide, feature names are printed in bold—for example, System  
Date (#101). Chapter 5, ‘‘Feature Reference’’ provides comprehensive  
information about each feature, with the features arranged in alphabetical order.  
For example, if you see a reference to System Date (#101), you can look it up in  
Chapter 5 for details.  
Product Safety Statements  
Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a  
!
.
!
CAUTION:  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal  
injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.  
!
WARNING:  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal personal  
injury if the hazard is not avoided.  
How to Comment on This Guide  
A feedback form is located at the end of this guide, after the appendices. If the  
form is missing, send your comments and recommendations for changes to:  
Publications Manager, Lucent Technologies, 211 Mount Airy Road (Room  
2W-226), Basking Ridge, NJ 07920 (FAX 1-908-953-6912).  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Purpose  
Important Safety Instructions  
The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always  
be followed when using your telephone equipment:  
1. Read and understand all instructions.  
2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
3. Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning. DO NOT use liquid  
cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
4. This product should be serviced by (or taken to) a qualified repair center  
when service or repair work is required.  
5. DO NOT use this product near water—for example, in a wet basement  
location.  
6. DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.  
7. Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire  
or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
8. DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
9. The product is provided with a three-wire grounding type plug. This is a  
safety feature. DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.  
DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the power supply cord to building  
surfaces.  
!
CAUTION:  
DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots or openings. They  
prevent the product from overheating. DO NOT place the product  
in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided. DO  
NOT place the product flat on a surface. The control unit must be  
wall-mounted.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Guide  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview  
Features and Capabilities  
The following list provides an overview of the PARTNER Endeavor™  
Communications System’s features. The features apply to all releases of  
PARTNER Endeavor unless specified otherwise.  
Full line of system phones, some with displays showing date, time, and  
programming and feedback messages. All system phones provide access  
to multiple outside lines and system features.  
Programmable buttons on system phones, providing one-touch access to  
system features by simply by pressing the button.  
Intuitive operation of basic call-handling capabilities including transfer,  
conference, and hold.  
Intercom (inside) calling to other system extensions using an Intercom  
button and the two-digit number assigned to the extension. Users can  
either ring or voice-signal an idle system phone; use Voice Interrupt On  
Busy to signal another user who is active on a call; or manually signal to  
audibly alert another predetermined extension.  
Grouping of extensions for flexibility in directing and answering calls.  
Integrated voice messaging support with the PARTNER MAIL VS system or  
PARTNER MAIL system, so callers can reach a desired extension or group  
without operator assistance and leave messages at unanswered or busy  
extensions.  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card provides a voice messaging service  
as well as effective solutions for after-hours call answering and back-up for  
the receptionist.  
Caller ID support on system display phones (if Caller ID service is available  
from your local telephone company and you subscribe to it).  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview  
Power failure operation with a standard phone, allowing you to make calls  
from extension 10 during a power failure while retaining programmed  
equipment settings for up to four days. (An optional Uninterruptible Power  
Supply, or UPS, is also available to allow full equipment operation during a  
power failure.)  
Centrex or PBX operation support—including one-touch dialing of feature  
access codes on system phones.  
Flexible dialing restrictions and permissions so you can control telephone  
activity and phone bills.  
Special hospitality features that let Bed-and-Breakfast proprietors, for  
example, regulate phone use in guest rooms and schedule wake-up calls  
for guests.  
Easy-to-use programming procedures, making it simple for you to manage  
your system and telephones. System display phones provide messages  
and prompts during programming.  
Two system-programming extensions, allowing you to program the system  
from one extension without interrupting call activity at the other  
programming extension—usually the receptionist’s extension.  
Modular connections to the control unit, making it easy to reconfigure your  
system or to add lines and/or extensions as your business grows.  
Direct connections for industry-standard devices—including most standard  
phones, fax machines, answering machines, modems, and credit card  
scanners.  
Optional equipment support, including doorphones, Music-On-Hold1, auto  
attendants, extra alerts, and PC Cards for Backup/Restore or for software  
upgrades. Doorphones work only on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom  
two ports on a processor or a 362EC expansion module.  
Automatic System Answer feature to help answer and route calls.  
Direct Extension Dial feature to allow callers to dial an extension or help  
group directly without the aid of the receptionist.  
Line Pooling to create up to four groups, or pools, of multiple outside lines.  
When users access a pool to make a call, the system selects an available  
line from the pool.  
Call Coverage for users who are unable to answer their calls, but want their  
calls answered by another individual.  
1.  
The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United  
States Copyright law. Accordingly, in order for the performance of that music to be lawful, it  
must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives. One  
way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP, BMI, and/or similar performing rights  
organizations, to obtain a license. Or, you can purchase a Magic-On-Hold® system, which  
includes the required license for the first year. This license must be renewed annually by  
the copyright owners or their representatives.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Components  
System Components  
Modular hardware design makes the system easy to install and expand. The basic  
system consists of a PARTNER Endeavor processor module, which supports  
three lines and eight extensions. Using these lines and extensions, you can add  
various optional devices and telephones to configure your system to meet your  
needs. To expand the system to include more lines and extensions, simply attach  
additional modules and a carrier to contain them. The term “control unit” is used to  
refer to the stand-alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module (or to the  
carrier and the modules it contains), since this is the heart of the system. Figure  
1-1 shows an example of system components.  
!
WARNING:  
There are no customer-serviceable components inside the system modules  
or carrier. There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal  
personal injury. DO NOT OPEN THE MODULES.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview  
PARTNER Endeavor 362  
Processor Module  
MUSIC  
ON  
HOLD  
-
-
-
-
U
Endeavor -34  
(for extension jacks on last 2  
ports of Endeavor 362 Processor Module  
or 362EC Expansion Module)  
Endeavor -18D  
Endeavor -6  
Expansion  
Endeavor  
-18  
Figure 1-1. Sample System Components  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Components  
Configurations  
The system can have one of three basic configurations:  
Stand-alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module. This  
configuration does not use a carrier.  
2-Slot Carrier, which can hold up to two modules. The PARTNER Endeavor  
362 processor module resides in the leftmost slot with either a 362EC  
expansion module or PARTNER Mail VS (PMVS) module in the right slot.  
5-Slot Carrier, which can hold up to five modules. The PARTNER Endeavor  
362 processor module resides in the center slot with four 362EC expansion  
modules in the remaining slots or three 362EC expansion modules and one  
PARTNER Mail VS module in the last slot.  
NOTE:  
A PARTNER Endeavor PC Upgrade Card is required.  
In either carrier, one and only one of the modules must be a PARTNER Endeavor  
362 processor module. The modules slide into the carrier, which channels power  
to the system.  
System Modules  
The following system modules can be installed in your system:  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module provides the software  
intelligence that controls the system’s features. It has jacks for three  
outside lines, eight extensions (the top six station ports support only  
Enhanced Tip Ring devices and the bottom two ports support both  
Enhanced Tip Ring and Tip Ring devices), a Music-On-Hold audio source  
and a grounding screw. It also has one PC Card slot, a bicolor red and  
green light-emitting diode (LED), and two AAA user-replaceable batteries.  
The module also provides support for Caller ID information on system  
display phones. The system requires one PARTNER Endeavor 362  
processor module.  
362EC Expansion Module provides expanded line and extension  
capability. It has jacks for three outside lines and eight extensions (again,  
Tip Ring devices are only supported on the bottom two ports). By using  
four 362EC expansion modules, you can have a maximum of 40 extensions  
with 15 lines (one PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module and four  
362EC expansion modules).  
NOTE:  
A 362EC expansion module will work ONLY in conjunction with a PARTNER  
Endeavor 362 processor module.  
To get Caller ID, first you must subscribe to the service from your local phone  
company (if it is available) on a per-line basis, then connect those lines associated  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
with Caller ID to the line jacks. Any users with system display phones who receive  
calls on Caller ID lines will get Caller ID. For more information, see Caller ID” in  
Chapter 5.  
If you want message-waiting capability on standard phones that are equipped with  
LED-compatible message-waiting lights, you must connect those phones to the  
bottom two extension jacks on a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or  
362EC expansion module. Standard phones can be used to make calls when  
plugged into any port of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC  
expansion module. However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the  
Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip Ring  
ports (headphones do not require a ring and can therefore be plugged into any  
port). The top six station ports support only Enhanced Tip Ring devices and the  
bottom two ports support both Enhanced Tip Ring and Tip Ring devices.  
Table 1-1. Summary of Module Capacities  
Module  
362  
Lines  
Extensions  
3
3
8
8
362EC  
NOTE:  
When using a PARTNER MAIL VS Module with the PARTNER Endeavor System,  
extension numbering is done dynamically. That is, when numbering extensions, the  
module counts as six extensions. However, it is recommended that the PARTNER MAIL  
VS module be placed in the last slot of a 2-Slot or 5-Slot Carrier.  
System Batteries  
The system uses two user-replaceable AAA-size standard alkaline batteries in the  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module to ensure that the system  
programming and telephone programming settings are not lost in case of a power  
failure. See Chapter 6, ‘‘Troubleshooting’’ for instructions for replacing the  
batteries.  
PC Card Slot  
The PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module has one PCMCIA (Personal  
Computer Memory Card International Association) interface slot (hereafter  
referred to as PC Card slot). You can buy the following PC Cards to use in this  
slot:  
Backup and Restore PC Card  
PARTNER Endeavor PC Upgrade Card—To upgrade from 2-Slot to  
5-Slot system. This must be a PARTNER Endeavor Upgrade Card for use  
on a PARTNER Endeavor only.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Components  
Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial PC Card  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card  
For information on installing PC Cards, see PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions.  
System Capacity  
The PARTNER Endeavor release that you have, the carrier you use, and the  
combination of modules installed determine the number of available lines and  
extensions.  
Table 1-2. Configurations for Maximum Lines or Maximum Extensions for  
PARTNER Endeavor  
Configuration  
Maximum Lines and Extensions  
Stand-alone  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module  
(Total = 3 lines, 8 extensions)  
2-Slot Carrier  
2-Slot Carrier  
5-Slot Carrier  
5-Slot Carrier  
One PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, one 362EC  
expansion module  
(Total = 6 lines, 16 extensions)  
One PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, one PMVS  
module  
(Total = 3 lines, 8 extensions)  
One PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, four 362EC  
expansion modules  
(Total = 15 lines, 40 extensions)  
One PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, three 362EC  
expansion modules, and one PMVS module  
(Total = 12 lines, 32 extensions)  
System Mode  
The system supports two modes of operation. The mode of operation determines  
how users access outside lines from their phones:  
Key Mode. Users access individual outside lines to make and receive calls.  
Hybrid Mode. Users can access individual outside lines as in Key mode.  
However, you also can create up to four groups, or pools, of multiple  
outside lines. When the user accesses a pool to make a call, the system  
selects an available line from the pool. Since multiple lines are associated  
with the pool, the user does not know which line within the pool is being  
used to make the call.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
System mode is determined by the configuration of the processor module. By  
default, the system is configured for Key mode. Changing to Hybrid mode requires  
modifying the processor module. Only Lucent Technologies Authorized Personnel  
or Authorized Dealers can modify the processor module to accommodate Hybrid  
mode.  
The mode for your system must be decided upon before installation; and in the  
continental U.S., the mode must be registered with the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) (see ‘‘FCC Registration’’ later in this section).  
Key Mode  
When the system operates in Key mode, individual outside lines are assigned to  
users’ extensions for making and receiving calls. At extensions with system  
phones, each individual line (Line 1, Line 2, Line 3, etc.) assigned to the extension  
is represented by its own line button. Users can press any of the available line  
buttons on their system phones to make outside calls. (Standard phone users  
must dial 9 at intercom dial tone to make an outside call since their phones do not  
have line buttons.)  
Key mode enables users to easily join calls since each line button can be labeled  
using a unique line number. For example, if you are requested to join a call on Line  
2, you simply press the line button labeled “Line 2.” Key mode also lets users  
monitor call activity using the lights next to the line button—everyone who has a  
specific line assigned to their extension can tell when an incoming call is ringing  
on that line, when a call on that line is on hold, and when that line is in use.  
At installation, the system assigns outside lines to the buttons on all system  
phones from left to right, starting with the bottom row of buttons. On an extension  
basis, you can change which lines are assigned and which buttons are used to  
select the lines, if desired.  
All extensions in a system configured for Key mode are referred to as key  
extensions.  
Hybrid Mode  
Hybrid mode offers users flexibility in accessing outside lines from their phones.  
As in Key mode, individual lines can be assigned to system extensions.  
Additionally, multiple outside lines can be grouped together in pools. The system  
can have up to four pools, including a main pool and three auxiliary pools. Each  
pool is identified by a pool access code—880, 881, 882, and 883 respectively.  
Pools are represented on system phones by pool buttons. Unlike line buttons, pool  
buttons give users access to multiple lines from a single button. Each auxiliary  
pool is associated with only one pool button. Since the main pool typically  
contains most of your company’s outside lines, it is associated with two pool  
buttons. This setup allows the user to place a call using one of the main pool  
buttons, put that call on hold, and make another call using the second main pool  
button. Or, the user can establish a conference call using lines in the main pool.  
The main pool and each auxiliary pool can be assigned to an extension, for a  
maximum of five pool buttons.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Components  
System phone users can press any of the available pool buttons on their phones  
or they can enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to make an outside  
call. (Standard phone users must dial 9 or enter the pool access code at intercom  
dial tone to access a pool since their phones do not have pool buttons.) After the  
user presses a pool button or enters a pool access code, the system selects a free  
line from the pool for the user to make the call. A user can access a pool as long  
as there is at least one available line in the pool.  
A major benefit of Hybrid mode is that it allows users who have system phones  
with fewer buttons to have access to multiple outside lines and various types of  
pools. You can make efficient use of outside lines by grouping those of a similar  
type or function together. For example, you can create an auxiliary pool of WATS  
or international lines and assign the pools to different groups of users.  
Additionally, individual lines can be assigned to a manager’s extension so that he  
or she always has access to an outside line.  
In Hybrid mode, extension 10 always operates like an extension in Key mode. This  
means that every outside line in the system is associated with a specific line  
button at extension 10.  
All other extensions can be set up with access to only lines, only pools, or a  
combination of lines and pools:  
Those extensions that have pool buttons, even if they also have individual  
line buttons, are called pooled extensions.  
Those extensions that have only line buttons (including extension 10) are  
called key extensions. Key extensions cannot access pools.  
If your system is configured for Hybrid mode, keep in mind:  
A line can be assigned to only one pool.  
Individual extensions can have restricted access to specific pools.  
Individual lines can be assigned to an extension with pool buttons as long  
as the lines are not part of any pool.  
At installation, the system assigns all outside lines to the main pool and assigns  
the main pool to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of all system phones,  
except extension 10. If desired, you can remove some of the lines from the main  
pool and create auxiliary pools. Then you can assign pools and/or individual lines  
on a per extension basis.  
FCC Registration  
In the continental U.S., your system’s mode of operation must be registered with  
the FCC as either KF (Key Function) for Key or MF (Multifunction) for Hybrid. If the  
system is registered as KF, no outside lines can be pooled; if the system is  
registered as MF, lines can be pooled and individual lines also can be assigned  
directly to line buttons.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
Telephones  
System Telephones  
This guide refers to Lucent Technologies telephones specifically designed to work  
with the system as system phones. These include the PARTNER Endeavor-34D,  
PARTNER Endeavor-18D, PARTNER Endeavor-18, and PARTNER Endeavor-6  
telephones. You can also use the TransTalk© 9000-series wireless phones,  
including MDW 9000, MDW 9010, MDW 9030P and MDW 9031P Pocketphone,  
although they are not discussed in this guide. For information about a TransTalk  
9000-series phone, refer to the documentation that comes with the phone.  
System phones have several buttons in common: volume control buttons, and the  
f, C, A, h,! and S buttons. In addition, each phone has  
programmable buttons that can be used for outside lines, pools, extension  
numbers, outside phone numbers, or system features. Outside lines and pools, as  
well as some system features, require buttons with status lights. Programmable  
buttons without lines or pools assigned to them can be programmed with numbers  
or features, so you can use the feature or dial the number with one touch. The  
number in each PARTNER Endeavor-model name indicates the number of  
buttons with status lights.  
If the PARTNER Endeavor-model phone has a display, indicated by a “D” in the  
model name, users receive messages and prompts when making calls and when  
programming. PARTNER Endeavor-model phones have a 16-character display.  
(More information about the display is provided in Chapter 5.) A system display  
phone is required for system programming.  
Valid system extensions are 10 – 49. When using a PARTNER MAIL VS Module  
with the PARTNER Endeavor System, extension numbering is done dynamically.  
That is, when numbering extensions, the module counts as six extensions.  
Table 1-3 summarizes PARTNER Endeavor-model system phone features.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Components  
Table 1-3. PARTNER Endeavor-Model System Phones  
34D  
18D  
18  
6
Total Number of  
Programmable  
Buttons with Status  
Lights  
32  
16  
16  
4
Total Number of  
Programmable  
Buttons without  
Status Lights  
4
4
0
0
4
Key Mode Button  
Capacity (Number  
of Programmable  
Buttons with Status  
Lights)  
32  
16  
16  
Hybrid Mode Pool  
Button Capacity1  
5
5
5
4
Line Capacity  
Intercom Buttons  
Display2  
15  
2
15  
2
15  
2
4
2
Speakerphone  
1. The main pool uses two buttons.  
2. PARTNER Endeavor-model phones have a 16-character display.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview  
Intercom Autodialers  
PARTNER Endeavor-model system phones support the PARTNER-CA48 Call  
Assistant Intercom Autodialer at extensions 10 and 11. The autodialer provides  
Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system. The status lights next to  
each button also indicate calling activity at that extension. Users can program the  
Auto Dial buttons for either intercom ringing, voice signaling, or manual signaling.  
(Note that each user can have only one Auto Dial button—either on the system  
phone or on the autodialer—for another extension in the system.) The Auto Dial  
buttons allow the user to dial, signal, or transfer calls to system extensions with  
one touch. For more information about Auto Dial buttons, see “Auto Dialing” in  
Chapter 5.  
Standard Telephones  
You can also use industry-standard single-line rotary or touch-tone telephones,  
including feature phones with built-in feature buttons and lights, with the system.  
This guide refers to such telephones as standard phones. Lucent  
Technologies-certified standard phones are recommended.  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module.  
However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip Ring  
ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
The following Lucent Technologies phones can make use of the system’s  
message-waiting capability:  
2500 YMGL Single-Line Analog Telephone Set  
8101 Analog Telephone  
8101M Analog Telephone (This model is recommended.)  
8102 Analog Telephone  
8110 Analog Telephone  
7102 Plus Analog Voice Terminal  
Check with your local Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized  
Dealer to find out whether other standard phones with message-waiting lights will  
work.  
NOTE:  
For message waiting capability, you must connect standard phones with  
LED-compatible message-waiting lights to a PARTNER Endeavor 362  
processor module. This message-waiting capability does not work with  
standard phones with neon-type message-waiting lights.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Auxiliary Equipment  
Enhanced Tip Ring Ports  
There are eight Enhanced Tip Ring ports per processor module and 362EC  
expansion module. The top six station ports support only Enhanced Tip Ring  
devices and the bottom two ports support both Enhanced Tip Ring and Tip Ring  
devices. Connect headsets and other adjunct equipment that do not require  
incoming ringing to any port or through the AUX jack on a PARTNER Endeavor  
telephone.  
NOTE:  
Doorphones should not be connected to an Enhanced Tip Ring only port  
since doorphones rely on receiving a forward disconnect signal to  
disconnect a call. If a Tip Ring device is connected to an Enhanced Tip Ring  
only port, a forward disconnect signal is not sent and ringing is not heard at  
that port.  
Auxiliary Equipment  
You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system  
without expensive adapters or additional phone lines—for example, answering  
machines, credit card scanners, and fax machines. Many industry-standard,  
single-line devices will work with the system regardless of the manufacturer.  
For more information, refer to the list in Chapter 4 or contact your Lucent  
Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer. Also, see Chapter 4 for  
advice on setting up auxiliary equipment to work effectively with the system.  
Requirements  
An industry-standard device must meet the following conditions:  
It must be non-proprietary. That is, it cannot be made specifically for use on  
a particular telephone system. (For example, you cannot connect a Lucent  
Technologies MERLIN LEGEND® Communication System phone,  
because it is specifically designed for use on a MERLIN LEGEND  
Communication System.)  
Its Ringer Equivalence Number (REN1) cannot be greater than 2.0. (The  
REN is shown on a label on the device, usually on the bottom.)  
You can connect a standard two-line device to the system, but for best  
results it should be installed and used as if it were a single-line device.  
1.  
REN is a measure of the power it takes to ring a phone. The typical home phone line supports  
4.0–5.0 RENs; each extension jack in your system handles up to 2.0 RENs.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview  
Connecting Standard Devices  
You can connect a standard device so that it is on an extension by itself, or so that  
it shares an extension with another piece of equipment (either another standard  
device or a system phone) as long as the REN of the two devices together does  
not exceed 2.0. (System phones have 0.0 REN.) For example, you can connect a  
standard phone and an answering machine to the same extension. An extension  
with two devices connected to it is called a combination extension. You cannot  
connect two system phones on one extension. The PARTNER Endeavor  
Installation guide provides installation instructions.  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module.  
However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip Ring  
ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming  
Overview  
After the system hardware is installed, you can customize the system and  
individual telephones. This chapter explains how to use programming to  
accomplish that.  
There are two types of programming:  
System Programming allows you to customize the system to meet the  
needs of your business. When the system is first installed, it uses factory  
settings that reflect the most commonly used options. You can change  
system settings as needed.  
You can perform System Programming from extension 10 or 11. Because  
an extension cannot be in programming mode and handle calls at the same  
time, consider using extension 11 for programming. Doing so gives you the  
ability to program without disrupting call handling by the receptionist at  
extension 10.  
Telephone Programming allows telephones to be customized to meet  
individual users’ needs. Individual telephones can be programmed from  
extension 10 or 11 (Centralized Telephone Programming), or from a user’s  
extension using a system phone (Extension Programming).  
A system display phone is required for System and Centralized Telephone  
Programming. If you have any 34-button phones in the system, you must use a  
34-button display phone to program since an 18-button phone cannot be used to  
program a 34-button phone.  
The system permits programming from a remote location using a Remote  
Administration Unit—see ‘‘Remote Programming’’ on page 2-22.  
This chapter provides general information about programming procedures. When  
a specific feature name is used, it is printed in bold type. For detailed descriptions  
and step-by-step instructions, refer to that name in Chapter 5. (A Programming  
Quick Reference is provided at the end of this guide.)  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming  
Hardware Considerations  
Programming procedures use line and extension numbers. The line number  
represents the line jack on a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC  
expansion module to which the outside line is connected. Similarly, the extension  
number represents the extension jack on a 362EC expansion module or a  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module to which the system phone or  
standard device is connected.  
For each 362EC or Endeavor processor module, the system assigns three lines  
and eight extensions. The system numbers lines and extensions consecutively  
from left to right in a 2-Slot Carrier, beginning with the PARTNER Endeavor 362  
processor module in the leftmost slot; in a 5-Slot carrier, the numbering also begins  
with the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module (in the center slot), and then  
moves to the left-most module and continues consecutively from left to right.  
Figure 2-1 shows the numbering scheme for a PARTNER Endeavor stand-alone  
configuration, for a 2-Slot Carrier, and for a 5-Slot Carrier.  
Stand-Alone  
2-Slot Carrier  
5-Slot Carrier  
362EC  
Modules  
362EC  
Processor  
Module  
362EC  
Modules  
Processor  
Module  
Processor  
Module Module  
ECS  
Proc.  
362EC  
Module  
362EC  
Module  
362EC  
Module  
362EC  
Module  
ECS  
Proc.  
362EC  
Module  
ECS  
Proc.  
P
F
T
P
F
T
P
F
T
4
4
7
10  
13  
1
1
1
Line  
Jacks  
Line  
Jacks  
Line  
Jacks  
5
6
5
6
8
9
11  
12  
14  
15  
2
3
2
3
2
3
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
MUSIC  
ON  
ON  
ON  
HOLD  
HOLD  
HOLD  
P
F
T
P
F
T
P
F
T
18  
18  
26  
34  
42  
10  
10  
10  
19  
20  
19  
20  
27  
28  
35  
36  
43  
44  
11  
12  
11  
12  
11  
12  
Extension  
Jacks  
21  
22  
Extension  
Jacks  
21  
22  
29  
30  
37  
38  
45  
46  
13  
14  
13  
14  
13  
14  
Extension  
Jacks  
23  
23  
31  
39  
47  
15  
15  
15  
C
C
C
C
C
C
24  
24  
32  
40  
48  
16  
16  
16  
C
C
COMBO  
COMBO  
B
CM
C
25  
25  
33  
41  
49  
17  
17  
17  
Figure 2-1. PARTNER Endeavor Stand-Alone, 2-Slot, and 5-Slot Systems Configured for  
Maximum Lines (3, 6, 15) and Maximum Extensions (8, 16, or 40)  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial System Setup  
Initial System Setup  
After the control unit is installed, you set up the system using a combination of  
system and telephone programming procedures. In this guide, System  
Programming procedures are identified by a code (# and three digits); Telephone  
Programming procedures are identified by the feature name only.  
Use the System Planner as a guide when programming. The following sections  
provide an overview of the procedures you use for initial system setup. Chapter 5  
explains how to use the specific procedures. Other programming procedures are  
optional, but are strongly recommended to make the most of your investment.  
Programming Options’’ on page 2-22 for details.)  
Setting the System Clock  
After supplying power to the control unit, use the following procedures:  
System Date (#101) to set the month and day.  
System Day (#102) to set the day of the week.  
System Time (#103) to set the hour and minutes.  
Assigning Lines  
Key Extensions  
Use the procedures described in this section to assign individual lines to pooled  
extensions or assign lines to key extensions. (In Key mode, all extensions are Key  
extensions; in Hybrid mode, extension 10 and any extensions set to Key using  
Line Access Mode (#313) are key extensions.)  
For initial setup only, use Number of Lines (#104) to specify the number of lines  
that will be assigned to all system extensions. Then use the following procedures  
as needed:  
Dial Mode (#201) to identify any rotary lines (the default for all lines is  
“touch-tone”).  
Line Assignment (#301) to assign lines to specific extensions (if the line  
was not assigned using the Number of Lines procedure), to remove lines  
from some extensions, or to change the button used to pick up a line at a  
specific extension.  
Line Access Restriction (#302) to prevent an extension from receiving  
and/or making outside calls on specific lines.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming  
Line Ringing (Centralized Telephone Programming) to specify when a line  
will start ringing at each extension that has the line. For additional  
information about line ringing options, see ‘‘Programming a  
Automatic Line Selection (Centralized Telephone Programming) to  
specify the order in which the system selects an available line (intercom or  
outside), when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses S to  
make a call without first selecting a specific line button.  
For extensions with standard phones, set Automatic Line Selection to  
intercom first. This enables standard phones to access system features,  
including intercom calling. When users lift the handsets on standard  
phones, they hear intercom dial tone. To access an outside line, they must  
dial 9.  
Pooled Extensions  
Use the procedures described in this section if your system is configured for  
Hybrid mode to change the assignment of lines in pools and to assign auxiliary  
pools to or remove the main pool from pooled extensions. If a pooled extension  
also has an individual line, refer to ‘‘Key Extensions’’ to assign that individual  
line.  
For initial setup only, use Number of Lines (#104) to specify the number of lines  
that will be assigned to the main pool. Then use the following procedures as  
needed:  
Dial Mode (#201) to identify any rotary lines (the default for all lines is  
“touch-tone”).  
Pool Line Assignment (#207) to remove lines from the main pool and  
assign lines to auxiliary pools.  
Line Access Mode (#313) to change a specific extension’s operation from  
Pooled to Key. Refer to ‘‘Key Extensions’’ to assign lines to those  
extensions.  
Pool Extension Assignment (#314) to remove the main pool, assign  
auxiliary pools, or change the location of the button used to select an  
auxiliary pool at specific extensions. (The location of the two main pool  
buttons cannot be changed.)  
Pool Access Restriction (#315) to prevent an extension from receiving  
and/or making outside calls on all lines in specific pools.  
Line Ringing (Centralized Telephone Programming) to specify when a line  
or pool will start ringing at each extension that has the line or pool. By  
default, lines are set to Immediate Ring and pools are set to No Ring. For  
additional information on line ringing options, see ‘‘Programming a  
Automatic Line Selection (Centralized Telephone Programming) to  
specify the order in which the system selects an available line or pool,  
when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses S to make a  
call.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initial System Setup  
For extensions with standard phones, set Automatic Line Selection to  
intercom first. This enables standard phones to access equipment features,  
including intercom calling. When users lift the handsets on standard  
phones, they hear intercom dial tone. To access a pool, they can dial the  
pool access code 880, 881, 882, or 883 or dial 9 to access the first  
available line or pool in the sequence.  
Customizing Extensions  
In addition to line or pool assignments, the following procedures can be used to  
customize an extension:  
Line Coverage Extension (#208) to identify an extension as the “owner”  
of a specific outside line. A user at the extension can activate Call  
Coverage or VMS Cover for the specified line. Use Call Coverage Rings  
(#116) to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner’s  
extension before it is sent to the covering extension or VMS Cover Rings  
(#117) to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner’s  
extension before it is sent to the owner’s voice mailbox.  
Display Language (#303) to specify the language (English, French, or  
Spanish) for messages that appear on a system display phone.  
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) t o prevent other extensions with the  
same line from joining a call at the extension. This feature is also useful for  
extensions connected to a modem, fax, or any device whose function can  
be disrupted by someone trying to join it.  
Call Waiting (#316) to identify standard phone extensions that can receive  
the system (not the local telephone company) call-waiting tone for a  
second incoming call when active on a call.  
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) to prevent the extension from making  
certain types of outgoing calls (on all system lines).  
Disallowed List Assignments (#405) to assign one or more Disallowed  
Phone Number Lists to the extension. Use Disallowed Phone Number  
Lists (#404) to create the lists of outside numbers that extensions cannot  
dial.  
Allowed List Assignments (#408) to assign one or more Allowed Phone  
Number Lists to the extension. Use Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407)  
to create the lists of outside numbers that otherwise-restricted extensions  
can dial.  
(#505) to place the extension in any of these groups. See ‘‘Setting Up  
Groups of Extensions’’ on page 2-14 for more information.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming  
External Hotline (#311), or Hotline (#603) to identify the extension as one  
of these equipment types.  
NOTE:  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip  
Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
module or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require  
a ring, they can be plugged into any port.  
‘‘Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment’’ on page 2-14 provides an overview of  
the procedures you use for setting up devices such as voice messaging  
systems. Also, Chapter 4 provides detailed information and example  
applications for auxiliary equipment.  
Copy Settings  
The recommended way to set up your system is to program one extension for  
each type of phone in the system, then use Copy Settings (#399) to program  
other phones of the same type. For example, you can program one PARTNER  
Endeavor-18D phone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have  
PARTNER Endeavor-18D or PARTNER Endeavor-18 phones. See ‘‘Copy  
Settings (#399)’’ on page 5-65 for a list of the programmed settings that are  
copied.  
Changing Settings after Installation  
As your business grows or changes, you will probably need to change the way  
your system was originally programmed. This section provides some examples  
and lists the procedures you would use to change settings after installation. For  
specific details on a procedure, refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing Settings after Installation  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card  
For more information about setting these features, see Chapter 5, ‘‘Feature  
Reference.’’  
For more information on using the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC card, see  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Installation, Programming and Use.  
Changing the System Clock  
You may need to change the system clock for daylight saving time, after a  
prolonged power failure, or after a system reset. Use System Date (#101),  
System Day (#102), and System Time (#103) to set the current date, day, and  
time.  
Adding New Lines  
Key Extensions  
Use this section to add individual lines to pooled extensions or to add new lines to  
key extensions (all extensions in Key mode; in Hybrid mode, extension 10 and any  
extensions set to Key using Line Access Mode (#301) are key extensions.)  
If you add an outside line to your system, you may need to adjust some line  
settings. In particular, use Dial Mode (#201) if the new line is a rotary line, Line  
Assignment (#301) to assign the line to specific extensions, Line Ringing  
(Centralized Telephone Programming) to specify when the line will start ringing at  
each extension that has the line, and Line Access Restriction (#302) to limit an  
extension’s access to the line. Additionally, the system automatically assigns the  
new line as the last line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence. If you want to  
change the order, use Automatic Line Selection (Centralized Telephone  
Programming).  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not use Number of Lines (#104) if you add lines to the system after initial  
setup, because it changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction  
(#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line Ringing for existing lines back to  
factory settings. To add a new line without affecting other settings, use Line  
Assignment (#301).  
Pooled Extensions  
Use this section to add new lines to existing pools if your system is configured for  
Hybrid mode. To assign a new line to a pooled extension as an individual line,  
follow the procedures in “Key Extensions.”  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming  
If you add an outside line to your system for use in an existing pool, use Dial  
Mode (#201) if the new line is a rotary line and Pool Line Assignment (#207) t o  
add the line to an existing pool.  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not use Number of Lines (#104) if you add lines to the system after initial  
setup, because it changes Pool Line Assignment (#207), Pool Extension  
Assignment (#314), Pool Access Restriction (#315), Automatic Line  
Selection, and Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings.  
Additionally, it changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction  
(#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line Ringing for individual lines back to  
factory settings. To change pool assignments without affecting other settings, use  
Pool Line Assignment (#207) and Pool Extension Assignment (#314).  
Adding New Pools  
Use this section if your system is configured for Hybrid mode to create new pools.  
If you add outside lines to your system for use in a new pool, use Dial Mode  
(#201) if the new lines are rotary lines, Pool Line Assignment (#207) to assign  
lines to the new pool, Pool Extension Assignment (#314) to assign the new pool  
to specific extensions, Line Ringing (Centralized Telephone Programming) to  
specify when the new pool will start ringing at each extension that has the pool,  
and Pool Access Restriction (#315) to limit an extension’s access to all the lines  
in the new pool. Also use Automatic Line Selection (Centralized Telephone  
Programming) to add the new pool to the extension’s Automatic Line Selection  
sequence.  
Adding New Extensions  
If you add an extension to your system, you can probably use Copy Settings  
(#399) to copy the settings of an existing extension. If you wish to further adjust a  
new extension’s settings, see ‘‘Customizing Extensions’’ on page 2-5.  
Swapping Extensions  
If a user changes location, but wants to keep the same extension number, you can  
make the change easily by changing the connection at the control unit.  
For example, if the users at extensions 29 and 32 switch offices, you can  
disconnect the modular plugs from those extension jacks in the control unit. Then  
reconnect the plug from 32 into extension jack 29 and the plug from 29 into  
extension jack 32. Now the users can take their respective phones to their new  
locations, keep the same extension numbers, and retain the phones’ programmed  
settings.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services  
Changing Settings to Support  
PBX or Centrex Services  
This section applies only if you use PBX or Centrex services with your system. If it  
does not apply, go to the next section, “System Programming Options.”  
PBX services are provided by a private telephone switch.  
Centrex services are provided by your local telephone company from a  
Central Office (CO) outside your premises. These services include the  
Centrex lines connected to your control unit modules and some set of  
features—such as hold, conference, or transfer—that are available on  
those lines. Centrex services may be offered in your area under a different  
name. For specific Centrex features to be available to you, your company  
must subscribe to those features. For specific information about using  
Centrex, see the Centrex documentation provided by your local telephone  
company.  
Some of the issues you should consider when setting up your system to work  
effectively behind a PBX or Centrex system are discussed below. Chapter 5  
explains how to use the programming procedures discussed here.  
Recall Setting  
To set up your equipment to work properly with a PBX or Centrex system, first set  
Recall Timer Duration (#107) to match the setting used by your PBX or Centrex  
system (usually 800 msec, or “32”). This setting affects the length of a Recall  
signal sent by the control unit to access PBX or Centrex services.  
Dialing Restrictions  
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) is an equipment restriction intended to limit an  
extension’s dialing to “inside calls only” (using the i buttons on system  
phones) or to “inside and local calls only” (allowing calls within the PBX or Centrex  
system and local calls outside the PBX or Centrex system). However, if users in  
your system use a dial-out code (9 on most PBX or Centrex systems) before  
dialing numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system, the equipment will not be  
able to prevent toll calls for extensions restricted to “inside and local calls only”  
[unless you use Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404) to prevent dialing to  
specific classes of numbers].  
If your PBX or Centrex system includes dialing restrictions, use those instead of  
the equipment restrictions. If you have PBX or Centrex dialing restrictions on a line  
and also program equipment restrictions, both the PBX or Centrex system and  
equipment restrictions apply. However, equipment dialing permissions will not  
override PBX or Centrex system restrictions.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming  
Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers  
When you program numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system as Speed Dial  
and Auto Dial numbers, include the PBX or Centrex system dial-out code “9” on  
most systems), followed by one or more pauses, in the stored number.  
System Programming Options  
This section discusses programming options that involve multiple procedures  
(such as dialing restrictions and auxiliary equipment settings), as well as features  
that can be used throughout your system (such as Speed Dialing). You can use a  
combination of programming procedures to set up your system to operate most  
efficiently, taking into account your company’s telephone service, personnel, and  
equipment, as well as the special needs of particular departments. This section  
lists the procedures you can use; for details on using a particular procedure, refer  
to the procedure name in Chapter 5.  
Speed Dialing  
You can program up to 100 frequently dialed phone numbers—such as numbers  
for suppliers, repair services, customers—so that all users in the system can dial  
them by pressing four buttons: f (or # on a standard phone) plus a  
three-digit code. These are called System Speed Dial Numbers.  
Dialing Restrictions and Permissions  
The system has several procedures for restricting telephone use, and several for  
overriding those restrictions. You can use any combination of these procedures to  
design a system that meets your needs.  
When a user makes a call, the system checks the number dialed against all of the  
dialing that apply to the extension making the call. When the number dialed  
passes a restriction, the system goes to the next restriction, if necessary. If Star  
Code Dial Delay (#410) is active, star codes are also checked against the  
restrictions. (Star codes, typically dialed before an outgoing call, provide special  
services from the local telephone company Central Office (CO); for example, *  
6 7 enables a dialer to block the sending of Caller ID information to the called  
party.) When a user dials a star code, the system checks it against the dialing  
restrictions to determine whether the code is allowed. If the code is allowed, the  
system resets its checking procedure and checks the remaining digits that the  
user dialed to make sure the call is permitted. When a number violates a  
restriction, the call is stopped and the user hears a reorder tone (fast busy signal).  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Programming Options  
IMPORTANT:  
While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective, absolute protection  
against misuse cannot be guaranteed. System phones provide more protection  
than standard phones. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that you install  
system phones where restricting phone use is important.  
Locking an Extension  
The system offers a Station Lock feature that lets users enter a four-digit code on  
their telephone dialpad to lock their extensions. This helps prevent other users  
from making outside calls at those extensions.  
Restricting Access to Outside Lines or Pools  
A user can access a line or pool either by lifting the handset, pressing the line or  
pool button on the phone, or dialing the Direct Line Pickup feature code or a pool  
access code. If you do not want a user to access a specific outside line or pool,  
you can use Line Access Restriction (#302) or Pool Access Restriction (#315)  
to control an extension’s access to a certain line or pool (whether the line or pool  
is assigned to the extension or not). Table 2-1 provides examples of settings that  
can be used to restrict an extension’s access to specific outside lines or pools.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming  
Table 2-1. Settings that Restrict an Extension’s Access to a Specific Line  
Type of Restrictions or  
Permissions for the  
Extension  
Setting for Line  
Assignment (#301) and Pool  
Extension Assignment (#314) Access Restriction (#315)  
Setting for Line Access  
Restriction (#302) and Pool  
Can receive and place  
intercom (inside) calls only  
All outside lines and pools  
“No access” for all lines and  
pools  
“not assigned”1  
Cannot use a specific  
outside line or pool  
Outside line or pool “not  
assigned”1  
“No access” for that line or  
pool  
Can only monitor call  
activity and pick up held  
calls on a specific line  
Outside line “assigned”  
“No access” for that line  
Can only receive calls on a  
specific line or pool  
Outside line or pool  
“assigned”  
“Incoming only” for that line  
or pool  
Can only place outgoing  
calls on a specific line  
Outside line or pool may be Outgoing only for that line  
“assigned”1  
or pool  
1.  
If a line or pool is not assigned to the extension, a user can use Direct Line Pickup to  
access the line or dial the pool access code to access a line in the pool. Emergency  
numbers, Marked System Speed Dial numbers, Allowed Phone numbers, and numbers  
dialed using the System Password override all dialing restrictions if a user has access to an  
outside line or pool to place the call.  
Controlling Calls on Outside Lines  
When an extension is allowed access to an outside line or pool, you can use the  
following procedures to control calling:  
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) defines the type of calls (inside only,  
local only, or inside, local, and long-distance) that users can make from all  
lines or pools available at an extension. Outgoing Call Restriction Button  
(#114) allows the receptionist at extension 10 to quickly change an  
extension’s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting.  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404) creates up to eight lists of  
numbers that cannot be dialed. After creating Disallowed Phone Number  
Lists, use Disallowed List Assignments (#405) to assign one or more  
lists to a specific extension.  
Night Service with System Password (#403) restricts users at extensions  
in the Night Service group from dialing outside phone numbers (except  
Emergency numbers and Marked System Speed Dial numbers) unless the  
password is entered first.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Programming Options  
Table 2-2 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension’s dialing  
once it gets an outside line or pool.  
Table 2-2. Settings that Restrict an Extension’s Dialing Once It Gets an Outside Line or Pool  
Type of  
Setting for Line Setting for Line Setting for  
Setting for  
Restrictions or  
Permissions for  
the Extension  
Assignment  
(#301) or Pool  
Extension  
Assignment  
(314)  
Access  
Outgoing Call  
Restriction  
(#401)  
Disallowed  
Restriction  
(#302) or Pool  
Access  
Restriction  
(#315)  
Phone Number  
Lists (#404)1  
Can place  
intercom and  
local calls only  
(and can  
Outside line or  
pool may be  
“assigned”2  
“No restriction”  
“Local only”  
Any local  
numbers the  
extension  
should not dial  
answer any  
call)  
Can place  
intercom, local  
and long-  
distance calls  
(and can  
Outside line or  
pool may be  
“assigned”2  
“No restriction”  
“No restriction”  
Any local and  
long-distance  
numbers the  
extension  
should not dial  
answer any  
call)  
1. The Disallowed List then must be assigned to the extension using Disallowed List Assignment  
(#405).  
2. If a line or pool is not assigned to the extension, a user can use Direct Line Pickup to access the line  
or dial the pool access code to access a line in the pool. Emergency numbers, Marked System  
Speed Dial numbers, Allowed Phone numbers, and numbers dialed using the System Password  
override all dialing restrictions if a user has access to an outside line or pool to place the call.  
Overriding Dialing Restrictions  
The following programming procedures provide ways to override all dialing  
restrictions, provided the user has access to an outside line or pool:  
Emergency Phone Number List (#406) defines a list of up to ten numbers  
that can be dialed from any extension. A typical number is 911.  
Marked System Speed Dial Numbers are specially identified System  
Speed Dial numbers, which a user can dial by pressing f (or # on a  
standard phone) followed by a three-digit code.  
System Password (#403) creates a password that can be entered at any  
PARTNER Endeavor-model phone to override dialing restrictions for the  
duration of a call. The system password should be changed periodically to  
prevent unauthorized use and toll fraud.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming  
To override all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction (#302), pool  
Access Restriction, and Night Service with System Password (#403), use  
Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407) to create up to eight lists of outside  
numbers that otherwise-restricted extensions can dial. Then use Allowed List  
Assignments (#408) to assign one or more of the lists to an extension.  
Setting Up Groups of Extensions  
You can set up four types of extension groups:  
Pickup Group Extensions (#501) assigns extensions to one of four  
Pickup Groups. A Pickup Group lets any user in the system answer outside  
calls for any extension in that group.  
Calling Group Extensions (#502) assigns extensions to one of four  
Calling Groups. A Calling Group lets users ring or page all extensions in  
that group simultaneously or transfer calls into the group.  
Night Service Group Extensions (#504) assigns extensions to the Night  
Service Group. When Night Service is activated at extension 10, calls ring  
immediately at Night Service extensions regardless of how they ring at  
other times (only the lines assigned to an extension will ring).  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) assigns extensions to one of seven Hunt  
Groups. (Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging  
system.) A Hunt Group lets users ring or voice signal the first available  
(non-busy) extension in that group. If a ringing call is not answered, the  
system tries each available extension in turn until the call is answered. If a  
voice-signaled call is not answered, the call does not keep hunting. Also  
use Group Call Distribution (#206) to assign outside lines to a Hunt  
Group if you want outside calls to ring directly into a group.  
Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment  
The following programming procedures help you manage auxiliary equipment.  
See Chapter 4 for more information about auxiliary equipment configurations or  
refer to Chapter 5 for details on using the procedure:  
Fax Machine Extensions (#601) identifies extensions to which fax  
machines are connected.  
The music-on-hold feature uses the following procedures:  
Music-On-Hold (#602) activates or deactivates the Music-On-Hold  
jack on the PARTNER Endeavor processor module.  
— When this jack is activated, an audio source is connected, and Ring  
on Transfer (#119) is set to “Not Active,” callers hear recorded  
music or messages while being transferred.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Programming Options  
Music-On-Hold Volume (#614) controls the volume at which the  
music plays when the Music-On-Hold jack is active. Changes to this  
setting affect the many features that use Music-On-Hold:  
Background Music, Call Park, Call Waiting, Conference,  
Exclusive Hold, Hold, Transfer, and Transfer Return.  
Background Music lets users with system phones (other than the  
MDC 9000 or TransTalk 9000-series phones) play the recorded  
material through their phone’s speaker when the phone is not in use.  
Hotline (#603) identifies internal hotline extensions, so when a person lifts  
the handset of the hotline phone, a predetermined extension number  
automatically rings. External Hotline (#311) identifies external hotline  
extensions, so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone, a  
predetermined outside phone number is automatically dialed.  
Doorphone Extension (#604 and #605) identifies extensions to which  
doorphones are connected. Doorphone Alert Extensions (#606)  
identifies extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed.  
NOTE:  
Doorphones should not be connected to an Enhanced Tip Ring only port  
since doorphones rely on receiving a forward disconnect signal to  
disconnect a call. Connect doorphones to Tip Ring ports, which are the  
bottom two ports of any processor or 362EC expansion module.  
AA Extensions (#607) identifies an extension to which an auto attendant  
is connected. This lets the system notify users with display phones when  
they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the auto attendant.  
Also, Transfer Return Extension (#306) lets you identify the extension to  
which a call transferred by the auto attendant should be routed if the  
destination extension does not answer.  
The voice messaging system uses the following procedures:  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) assigns the extensions associated  
with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7—the  
VMS Hunt Group.  
Group Call Distribution (#206) assigns lines to the VMS Hunt  
Group so calls can ring directly into the voice messaging system  
and receive Automated Attendant Service.  
Line Coverage Extension (#208) identifies an extension as the  
owner of a specific outside line so calls on that line can ring directly  
into the owner’s voice mailbox when either Automatic VMS Cover  
(#310) or VMS Cover is on at the owner’s extension.  
VMS Hunt Delay (#506) determines when outside calls should be  
answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice  
messaging system. You can set the system for either immediate call  
handling or delayed call handling. The setting you select is used for  
both day and night operation.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming  
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) determines when outside calls should  
ring the VMS Hunt Group (always, day only, or night only) depending  
on the status of the Night Service Button (#503) at extension 10.  
Automatic VMS Cover (#310) determines whether or not an  
extension’s unanswered intercom and transferred calls and outside  
calls on lines assigned ownership are automatically covered by the  
voice messaging system.  
VMS Cover Rings (#117) specifies the number of times intercom  
and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership  
ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging  
system.  
Transfer Return Extension (#306) identifies the extension to which  
a call transferred by the voice messaging system should be routed if  
the destination extension does not answer and does not have voice  
mail coverage active. (The transfer return extension for the voice  
messaging system is typically extension 10.)  
NOTE:  
If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Coverage active, intercom and  
transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at the  
covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings  
(#116). Then:  
If the covering extension does not answer, the call is routed after the  
specified number of VMS Cover Rings (#117) to the voice mailbox of the  
extension that activated Call Coverage.  
If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active, the call is immediately  
routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage.  
Backup and Restore Features  
The PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module has one PC Card slot. This slot  
functions similarly to a floppy drive on a PC, in that information can be added to  
the system or copied from the system using a PC Card inserted into the slot. To  
use the optional Backup and Restore features of the system, you must purchase a  
Backup/Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies. Only these Lucent  
Technologies PC Cards can be used in the PARTNER Endeavor processor  
module. The same PC Card stores both automatic and manual backups  
separately. To install a Backup/Restore PC Card, see PARTNER PC Card  
Installation Instructions.  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) enables you to specify whether  
automatic backups should be performed or not. If you set this feature to “Active,”  
your system and telephone programming settings are backed up to the PC Card  
automatically at 2:00 a.m. on the first day of each month. The PC Card must be  
present in the PC Card slot for the backup to take place.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using System Programming  
Backup Programming—Manual (#124) enables you to initiate a backup of your  
system and telephone programming settings whenever you feel that it is  
necessary. It is recommended that a backup be performed after any change to the  
system or telephone programming.  
Restore Programming (#125) copies either the manual or the automatic backup  
data stored on a PC Card back to the system, thereby enabling you to restore  
settings to their status at the time of the last automatic or manual backup.  
Hospitality Features  
The following hospitality feature is for special applications, such as the  
Bed-and-Breakfast and Hotel/Motel industries. The receptionist at extension 10  
optionally can use the Intercom Autodialer to specify an extension.  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button (#114) lets you program a button on  
the system phone at extension 10 to change an extension’s current  
Outgoing Call Restriction setting without entering System Programming  
mode. For example, after a guest’s departure, a hotel manager can change  
the No Restriction setting of the guest room phone to “Inside Only” so  
outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out.  
Using System Programming  
System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole, or for individual  
lines, pools, or extensions. You can also use System Programming to set up  
dialing restrictions, define groups, or set up auxiliary equipment. Refer to the  
filled-out System Planner when you are changing system settings, and be sure  
that any changes in programming are recorded there.  
Programming Overlays  
System Programming requires a Programming Overlay placed over the dialpad of  
the system display phone at extension 10 or 11. Overlays are provided with the  
system documentation. Replacements can be ordered from the Lucent  
Technologies BCS Publications Center. (See ‘‘Reference Materials’’ under  
‘‘Product Ordering Information’’ on page B-3.) Figure 2-2 on page 2-19  
illustrates the Programming Overlays for the PARTNER Endeavor-34D and  
PARTNER Endeavor-18D phones.  
During System Programming, the normal functions of several buttons on the  
display phone at extension 10 or 11 change. For example, the left i button  
becomes s and the right i button becomes c. The  
Programming Overlay identifies these buttons.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming  
You use the following special buttons while programming:  
N and P cycle forward and backward through the  
programming procedures. You can use these buttons to select a procedure.  
(If a procedure instructs you to press N P, pressing  
these buttons one after the other enables you to repeat the current  
programming procedure.)  
n and p cycle forward and backward through a procedure’s  
parameters. A parameter is typically an outside line, a pool, an extension,  
or a telephone list entry.  
D and d cycle forward and backward through the valid  
entries. These buttons work only for fixed data, such as a line or extension  
number. They do not work for variable data such as date, time, password,  
telephone numbers, or doorphone assignments.  
r returns the current setting to the factory setting. When using Line  
Assignment (#301), removes lines from an extension; when using Pool  
Extension Assignment (#314), removes pools from an extension.  
e ends an entry of variable length, such as a telephone number in an  
Allowed Phone Number List.  
s starts the System Programming process.  
c starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process (to  
customize individual telephones centrally from extension 10 or 11).  
f when followed by 0 0, enters or exits programming mode.  
w enters a “wildcard” (a character that matches any digit dialed) in  
telephone numbers in Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407) and the  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404).  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using System Programming  
Next  
Next  
Item  
Next  
Data  
Remove  
Enter  
Procedure  
Prev  
Prev  
Item  
Prev  
Data  
Procedure  
System  
Program  
Central  
Tel Program  
Message  
Feature  
Next  
Next  
Next  
Data  
Remove  
Enter  
Procedure  
Item  
Prev  
Prev  
Item  
Prev  
Data  
Procedure  
Wild  
System  
Central  
Program  
Tel Program  
Message  
Feature  
Wild  
Figure 2-2. Programming Overlays for PARTNER Endeavor-Model 18D and 34D Phones  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming  
Button Locations  
When programming from a PARTNER Endeavor model phone at extension 10 or  
11, keep in mind that the button you press at the programming extension may be  
in a different location on the phone to which the programming applies. Figure 2-3  
on page 2-21 shows the relative location of buttons on each PARTNER  
Endeavor- model phone.  
Programming Mode  
1. Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display  
phone at extension 10 or 11—see ‘‘Programming Overlays’’ on page  
2-17 for more information.  
2. To enter programming mode, press f 0 0. The following appears  
on the display:  
PROGRAM EXT 10  
(If you are programming from extension 11, “11" displays instead of “10.”)  
3. Press s. The following appears on the display:  
10 Enter name  
This display is for the Extension Name Display feature. When you are  
entering System Programming mode, skip it by moving on to Step 4.  
4. Press s again. The following appears on the display:  
SYSTEM PROGRAM  
5. Specify a programming procedure in one of two ways:  
Direct Method: Dial the code for that procedure. System  
Programming procedures in this guide are identified by a # and a  
three-digit code (for example, System Date is #101). This method is  
best when you are using only a few procedures during a  
programming session and you know the codes.  
Cycle Method: Cycle through the procedures in numerical order.  
Press N and P to cycle forward and backward  
through the programming procedures. This method is best when you  
are using multiple procedures during a programming session, or if  
you do not know the codes.  
6. To exit programming mode, you can press f 0 0 or lift the handset  
off-hook, then place it back in the cradle.  
NOTE:  
You can talk on the phone while you program. This is useful if you call for support while  
programming. However, you must call before you enter programming mode, and you  
must use the handset to talk, not the speaker and microphone.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using System Programming  
Q
R
S
T
M
G
A
N
H
B
O
I
P
J
D
K
E
L
C
F
Message  
Ext.  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Q
M
I
R
S
O
K
T
P
L
N
J
E
A
F
G
C
H
D
B
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
C
D
B
A
Intercom  
Ext.  
Intercom  
Message  
Figure 2-3. Button Locations on PARTNER Endeavor-Model Phones  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming  
Changing Programming Type  
When you are in programming mode, you can move between System  
Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming. To change to Centralized  
Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming, press  
c. To move back to System Programming when you are in Centralized  
Telephone Programming, press c then s.  
Remote Programming  
The system permits programming from a remote location using an auxiliary device  
called the Remote Administration Unit (RAU). Remote programming requires the  
installation of two RAUs—one at your site and one at the location from which the  
programming is to be done. For more information about remote programming, see  
the PARTNER Communications System Remote Administration Unit Installation  
and Use guide.  
Telephone Programming Options  
System telephones are ready to use when they are installed, but they can be  
customized to meet the needs of your business and individual users. This  
customization is accomplished through Telephone Programming.  
Automatic Line Selection  
When a user lifts the telephone’s handset or presses S, the system chooses an  
idle line or pool. Automatic Line Selection determines the order in which the  
system looks for an idle line or pool. You can set the system to look for lines or  
pools in any desired order. For standard phones or for any phone used mainly to  
call other extensions, select an inside (intercom) line first.  
Extension Name Display  
With Extension Name Display, users can assign a name (up to 12 characters  
long) to their extension. Then, when those users make an intercom call, group  
call, or transfer a call, their name and extension number appears on the display  
phone receiving the call. Similarly, users receiving a transfer return call see the  
name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not  
answer the transferred call.  
Line Ringing  
Line Ringing defines when each outside line or pool rings at a phone. For each  
line or pool at an extension, you can specify Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring  
(phone rings after a 20-second delay), or No Ring. The factory setting for line  
buttons is Immediate ring; the factory setting for pool buttons is No Ring.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Telephone Programming Options  
Personal Speed Dialing  
Personal Speed Dial numbers are outside phone numbers that a user dials by  
pressing f (or # on a standard phone) plus a two-digit code. Unlike System  
Speed Dial numbers, which are available to all users in the system, Personal  
Speed Dial numbers are available only at the extension for which they are  
programmed. Users can store up to 20 Personal Speed Dial numbers.  
Programming Telephone Buttons  
Telephone buttons without lines or pools assigned to them can be programmed for  
system features such as Exclusive Hold or Conference Drop or for telephone  
numbers, so you can use the feature or dial the phone number with one touch.  
Once programmed, these buttons are called Auto Dial buttons, because simply  
pressing the button automatically dials the feature code or telephone number.  
A user who has a system phone with programmable buttons should consider  
programming them with a combination of frequently used features and outside  
and intercom telephone numbers.  
Programming a Receptionist’s Extension  
Call Handling Options  
If you set up a centralized telephone answering position at extension 10, use the  
following settings to customize it:  
Immediate Call Answering. If the receptionist should answer all calls, use  
Line Assignment (#301) to assign all lines to extension 10. Set Line  
Ringing for all lines at extension 10 to Immediate Ring; set the lines  
assigned at each user’s extension to Delayed Ring or No Ring.  
In Hybrid mode, Immediate Call Answering is the factory setting. (Lines are  
assigned as individual line buttons on the phone at extension 10 and all  
pool buttons assigned to users’ extensions are set to No Ring.)  
Backup Call Answering. If the receptionist should answer some lines only  
when a user does not pick up, set Line Ringing for those lines at extension  
10 to Delayed Ring; set the lines or pools assigned at each user’s  
extension to Immediate Ring.  
No Answering. If some lines should not be picked up by the receptionist at  
all, either set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to No Ring or  
simply use Line Assignment (#301) to remove those lines from extension  
10. In either case, set Line Access Restriction (#302) to No Access for  
those lines at extension 10 to prevent the receptionist from using Direct  
Line Pickup to access those lines.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming  
Backup Answering Options  
To assist the receptionist in handling calls, consider the following features:  
Automatic System Answer. Useful during peak calling periods to answer  
outside calls while the receptionist is busy on other calls. When activated,  
this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and  
plays a customized greeting. This requires an optional ASA/DXD PC card.  
For installation instructions, see PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions. Then, depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode  
(#121) is programmed, the system either:  
— Places the call on hold at extension 10 (the light next to the line  
button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other  
extensions that have the line); the outside caller hears Music-  
On-Hold, if it is available.  
— Continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line (the  
green light next to the line button at those extensions flash); the  
outside caller hears Music-On-Hold, if it is available.  
— Disconnects the call.  
The first two options provide audible and/or visual indication of incoming  
calls waiting to be answered.  
The third option is not applicable as a backup answering feature; however,  
it is useful for making brief announcements such as temporary closings or  
hours of business.  
Direct Extension Dial. Useful for routing outside callers directly to a  
specific extension or Hunt Group. When activated, this feature answers  
incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized  
message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension  
or hunt group.  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me. Useful when a receptionist leaves the  
desk for any period of time. Calls can be forwarded to a backup answering  
extension.  
Call Coverage. Useful when users are unable to answer their calls and  
want them answered by someone else.  
Alternatively, you can install a voice messaging system to provide an automated  
backup answering position. Useful when the receptionist is busy on calls, away  
from the desk, or at night, the voice messaging system answers incoming calls  
after a specified number of rings, plays a customized greeting, requests callers to  
enter an extension number, and transfers the caller to the appropriate extension. If  
no one answers at the destination extension, the caller can leave a personal  
message in that extension’s mailbox.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Telephone Programming Options  
Button Programming  
The PARTNER Endeavor-34D phone shown in Figure 2-4 illustrates the following  
programmed buttons in addition to some other system features:  
Extension Numbers. Auto Dial buttons are programmed for extensions 11  
through 28. The receptionist can use these buttons to dial or transfer calls  
to the extensions with one touch. In addition, the lights of these Auto Dial  
buttons show the status of the extension, so the receptionist can tell  
whether the phone at the extension is idle (no lights on), busy (red on),  
calling the receptionist (green flash), sending coverage calls to or manually  
signaling the receptionist (green flutter), or ringing back after the  
receptionist transferred a call (green flutter).  
Manual Signaling. A Manual Signaling button (for example, labeled  
MS-Bill) is programmed to signal the target extension. When the button is  
pressed, the user at the target extension will hear a tone for as long as the  
button is pressed. This feature is typically used by a receptionist to alert the  
boss to an important incoming call when the boss is already on a call. The  
lights of a Manual Signaling button work like an Auto Dial button to show  
the status of the target extension. Additionally, a Manual Signaling button  
can be used to place intercom calls. (Manual Signaling applies only to  
5-145 for more information.  
NOTE:  
You can have only one button for a target extension per extension. The  
button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial  
button for intercom ringing or voice signaling.  
Fax Management. A button (for example, labeled Fax-16) is programmed  
as a Fax Management button for the fax machine connected to extension  
16. With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on  
Tip Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362  
processor or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not  
require a ring, they can be plugged into any port. The lights next to the  
button show what is happening at the fax machine (for example, red broken  
flutter indicates that the fax machine is not responding—for example when  
it is out of paper). (For more information, see ‘‘Using the Fax  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming  
Line/  
Programmable  
Buttons  
Any unused  
line button is  
programmable  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Figure 2-4. Button Programming for Receptionist’s Phone  
Alternatively, an Intercom Autodialer for the extensions the receptionist dials most  
frequently can be used. This leaves buttons on the phone free for more features  
and phone numbers.  
Using Telephone Programming  
There are two ways to program a telephone: Centralized Telephone Programming  
from extension 10 or 11(see below) and Extension Programming from a user’s  
own extension (see ‘‘Using Extension Programming’’ on page 2-29).  
Telephone Models  
Figure 2-5 illustrates a PARTNER Endeavor-18D set up as a key extension and  
Figure 2-6 illustrates a PARTNER Endeavor-6 phone set up as a pooled  
extension. As you program buttons, mark their functions on the phone’s labeling  
sheet (see the examples in Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6).  
NOTE:  
A PARTNER Endeavor-6 phone only has four buttons available for lines or  
pools. If four lines are assigned, it has no programmable buttons. If the main  
pool is assigned, it has two programmable buttons. The MDW 9000 phones  
look just like a PARTNER Endeavor-6 phone when you program them  
centrally.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Telephone Programming  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Any unused  
line button is  
programmable  
Figure 2-5. Example of PARTNER Endeavor-18D Phone as a Key Extension  
Intercom  
Ext.  
Intercom  
Message  
Figure 2-6. Example of PARTNER Endeavor-6 Phone as a Pooled Extension  
Using Centralized Telephone Programming  
Use Centralized Telephone Programming to program features or store telephone  
numbers for individual extensions from extension 10 or 11. Most features also can  
be programmed on a system phone at the user’s extension. Keep in mind the  
following exceptions:  
Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed  
using Centralized Telephone Programming.  
If a user has a standard phone, Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the  
extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone  
Programming.  
If a user has a standard phone or a non-display system phone, Extension  
Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using  
Centralized Telephone Programming.  
During Centralized Telephone Programming, the display phone at extension 10 or  
11 takes on the characteristics of the telephone being programmed, including any  
System Programming settings and lines assigned to the phone. If you have any  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Programming  
34-button phones in the system, you must use a 34-button display phone to  
program since an 18-button phone cannot be used to program a 34-button phone.  
To program a phone from extension 10 or 11, use the following procedure:  
1. Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display  
phone at extension 10 or 11—see ‘‘Programming Overlays’’ on page  
2-17 for more information.  
2. To start programming:  
a. Press f 0 0. The following appears on the display:  
PROGRAM EXT 10  
(If you are programming from extension 11, “11" displays instead of  
“10.”)  
b. Press s. The following appears on the display:  
10 Enter Ext name  
This display is for the Extension Name Display feature. When you  
are entering Centralized Telephone Programming mode, skip it by  
moving on to Step 2c.  
c. Press s again. The display reads:  
SYSTEM PROGRAM  
d. Press c. The following appears on the display:  
CENTRAL TEL PROG  
Extension:  
3. Dial the extension number of the telephone to be programmed.  
The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned show  
the current Line Ringing settings; remaining buttons can be programmed  
with telephone numbers, extension numbers, or system features.  
4. At this point, you can:  
Use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the  
telephone selects a line or pool when the user picks up the handset.  
(If you want to change Automatic Line Selection for an extension,  
you must do so immediately after you enter programming mode and  
dial the extension number.)  
Use Extension Name Display to assign a user’s name to the  
extension. See Chapter 5 for the character codes. (Like Automatic  
Line Selection, this procedure must be done immediately after you  
enter programming mode and dial the extension number. If you want  
to change both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name  
Display, first change Automatic Line Selection, then press  
c, redial the extension number, then use Extension  
Name Display.)  
Use Line Ringing to change the ringing for an individual line or  
pool.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Telephone Programming  
5. Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers, Auto Dial numbers, or system  
features as described in Chapter 5.  
To erase the current programming from a button, press the button, then  
press!.  
6. To change the settings for another extension, press c, then dial  
the new extension number.  
7. To exit programming mode, you can press f 0 0, or lift the handset  
off-hook, then place it back in the cradle.  
Changing Programming Type  
When you are in programming mode, you can move between System  
Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming. To change to System  
Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming, press  
c then s. To move back to Centralized Telephone  
Programming when you are in System Programming, press c.  
Using Extension Programming  
Users can program features or store numbers on buttons from their own phones  
using Extension Programming. Keep in mind the following exceptions:  
Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed  
using Centralized Telephone Programming.  
If a user has a standard phone, Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the  
extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone  
Programming.  
If a user has a standard phone or a non-display system phone, Extension  
Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using  
Centralized Telephone Programming.  
To program at the extension, use the following procedure:  
1. To start programming, dial f 0 0.  
The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for  
the extension show the current Line Ringing settings. Remaining buttons  
can be programmed with telephone numbers, extension numbers, or  
system features.  
2. To assign a name to the extension, press left i, then enter the  
character codes. See ‘‘Extension Name Display’’ on page 5-98 for the  
codes.  
3. Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers, Auto Dial numbers, or system  
features as described in Chapter 5.  
To erase the current programming from a button, press the button, then  
press!.  
4. To exit programming mode, you can press f 0 0, or lift the handset  
off-hook, then place it back in the cradle.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning about Telephones  
This chapter explains how system and standard phones work with the system, as  
well as, combination extensions where more than one phone or standard device is  
installed. In addition, basic call-handling features and dial-code features are listed  
at the end of this chapter. See the feature name in Chapter 5 for details about a  
specific feature.  
System Telephones  
PARTNER Endeavor-model phones have several buttons and indicators. The  
following pages explain where they are and how they work.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Learning about Telephones  
Buttons and Indicators  
PARTNER Endeavor-34D  
Display  
Programmable Buttons  
(4 without lights)  
Feature  
Conf  
+
Line/Programmable  
Buttons (32 with lights)  
Intercom Buttons (2)  
Mic/  
HFAI  
Transfr  
Hold  
Message  
Ext.  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Message Light  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Feature  
Conf  
+
1
Spkr  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
Mic/  
HFAI  
Transfr  
Hold  
Spkr  
#
0
*
Figure 3-1. PARTNER Endeavor-34D Buttons and Indicators  
The following buttons and indicators appear on system phones:  
Display. (PARTNER Endeavor-34D and PARTNER Endeavor-18D only) Shows date, day, and  
time when the phone is idle, number dialed when placing a call, extension number (and name if  
programmed) calling you or transferring a call to you, and duration while a call is in progress.  
When programming, shows settings, options, and prompts. PARTNER Endeavor-model phones  
have a 16-character display.  
Line/Programmable Buttons. Used for individual outside lines or (if no line is assigned on a  
button) for programming telephone or extension numbers, or other system features (such as Last  
Number Redial). When a line is assigned, press the line button to make a call on that specific line  
(lights show status of line). When a number feature is programmed, press the button to dial the  
number or use the feature. PARTNER Endeavor-34D has 36 programmable buttons (32 with  
lights and 4 without lights); the PARTNER Endeavor-18D has 20 programmable buttons (16 with  
lights and 4 without lights); the PARTNER Endeavor-18 has 16 programmable buttons (all with  
lights); the PARTNER Endeavor-6 has 4 programmable buttons (all with lights).  
Intercom Buttons. Press to make (or answer) a call to (or from) another extension in the system.  
Feature. Press to change programmed settings or use system features.  
Conf. Press to add other parties to your call.  
Transfr. Press to pass a call to another extension.  
Hold. Press to put a call on hold.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Telephones  
PARTNER Endeavor-6  
Line/Programmable  
Buttons (4)  
Intercom Buttons (2)  
Message Light  
Intercom  
Ext.  
Intercom  
Message  
Feat  
Spkr  
+
Mic/  
HFAI  
Conf  
Feat  
Conf  
Spkr  
+
Transfr  
Hold  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
1
Mic/  
HFAI  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
Hold  
Transfr  
#
0
*
PARTNER Endeavor-18D  
PARTNER Endeavor-18  
Display  
Programmable Buttons  
(4 without lights)  
Line/Programmable Buttons  
(16 with lights)  
Intercom Buttons (2)  
Message Light  
Ext.  
Message  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Feature  
Feature  
+
+
1
1
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Feature  
+
Conf  
Transfr  
Hold  
Conf  
Transfr  
Hold  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
Mic/  
HFAI  
Mic/  
HFAI  
Conf  
Spkr  
Spkr  
#
#
0
0
*
*
Mic/  
HFAI  
Transfr  
Hold  
Spkr  
Figure 3-2. PARTNER Endeavor-6, PARTNER Endeavor-18D, and PARTNER  
Endeavor-18 Buttons and Indicators  
Spkr. Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone (if available), so you can dial and  
have a conversation without lifting the handset. The light next to this button shows when the  
speaker is turned on.  
Mic/HFAI. Press to turn the microphone on and off. The light next to this button shows when the  
microphone is turned on. Leave on to use Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) feature.  
Volume Control Buttons. Press - to decrease or + to increase the volume as follows:  
To adjust ringer volume, press while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle.  
To adjust speaker volume, press while listening to a call through the speaker.  
To adjust handset volume, press while listening through the handset.  
To adjust background music volume, press while listening to music through the phone’s  
speaker.  
Lights  
Each line or pool button has a green light and a red light. The meaning of these  
lights varies, depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line or  
pool, is programmed with a system feature, or is programmed for Auto Dialing an  
extension number (Intercom Auto Dial button). (Auto Dial buttons for fax  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Learning about Telephones  
extensions show additional information; these “Fax Management” buttons are  
described in Chapter 4. When a phone is in programming mode, the lights show  
information about programmed settings; see Chapter 2 for details.)  
Table 3-1 shows the meanings of the various light patterns for each possible  
button assignment.  
Table 3-1. Light Patterns for System Phones  
Intercom Auto  
Light Pattern  
Line Button  
Pool Button  
Feature Button  
Dial Button  
Steady On  
Line is in use.  
Green means  
you are using  
the line; red  
meanssomeone  
at another  
Green means  
feature1 is on.  
Red means the  
extension  
programmed on  
the button is busy  
(making or  
answering a call).  
extension is  
using the line.  
Off (steady off)  
Line is idle (not  
being used).  
Feature1 is off.  
Extension  
programmed on  
the button is idle  
(not being used).  
Flash (long on, long off)  
A call is ringing  
on the line.  
Green flash  
means a call is  
ringing at your  
extension. Red  
flash means a  
call is ringing on  
the line, but not  
at your  
A user is entering Green flash  
a four-digit code  
to lock or unlock  
his or her  
means someone  
at the extension  
programmed on  
the button is  
extension.  
calling you.  
extension.  
Alternating Red/Green  
Flash (red on, green on,  
red on, green on)  
Alternating  
green and red  
flash appears at  
both extensions  
in a joined call,  
and at any  
extension  
connected in a  
conference call.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Telephones  
Table 3-1. Light Patterns for System Phones — Continued  
Intercom Auto  
Dial Button  
Light Pattern  
Line Button  
Pool Button  
Feature Button  
Wink (long on, short off)  
A call on the line Green wink  
is either on hold  
or parked.  
Green wink  
means the  
call is either  
on hold or  
means the call is parked at  
on hold or  
your  
parked at your  
extension. Red  
wink means the  
extension.  
(Anyone  
who has the  
call is on hold or line can  
parked at  
retrieve the  
another  
held call.)  
extension.  
(Anyone who  
has the line can  
retrieve the held  
call.)  
Green Flutter (short on,  
A call is on  
A call on a  
Caller ID Inspect  
A call transferred  
short off)  
exclusive hold at line in the  
your extension pool is on  
(and can only be exclusive  
retrieved from hold at your  
your extension). extension  
and can be  
retrieved  
is on, a Wake Up to the extension  
Service call is  
being scheduled  
from extension  
10.  
programmed on  
the button is now  
returning to your  
phone or you are  
being manually  
signaled by the  
extension.  
only from  
your  
extension.  
Red Broken Flutter (short  
on/off, long off)  
Fax Management  
only—the fax  
extension is not  
answering calls  
(may be out of  
paper).  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back, and VMS Cover, all of which require programming on a button with lights. Can  
also apply to Background Music, and Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me, if any of them are programmed on a button  
with lights. (For more information about programming these features, see Chapter 5.)  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about Telephones  
Ringing Patterns  
System phones have these ringing patterns:  
An outside call will ring... ring... ring.  
An intercom call will ring BEEP... ring BEEP... ring BEEP. If you have a  
system display phone, the caller’s extension number (and name if  
programmed) will show on the display.  
A transferred call, or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is  
ringing back at your extension, will ring BEEP BEEP... ring BEEP BEEP...  
ring BEEP BEEP.  
NOTE:  
If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines, the PBX/Centrex distinctive  
ringing patterns are not passed to phones. Phones use the ringing patterns  
described here instead.  
Dial Tones  
You will encounter two different dial tones when calling with a system phone:  
Outside dial tone is generated by your local phone company to indicate  
that you are connected with an outside line.  
Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are  
connected with an inside line. You hear this dial tone when you are making  
an inside, or intercom, call.  
To hear the difference between the two types of dial tones on a system phone,  
press a line or pool button. The dial tone you hear is an outside dial tone. To hear  
an intercom dial tone, press i.  
Using the Handset, Speaker, and Microphone  
Every PARTNER Endeavor-model system phone has a speaker and a  
microphone, which you can turn on by pressing S. In addition, you can turn just  
the microphone on and off by pressing!. When the green light next  
to! is on, the microphone is on.  
If you prefer to dial and conduct calls without lifting the handset, you can use the  
speaker and the microphone instead. Use these techniques to make calls with the  
speaker and the microphone:  
To make a call without lifting the handset, press S to get a dial tone;  
then dial the number and you will hear the call ringing. When the other  
party answers, you can talk without lifting the handset.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Telephones  
If you are already on a call, you can switch from the handset to the speaker  
and microphone by pressing S and hanging up the handset. Conversely,  
if you are using the speaker and microphone and want to switch to the  
handset, lift the handset and the speaker and microphone will turn off.  
To turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker, press!.  
This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you.  
Use the Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) feature to answer  
voice-signaled calls without lifting the handset (see below).  
Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI)  
When you receive a voice-signaled intercom call, your phone beeps once to  
indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically, and you hear the  
caller’s voice over your phone’s speaker. If you leave your microphone on all the  
time, you can start talking when you hear the caller, without lifting the handset.  
This feature is called Hands-Free Answer on Intercom.  
Any user in the system can make a voice-signaled call to an idle system phone by  
pressing i* then dialing an extension number or pressing an Auto Dial  
button programmed for voice signaling. (You can make a voice-signaled call from  
either a system phone or a standard phone. However, if you try to make a  
voice-signaled call to a standard phone or a TransTalk 9000-series phone, it will  
ring.)  
1. The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your phone is idle.  
Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns off the microphone for  
the duration of the call.  
2. If HFAI is on and you are already on a call, you will not receive any voice-  
signaled calls to your extension—they will ring instead.  
3. If you make a voice-signaled intercom call to a busy extension, it may result  
in a voice interrupt on busy call to that extension. See ‘‘Voice Interrupt on  
Busy Calls,’’ for more information.  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Calls  
A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets you interrupt and  
speak to another user who is busy on a call and who has the Voice Interrupt On  
Busy(#312) feature activated. When you use Voice Interrupt on Busy, the  
interrupted user hears two beeps before hearing your voice. Be aware that the  
third party to whom the interrupted user is speaking will probably hear the two  
beeps and the faint sound of your voice. Therefore, the message you deliver with  
the interruption should be brief and discrete. If the interrupted user wants to  
answer you, he or she can press a programmed Talk-Back button—the interrupted  
user’s response cannot be heard by the third party in this case.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about Telephones  
Speakerphone Performance Tips  
The speaker on your system phone has a sensitive sound-activated switch. Room  
acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the  
speakerphone. To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively, follow these  
guidelines:  
Avoid placing your phone in areas with high background noise caused by  
sources such as motor vehicles, manufacturing equipment, loud voices,  
radios, printers, copiers, typewriters, other noisy office equipment, and  
heater and air conditioning fans.  
Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking. When you both  
talk at the same time, only one person’s voice comes through.  
When talking, always face your phone and stay within two feet of it.  
Place your phone at least six inches (15 cm) away from the edge of your  
desk.  
If you have difficulty hearing the other party, try increasing the speaker  
volume. If you have background noise, try turning off the microphone when  
the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak. If  
the difficulty persists, lift your handset to continue the conversation.  
In conference rooms, a separate speakerphone (such as the  
SoundStation® from Lucent Technologies) is recommended, since the  
built-in speaker on a system phone is designed for individual use.  
Standard Telephones  
In addition to system phones, you can connect industry-standard touch-tone or  
rotary dial phones—and even some feature phones (which have built-in calling  
features)—directly to the system. You can also combine standard phones on the  
same extension with system phones or other devices, without using expensive  
adapters or connectors.  
Standard phones can do many of the things that system phones can do, and you  
can save money by using them in certain situations when a system telephone is  
not needed. Follow these guidelines when using standard phones:  
Use a standard phone as a power failure backup when the power goes out;  
system phones will not work. If you connect a standard phone to the first  
extension on the PARTNER Endeavor processor module, users can place  
outside calls on the first line. You can connect a standard phone in  
combination with system phones at the power failure extension, or you can  
simply keep a spare standard phone at extension 10 to serve as a  
replacement in case of a power failure. When connected to extension 10,  
the standard phone will not ring. A standard phone can only receive calls  
during a power failure at extension 10.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Standard Telephones  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module.  
However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip Ring  
ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
To use a system feature, press # (in place of f used on system  
phones) followed by its two-digit code when you hear intercom dial tone.  
For features that use i on system phones, dial only the two-digit  
code when you hear intercom dial tone. (Instructions for using these  
features on standard phones are included in Chapter 5, ‘‘Feature  
Reference.’’)  
To use a Speed Dial number, press # followed by its two- or three-digit  
code when you hear intercom dial tone. (For details, see ‘‘Personal Speed  
page 5-205.)  
If Call Waiting (#316) is assigned to an extension with a standard phone  
connected, users hear a call-waiting tone (two beeps) when a second call  
comes in to the extension. The call-waiting tone is not repeated.  
Use the switchhook on a standard phone to place calls on hold, park a call,  
transfer a call, answer a call-waiting call, or set up a conference call. (For  
Chapter 5.)  
If the standard phone has a message light, use it to notify users of  
messages. (For details, see ‘‘Message Light On (F09XX)’’ on page 5-149  
and ‘‘Message Light Off (F10XX)’’ on page 5-147. For a list of supported  
phones, see ‘‘Standard Telephones’’ on page 1-12.) Alternatively, if you  
have a voice messaging system, the light is used to indicate that a  
message has been left in your mailbox. On a standard phone, the message  
light flashes when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has  
received a message.  
Ringing Patterns  
Standard phones have these ringing patterns:  
An outside call will ring... ring... ring.  
An intercom call will ring-ring... ring-ring... ring-ring.  
A transferred call, or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is  
ringing back, will ring-ring-ring... ring-ring-ring... ring-ring-ring.  
NOTE:  
If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines, the PBX/Centrex distinctive  
ringing patterns are not passed to phones. Telephones use the ringing  
patterns described here instead.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about Telephones  
Dial Tones  
Standard phones have two different dial tones:  
Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to  
indicate that you are connected with an outside line.  
Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are  
connected with an inside line. You hear this dial tone when you are making  
an inside, or intercom, call.  
To hear the difference between the two dial tones, lift the handset. The dial tone  
you hear (assuming the phone is set to select intercom first, as recommended in  
this guide) is an intercom dial tone. To hear an outside dial tone, press 9.  
Using the Switchhook  
Some of the call-handling instructions in this guide direct you to “rapidly press and  
release the switchhook.” Pressing the switchhook for 1/2 to 1 second sends a  
signal over the line called a switchhook flash. However, do not press the  
switchhook too quickly. If you press the switchhook and nothing happens, try  
again and press it a little longer.  
NOTE:  
If your feature phone has a button labeled “Recall” or “Flash,” use the button  
instead of pressing the switchhook. If you use the system with PBX or  
Centrex lines, your PBX or Centrex documentation may tell you to press the  
switchhook to access PBX or Centrex features. Use the Recall feature  
instead (see ‘‘Recall (F03)’’ on page 5-179).  
Limitations  
Each standard device requires one touch-tone receiver to be available in order to  
dial a call (intercom or outside) or to activate a feature using a code. Each  
PARTNER Endeavor processor module has two touch-tone receivers.  
Also, because standard phones do not have system line or pool buttons, feature  
buttons, or dedicated function buttons, basic call-handling procedures are  
sometimes different from those for system telephones. In addition, the following  
actions cannot be performed at a standard telephone:  
You cannot enter programming mode.  
Because there are no line buttons on standard phones, users must use  
Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line to select a specific line; otherwise, the  
system selects an idle line automatically when the user dials a 9 at  
intercom dial tone. (For information about Automatic Line Selection, see  
Chapter 5.) Similarly, because there are no pool buttons on standard  
phones, users must dial pool access codes at the intercom dial tone to  
request access to an idle pooled line. (See ‘‘Making Calls’’ on page 5-140  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Standard Telephones  
for instructions on using pool access codes). Otherwise, the system selects  
an idle line from a pool automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom  
dial tone.  
Unless Call Waiting (#316) is assigned to specific standard phone  
extensions, there is no indication of a second call and an inside caller will  
hear a busy tone if a standard phone is in use. If Call Waiting is assigned,  
the user hears a call-waiting tone (two beeps) when a second call comes in  
for the extension. (The call-waiting tone is not repeated.) The user can use  
the switchhook to put the first call on hold and speak to the party on the  
second call and to switch back and forth between the two parties.  
Users can make a voice-signaled call from a standard phone, but if users  
try to make a voice-signaled call to standard phone, it will ring because the  
standard phone does not have a system speaker.  
Users cannot use the System Password.  
Users cannot access the following system features: Background Music,  
Caller ID Name Display, Caller ID Inspect, Do Not Disturb, Exclusive  
Hold, Manual Signaling, Privacy, Save Number Redial, VMS Cover,  
Voice Interrupt on Busy, Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back, or Voice  
Mailbox Transfer.  
Users can, however, use Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) and  
Automatic VMS Cover (#310), which are similar to the Privacy and VMS  
Cover features.  
A display on a standard phone will not show Caller ID information, system  
messages.  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module.  
However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip Ring  
ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
A speaker on a standard phone is not a system integrated speaker;  
therefore, it cannot receive “voice” type calls, such as a group page.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about Telephones  
Feature Phones  
A feature phone is a standard telephone that has feature buttons in addition to the  
regular 12-key dial pad. For example, there are feature phones that have  
programmable auto dial buttons, last number redial buttons, hold buttons, and  
built-in speakers. You can use most of the system’s dial-code features from a  
feature phone, and program them onto a feature phone button. However, there are  
some limitations to what these phones can do.  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion  
module. However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip  
Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
The capabilities of a feature phone are in the phone itself. For example, if you  
store a number on a feature phone’s auto dial button, that number is stored in the  
feature phone. (This is different from storing a number on a system phone’s Auto  
Dial button. When you program a button on a system phone, the number is  
actually stored in the control unit.) Similarly, when you press a hold button on a  
feature phone, the call is held at the phone itself. (Callers will not hear the  
system’s Music-On-Hold. Other phones in the system cannot see that the call is  
on hold; it appears as a busy line.)  
If you want to program an outside number on a feature phone’s auto dial button,  
you must add a 9 and one or more pauses (if available) before each outside  
number. (The “9” gets an outside line, and each pause allows a few seconds to get  
an outside dial tone.)  
Note that the feature phone’s last number redial button may not work for an  
outside call. To redial the last number, use the system’s Last Number Redial  
feature by pressing # 0 5.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Combination Extensions  
Combination Extensions  
A combination extension is an extension with two devices connected to it—either  
two standard devices, or a system phone and a standard device (but not two  
system phones). (For instructions on how to install a combination extension, see  
the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Installation guide.)  
The following are examples of useful combination extensions:  
System phone plus standard telephone, for power failure backup on  
extension 10. A standard phone can only receive calls during a power  
failure at extension 10.  
System phone plus answering machine  
System phone plus fax machine  
System phone plus an external alert (such as a bell or chime)  
System phone plus headset, connect headsets and other adjunct  
equipment that do not require incoming ringing to any port or through the  
AUX jack on a PARTNER Endeavor telephone.  
The telephones in a combination extension share a single extension in the same  
way several home telephones share a single line. A system telephone works as it  
always does and a standard telephone works as it always does when connected  
to the system.Only one phone or device can be used at a time, unless you want to  
join the two on a single call (the same way two people can pick up the same call  
on different telephones at home). For example:  
Both phones share the same extension number.  
Both phones share the same voice path; that is, when either phone is busy,  
the extension is busy.  
Calls ring at both phones.  
A second call can ring at the system phone while the standard phone is  
busy, but do not use the system phone to answer the second call until the  
standard phone is idle or the first call will be disconnected.  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion  
module. However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip  
Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
If you make a voice-signaled intercom call to a combination extension with  
a system phone, only the system phone signals.  
Call Waiting (#316) does not work on a standard phone in combination  
with a system phone.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Learning about Telephones  
The lights on the system phone show what the standard telephone is doing  
as well as what the system phone is doing. For an explanation of light  
patterns, see ‘‘Lights’’ on page 3-3.  
If Privacy is active at a combination extension, no other extension can join  
a call in progress at either a system phone or a standard device. (However,  
a phone can interrupt a call on a standard device at the same extension.  
For example, if a system phone and modem are combined at an extension,  
picking up the handset of the system phone could interrupt a modem  
transmission, even if Privacy is active.)  
While on a call on a standard phone, you can use the system phone’s  
dialpad and fixed-feature buttons to handle calls. For example, you can use  
the system phone to select a specific outside line or pool, and conduct the  
call on the standard phone. Or, if someone is on a call using the standard  
phone, someone else can put that call on hold by pressing h on the  
system phone. To do this, it is not necessary to lift the handset of the  
system phone. Held calls do not ring back at a standard phone in a  
combination extension. To retrieve a held call from the standard phone, use  
Direct Line Pickup—Active Line.  
A standard phone’s message light will not light when Background Music is  
playing through the system phone’s speaker.  
If you have Caller ID, only system display phones show the Caller ID  
information.  
The ringer equivalence number (REN) of a standard device or the  
combined REN of two devices cannot be greater than 2.0. (The REN of a  
system phone is 0.0.)  
Using Telephones  
Your system provides intuitive operation of basic call handling features, plus  
dial-code features that make it easy for users to handle calls flexibly and efficiently  
from both system and standard phones. For more information about a specific  
feature, refer to the feature name in Chapter 5.  
Basic Call Handling Features  
The following features are available from both system and standard phones:  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Telephones  
Dial-Code Features  
Dial-code features are features that you access by dialing a feature code at the  
telephone dialpad. From a system phone, you can dial f or i, followed  
by the two- or three-digit code (or press a programmed Auto Dial button); from a  
standard phone, you typically dial # followed by the two- or three-digit code when  
you have intercom dial tone. Some dial-code features are not available on  
standard phones, as noted by footnotes in the following list.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Available only on system phones.  
Available only on system phones at extension 10 and 11.  
Available only on system display phones.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about Telephones  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
Overview  
There are many ways to set up auxiliary equipment—the setup you choose  
depends upon your needs and the number of devices you have. This chapter  
presents some common setups. (It does not cover how to physically connect the  
equipment, or how to program the features. See the PARTNER Endeavor  
Communications System Installation guide for installation instructions, Chapter 5  
for programming instructions, and the equipment manufacturer’s documentation  
for complete details on the device you connect.)  
This chapter shows various applications for the following types of equipment:  
NOTE:  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip  
Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring,  
they can be plugged into any port.  
In addition, you can connect the following devices to your system:  
Doorphones allow visitors to signal extensions by pressing a button on the  
doorphone; the person who answers a doorphone call can then speak with  
the visitor at the doorphone. Doorphones should not be connected to an  
Enhanced Tip Ring only port since doorphones rely on receiving a forward  
disconnect signal to disconnect a call. Connect doorphones to Tip Ring  
ports, which are the bottom two ports of any processor or 362EC  
expansion module. If a Tip Ring device is connected to an Enhanced Tip  
Ring only port, a forward disconnect signal is not sent and ringing is not  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
heard at that port. A doorphone is especially useful for providing access to  
offices or departments after hours. For example, you can install a  
doorphone outside your building entrance to allow visitors to ring  
telephones inside the building when the receptionist is not there and the  
front door is locked.  
The system supports up to two Lucent Technologies PARTNER  
Doorphones or any number of Lucent Technologies Universal Doorphones.  
Universal Doorphones offer a door unlock feature and can be installed in  
addition to PARTNER Doorphones.  
PARTNER PassageWay® Solution allows you to combine your Personal  
Computer (PC) running Microsoft® WindowsTM 3.1 or later, Microsoft  
Windows for Workgroups Version 3.11 or later, or Windows 95 with your  
phone. You can then use your PC for tasks such as dialing out from an  
electronic phone list and logging phone calls.  
Music-on-hold systems allow you to play recorded music or messages to  
callers while they are on hold, by connecting the audio source to the  
processor module. The system supports the Lucent Technologies  
Magic-On-Hold system and most models from other manufacturers. (The  
performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under  
United States Copyright law. Accordingly, in order for the performance of  
that music to be lawful, it must be licensed annually to the user by the  
copyright owners or their representatives. The Magic-On-Hold system  
includes the required license for the first year. This license must be  
renewed annually.)  
Remote Administration Units (RAUs) allow you to perform System and  
Centralized Telephone Programming from a remote location.  
Extra alerts help make users aware of incoming calls. For example, you  
can use an audible alert (chime, horn, or bell) to replace a phone ring in a  
noisy area, such as a factory. Similarly, you can use a visual alert (strobe or  
light) to replace a phone ring in a quiet area, such as a library. Lucent  
Technologies offers several compatible alerts.  
NOTE:  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip  
Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring,  
they can be plugged into any port.  
Speakerphones provide hands-free two-way operation of a phone without  
lifting the handset. Combining a speakerphone with a system phone or a  
standard phone in a conference room or office is an inexpensive way for  
several people at a meeting to conference in other parties. (In conference  
rooms, a separate speakerphone—such as the SoundStation from Lucent  
Technologies—is recommended, since the built-in speaker on a system  
phone is designed for individual use.)  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
Headsets allow users to hold hands-free conversations. A headset is a  
combination earphone and microphone worn on the head, useful for  
receptionists, salespeople, or others who need to have their hands free  
while talking on the phone. Lucent Technologies offers several compatible  
headsets. Connect headsets and other adjunct equipment that do not  
require incoming ringing to any port or through the AUX jack on a  
PARTNER Endeavor Communications System telephone.  
Specialty Handsets are designed for those individuals who need greater  
functionality than that provided by the handsets on system phones and  
standard phones. For example, an amplified handset is available for all  
PARTNER Endeavor Communications System and PARTNER phones for  
hard-of-hearing users.  
In-Range Out-of-Building (IROB) protectors are required to prevent  
electrical surges from damaging your system when phones or other  
standard devices (such as a doorphone) are installed in a location other  
than the building where the control unit is installed. The system supports  
the Lucent Technologies IROB protector, which provides coverage for up to  
3,000 feet (915 meters) for standard devices and 1,000 feet (305 meters)  
for system phones. (IROBs must be installed by a qualified technician.)  
Off-Premises Range Extender (OPRE) allows you to connect a standard  
touch-tone phone beyond 3,000 feet (915 meters) in another building on  
the same continuous property. It also allows you to use a special circuit  
from your local phone company to provide off-premises station capability.  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module.  
However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip Ring  
ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filters allow you to block “noise”  
generated by a nearby radio station, as well as most electrical devices.  
Caller ID devices allow you to store and process Caller ID information.  
Although the system provides functionally integrated, multi-line Caller ID on  
system display phones, you can connect other devices provided you  
subscribe to the service from your local phone company and connect the  
device directly to the Caller ID line. You cannot install a Caller ID device  
directly to a PARTNER extension jack or to a combination extension jack.  
Refer to “Connecting Caller ID Devices” in the PARTNER Endeavor  
Communications System Installation guide for installation details.  
NOTE:  
Caller ID devices must be connected directly to the incoming  
communications line.  
To order auxiliary equipment, refer to ‘‘Product Ordering Information’’ on page  
B-3.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
If a Device Has Trouble  
Two System Programming procedures can be used to adjust the system settings  
for auxiliary equipment installed at an extension, if a device has trouble answering  
calls or dialing out. If a device (such as an answering machine) does not pick up  
transferred or intercom calls, you can use Distinctive Ring (#308) to change the  
ringing, so that all calls ring like outside calls at that extension. If an autodialing  
device (such as a modem) has trouble autodialing, use Intercom Dial Tone  
(#309) to change the intercom dial tone for the extension to Machine (outside line)  
dial tone.  
NOTE:  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip  
Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring,  
they can be plugged into any port.  
Answering Machines  
You can use an answering machine to answer calls at night when no one is  
around, or during business hours when no one can get to the phone. If you have a  
Lucent Technologies answering machine with the Call Intercept feature, you can  
pick up a call that has been answered by the answering machine by joining the call  
from any system phone. When you do so, the system sends the answering  
machine a signal that makes it hang up.  
NOTE:  
Answering machines only work on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two  
ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion  
module.  
You can connect answering machines to your system in the following ways:  
Single answering machine. This basic setup can cover all the lines in the  
system. Anyone on the system can call the machine to retrieve messages.  
Multiple answering machines. If you get too many calls for one machine  
to cover, connect two or more machines to cover all calls.  
Personal answering machine. An answering machine can share an  
extension with a phone in order to answer calls to that extension.  
NOTE:  
If you have an answering machine and a system phone on the same  
extension, the answering machine will be able to answer calls only when the  
phone is idle.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Answering Machines  
Single Answering Machine  
The single answering machine setup (Figure 4-1) serves the entire system. The  
answering machine is connected to its own extension, and can cover all the lines  
in the system, or as many lines as you assign to it. You can install the answering  
machine on an extension by itself, or combine it with a system phone or a  
standard phone on the same extension (see “Combination Extensions” in the  
PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Installation guide).  
Telephone  
(optional)  
Lines  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
+
Feature  
1
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Conf  
Transfr  
Hold  
Mic  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
HFAI  
Spkr  
0
#
*
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Ext X  
ANS  
MACH  
Figure 4-1. Single Answering Machine  
To Use:  
Go to the machine to manually play back messages.  
From any system extension, make an intercom call to the answering  
machine extension. When the machine answers, dial its message retrieval  
code.  
From outside the system, call in on any line assigned to the machine. When  
the machine answers, dial its message retrieval code.  
To Program:  
1. If extension X is a key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
all the lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover.  
If extension X is a pooled extension, use Line Extension Assignment  
(#314) to assign all the pools to extension X that you want the answering  
machine to cover. Also, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign any  
individual lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to  
cover.  
2. Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to  
Immediate Ring.  
3. Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension,  
Pickup Group Extension (#501), Calling Group Extension (#502), Night  
Service Group Extension (#504), or Hunt Group Extension (#505).  
4. Adjust the answering machine to answer according to your needs. For  
example, set the machine to answer on the fourth ring during the day so  
someone has a chance to pick up the call.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
Multiple Answering Machines  
If a single answering machine cannot handle all your calls, you can set up two or  
more machines at different extensions (Figure 4-2) so that a call does not go  
unanswered. If one answering machine is busy, a second call will be answered by  
the second machine. A setup such as this might be used by a movie theater to  
announce movie times to people calling for information.  
Lines  
ANS  
MACH  
1
Ext X  
Ext Y  
ANS  
MACH  
2
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Figure 4-2. Multiple Answering Machines  
To Use:  
Go to the machines to manually play back messages.  
From any system extension, make an intercom call to an answering  
machine extension. When the machine answers, dial its message retrieval  
code.  
From outside the system, call in on any line assigned to the machine. When  
the machine answers, dial its message retrieval code. Note, however, when  
calling from outside, you can retrieve messages only from the first machine  
that answers.  
To Program:  
1. If your system is configured for Hybrid mode, use Line Access Mode  
(#313) to change extensions X and Y from Pooled to Key.  
2. Use Line Assignment (#301) to assign all the lines to extensions X and Y  
that you want the machines to cover.  
3. For extensions X and Y, set Line Ringing for all lines to Immediate Ring.  
4. Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting (#316)  
extensions, Pickup Group Extensions (#501), Calling Group  
Extensions (#502), Night Service Group Extensions (#504), or Hunt  
Group Extensions (#505).  
5. Adjust both answering machines to answer on a different number of rings  
(so they do not both try to pick up the same call). For example, set  
answering machine 1 to 4 rings and answering machine 2 to 6 rings. (If you  
cannot adjust the two answering machines to answer on a different number  
of rings, assign some lines to Immediate Ring at extension X and other  
lines to Immediate Ring at extension Y.)  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Answering Machines  
Personal Answering Machine  
A personal answering machine is used to answer all the calls that ring at a certain  
extension (Figure 4-3). It is useful for the following situations:  
When you do not want to dedicate an extension to an answering machine  
When the extension receives a lot of intercom calls  
When outside calls come through a receptionist and are transferred to the  
extension  
When an extension has a private line  
Lines  
Ext X ANS  
MACH  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
+
Feature  
1
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Conf  
Transfr  
Hold  
Mic  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
HFAI  
Spkr  
0
#
*
Figure 4-3. Personal Answering Machine  
To Use:  
Go to the machine to manually retrieve messages.  
From any system extension, make an intercom call to the extension. When  
the machine answers, dial the message retrieval code.  
From outside the system, call in and have someone transfer you to the  
extension. When the machine answers, dial the message retrieval code. Or,  
call in when no one will answer before the answering machine does.  
To Program:  
1. Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to the  
desired ring (Immediate, Delayed, or No Ring).  
2. If the lines assigned to extension X are also assigned to other extensions,  
adjust the answering machine to answer on the third or fourth ring so that it  
does not answer calls before someone else can. (If the answering machine  
is to cover transferred or coverage calls, make sure the number of rings is  
less than the amount of transfer return rings set for the extension. This  
assures that the answering machine will pick up transferred or coverage  
calls before they return to the transfer return extension or are sent to the  
covering extension.)  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
If you intercept a call from the answering machine, you will hear a click to  
notify you that the answering machine has turned off.  
Auto Attendant  
An auto attendant answers calls and directs them to a specified extension, Calling  
Group, or Hunt Group (based on the digits a caller dials after listening to a list of  
choices in a recorded greeting). For example, the auto attendant could answer  
calls and tell callers to press 1 for Sales, 2 for Parts, 3 for Service, and so on. An  
auto attendant can be set up for immediate call handling or delayed call handling.  
NOTE:  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip  
Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring,  
they can be plugged into any port.  
Backup for Receptionist  
A common use of an auto attendant is as a backup for the receptionist. If the  
receptionist cannot pick up a call within a specified number of rings, the auto  
attendant handles it. This prevents calls from going unanswered. Figure 4-4  
shows how the auto attendant would be connected to your system.  
Auto  
Attendant  
Lines  
Ext. X  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
+
Feature  
1
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Conf  
Transfr  
Hold  
Mic  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
HFAI  
Spkr  
0
#
*
Ext. 10  
Receptionist’s Desk  
Figure 4-4. Backup for Receptionist  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Credit Card Scanners  
To Use:  
Follow the instructions packaged with the auto attendant. Make sure that the unit  
is in backup call-answering mode.  
When callers call the main number for your company, the receptionist normally  
picks up the call. If the receptionist is busy, the auto attendant answers and plays  
a recorded message, such as: “Please hold for the receptionist or dial an  
extension number now.”  
To Program:  
1. Use Line Assignment (#301) to assign all the lines to extension X that you  
want the auto attendant to cover.  
2. Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Delayed Ring.  
3. Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension.  
4. Use AA Extensions (#607) to identify extension X as the auto attendant.  
5. Set Transfer Return Extension (#306) for extension X to extension 10.  
6. Set the auto attendant to pick up within a specific number of rings, so if the  
receptionist does not pick up a call, the auto attendant will.  
Credit Card Scanners  
Many retail businesses and restaurants use credit card scanners to get instant  
approval of credit card purchases. The system allows your credit card scanners to  
share the lines in your system (as shown in Figure 4-5). You can install the credit  
card scanner on an extension by itself, or combine it with a system phone or a  
standard phone on the same extension (see “Combination Extensions” in the  
PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Installation guide).  
Telephone  
(optional)  
Lines  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
+
Feature  
1
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Conf  
Transfr  
Hold  
Mic  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
HFAI  
Spkr  
0
#
*
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Ext  
X
Credit  
Card  
Scanner  
Figure 4-5. Credit Card Scanner  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
NOTE:  
Credit card scanners only work on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two  
ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC  
expansion module.  
Using Credit Card Scanners  
When you make a call on the credit card scanner, an outside line is automatically  
selected. If you combine the credit card scanner with a system phone or standard  
phone, you cannot use the phone while the credit card scanner is operating. You  
can use only one of the devices at a time.  
Programming Credit Card Scanners  
1. If extension X is a key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
the lines you want the scanner to use to extension X.  
If extension X is a pooled extension, use Pool Extension Assignment  
(#314) to assign the pools you want the scanner to use to extension X. Also  
use Line Assignment (#301) to assign any individual lines you want the  
scanner to use to extension X.  
2. Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select the pools and  
outside lines that the scanner is to use.  
3. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) for extension X to Assigned.  
4. Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension.  
5. If the scanner has an auto answer feature, turn it off.  
6. For multiple scanners, repeat Steps 1–5 for each extension.  
Fax Machines  
This section suggests several ways you can set up fax machines to work with your  
system. It includes instructions for programming and using a Fax Management  
button on a system phone (in order to monitor the status of a fax machine and  
transfer calls to it with a single touch), and for transferring calls to the fax machine  
extension.  
NOTE:  
Fax machines only work on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports  
of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion  
module.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax Machines  
Using the Fax Management Feature  
On any system phone, you can program a button with lights to serve as a Fax  
Management button. The lights next to this button tell you when the fax machine is  
in use, available, or not answering (for example, when it is out of paper). You can  
also use the button to transfer calls from your extension to the fax machine with a  
single touch.  
Programming for Fax Management  
To program a Fax Management button, first assign the fax machine extension  
using Fax Machine Extensions (#601). (See Chapter 5 for details.) Then  
program the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button. For more  
information, see ‘‘Auto Dialing’’ on page 5-13.  
Using the Fax Management Button  
The lights next to the Fax Management button show what is happening at the fax  
machine.  
Table 4-1. Fax Management Button Light Patterns  
Light Pattern...  
Indicates...  
Red broken flutter  
Fax trouble. The fax machine is not answering. If  
broken flutter occurs because the fax machine is out  
of paper, refill the paper. The light clears the next  
time the machine transmits or receives a call. If the  
machine takes longer than four rings to answer, the  
light shows fax trouble; when the machine does  
answer, the light changes to fax busy (red steady).  
Red steady  
Green flutter  
Fax busy. The fax machine is busy transmitting or  
receiving a call.  
Fax transfer return. A call you transferred to the fax  
machine was not answered and is returning to you.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine  
There are two situations in which you would want to transfer a call to your fax  
machine:  
You answer an outside call and hear a fax machine signaling. (A fax signal  
is a single beep sequence— beep.... beep.... beep). If you hear this, you  
should transfer the call immediately to the fax machine extension.  
You are on a call with a person who wants to send you a fax using the fax  
machine that is connected to his or her phone. You can receive the fax by  
transferring the call to your fax extension. Tell the other party to wait until he  
or she hears the fax signal before pressing the Start button on the sending  
fax machine.  
In addition, if you have a PARTNER MAIL system and a fax call comes in on a line  
covered by the PARTNER MAIL system, its Automated Attendant Service can be  
programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or (if you have  
multiple fax machines) to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines.  
There are four ways to transfer the call to the fax extension:  
If you have a Fax Management button, simply press the button. When the  
fax machine answers, hang up.  
If you do not have a Fax Management button, press & plus the fax  
machine’s extension number. When the fax machine answers, hang up.  
On a standard phone, rapidly press and release the switchhook to place  
the call on hold, then dial the fax extension number and hang up.  
If you have multiple fax machines in an extension Hunt Group, press  
&, then i 7 7 plus the fax extension Hunt Group number.  
When a fax machine answers, hang up.  
Setting Up Fax Machines  
There are many ways to set up fax machines. The following configurations are  
basic and easy to use:  
Single fax machine. Good for light or moderate fax traffic. This basic  
setup uses a published fax number.  
Fax machine line saver. Good for light fax traffic, with no need for a  
published fax number.  
Send and receive fax machines. Good for high-volume fax traffic. One  
machine sends, the other receives.  
You can install both a telephone and a fax machine on the same extension—see  
“Combination Extensions” in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System  
Installation guide. This lets you receive both voice and fax calls on the same line  
(but not at the same time). If you pick up the phone and hear a fax signal, push the  
Start button on your fax machine and then hang up.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax Machines  
If you are using the PARTNER MAIL system’s Automated Attendant Service, you  
can program PARTNER MAIL to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group  
of fax extensions automatically. Use Fax Machine Extensions (#601) to identify  
fax extensions. If you have multiple fax machines, put all of the fax extensions into  
a single Hunt Group (any group 1–6) using Hunt Group Extensions (#505).  
Restricting Dialing from a Fax Machine  
You can use dialing restrictions to restrict calling activity on a fax machine. For  
example, you can use Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) to restrict the fax  
machine to local calls only. For a more detailed discussion of dialing restrictions,  
Single Fax Machine  
The single fax machine setup (shown in Figure 4-6) is good for moderate traffic.  
The fax machine has its own line (line A), the number of which is published as the  
fax number. (The fax line can be used by other phones when all other lines are  
busy.) The fax machine is connected to its own extension (extension X).  
Fax  
CONTROL  
Line A  
UNIT  
Ext  
X
FAX  
Figure 4-6. Single Fax Machine  
To Use:  
The fax machine automatically answers all calls that come in on the fax line. If a  
call comes in on another line, you can transfer the call to the fax extension (see  
programmed a Fax Management button, you can transfer a call to the fax  
machine with a single touch, as well as monitor the status of the fax machine (see  
When you send a fax, the system automatically selects the fax line.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
To Program:  
1. If extension X is a key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
only line A to extension X.  
If extension X is a pooled extension, use Pool Line Assignment (#207) to  
remove line A from all pools and then use Line Assignment (#301) to  
assign only line A to extension X.  
2. Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A only. Set  
Automatic Line Selection to select line A last on all other extensions or  
remove line A from all other extensions if they should not use it to make  
outgoing calls.  
3. Set Line Ringing for line A on extension X to Immediate Ring. On all other  
extensions, set line A to Delayed Ring or No Ring.  
4. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) for extension X to Assigned.  
5. Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension,  
Pickup Group Extension (#501), Calling Group Extension (#502), Night  
Service Group Extension (#504), or Hunt Group Extension (#505).  
6. To monitor the fax machine, use Fax Machine Extensions (#601) to  
identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management  
button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial  
button.  
Fax Line Saver  
If you do not use your fax machine enough to justify paying for its own outside line,  
you can put the machine on its own extension. With this setup, you must transfer  
calls to it manually. If you have programmed a Fax Management button, you can  
transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch, as well as monitor the status  
of the fax machine (see ‘‘Using the Fax Management Feature’’ on page 4-11).  
Figure 4-7 shows the setup.  
Lines  
Ext X  
CONTROL  
A
FAX  
UNIT  
B
C
Figure 4-7. Fax Line Saver Setup  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fax Machines  
To Use:  
When a person answers a call and hears a fax machine signaling on the other  
end, the person can transfer the call to extension X—the fax machine extension.  
To send a fax transmission, simply lift the handset on the fax machine—an outside  
line will be automatically selected.  
To Program:  
1. If extension X is the key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
all lines to extension X.  
If extension X is a pooled extension, use Pool Extension Assignment  
(#314) to assign the pools you want the fax machine to use to extension X.  
Also use Line Assignment (#301) to assign any individual lines you want  
the fax machine to use to extension X.  
2. If extension X is a key extension, set Automatic Line Selection for  
extension X to line A, B, C,....  
If extension X is a pooled extension, set Automatic Line Selection for  
extension X to Pool D, line A, B, C,....  
3. Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools on extension X to No Ring.  
4. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) for extension X to Assigned.  
5. Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension,  
Pickup Group Extension (#501), Calling Group Extension (#502), Night  
Service Group Extension (#504), or Hunt Group Extension (#505).  
6. To monitor the fax machine, use Fax Machine Extensions (#601) to  
identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management  
button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial  
button.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
Send and Receive Fax Machines  
If your business has high-volume fax traffic, you can set up two fax machines, one  
that only sends and the other that only receives. For example, in Figure 4-8, fax 1  
is the send machine, fax 2 is the receive machine. Line A is the fax line, the  
number of which is published as the fax number. If fax 2 doesn’t answer line A, fax  
1 will. The receive fax must be on one of the bottom two ports of the processor or  
362EC expansion module.  
Fax  
Line A  
Ext X FAX 1  
Send  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Lines  
Ext Y  
FAX 2  
Receive  
Figure 4-8. Send and Receive Fax Machines  
NOTE:  
To receive a fax, fax machines rely on an incoming signal to ring. Fax  
machines only work on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports of the  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module. Fax  
machines that are used for sending only may be used at any port.  
To Use:  
When you send a fax, an outside line will be automatically selected. Incoming fax  
calls on the fax line are answered automatically by fax 2. If a fax comes in on a line  
other than line A, you can transfer the call to fax 2 (see ‘‘Transferring a Call to  
the Fax Machine’’ on page 4-12). If you have programmed a Fax Management  
button, you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch, as well as  
monitor the status of the fax machine (see ‘‘Using the Fax Management  
Feature’’ on page 4-11). If fax 1 is set for Delayed Ring on line A, fax 1 can pick  
up fax transmissions when fax 2 does not answer.  
To Program Fax 1 (Send—Ext. X)  
1. If extension X is a key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
one or more lines to extension X (including line A).  
If extension X is a pooled extension, use Pool Line Assignment (#207) to  
remove line A from all pools. Then use Pool Extension Assignment  
(#314) to assign pools to extension X. Also use Line Assignment (#301)  
to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fax Machines  
2. Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first  
(line A selected last).  
For pooled extensions, set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to  
select pools and outside lines first (line A selected last).  
3. Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Delayed Ring; set all other  
lines and pools to No Ring.  
4. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) for extension X to Assigned.  
5. Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension,  
Pickup Group Extension (#501), Calling Group Extension (#502), Night  
Service Group Extension (#504), or Hunt Group Extension (#505).  
6. To monitor the fax machine at extension X, use Fax Machine Extensions  
(#601) to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax  
Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on  
an Auto Dial button.  
To Program Fax 2 (Receive—Ext. Y)  
1. If extension Y is the key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
only line A to extension Y.  
If extension Y is a pooled extension, use Pool Line Assignment (#207) to  
remove line A from all pools and then use Line Assignment (#301) to  
assign line A and any other individual lines to extension Y.  
2. If you want it to be able to dial out when fax 1 is unavailable, set Automatic  
Line Selection for extension Y to select outside lines first (line A selected  
last).  
3. Set Line Ringing for line A at extension Y to Immediate Ring; set all other  
lines and pools at extension Y to No Ring. (For all other extensions, set line  
A to No Ring or Delayed Ring.)  
4. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) for extension Y to Assigned.  
5. Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension,  
Pickup Group Extension (#501), Calling Group Extension (#502), Night  
Service Group Extension (#504), or Hunt Group Extension (#505).  
6. To monitor the fax machine at extension Y, use Fax Machine Extensions  
(#601) to identify extension Y as a fax extension and program a Fax  
Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on  
an Auto Dial button.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
Modems  
There are several ways to use modems with your system, as described below.  
NOTE:  
Modems can connect directly to an extension jack without an adapter.  
However, if you connect a high-speed modem through the control unit, you  
may experience some degradation of efficiency and throughput, depending  
on the quality of the central office lines connected to the system. To solve  
the problem, either connect modems directly to the network interface jacks,  
or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading  
line quality.  
Stand-Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only  
A modem and a terminal allow you to dial out and connect to computer bulletin  
boards and other data services. This setup, which lets you dial out but not receive  
calls, is shown in Figure 4-9. Note that the telephone is optional and can be used  
if you want the terminal to share an extension with a phone on any port.  
Telephone  
(optional)  
Lines  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
+
Feature  
1
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
Conf  
Transfr  
Hold  
Mic  
PQRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXYZ  
9
HFAI  
Spkr  
0
#
*
Ext  
X
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Modem  
PC or  
Terminal  
Figure 4-9. Stand-Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only  
To Use:  
Follow the modem manufacturer’s instructions.  
To Program:  
1. If extension X is a key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
one or more lines to extension X.  
If extension Y is a pooled extension, use Pool Extension Assignment  
(#314) to assign the pools you want the modem to use to extension X. Also  
use Line Assignment (#301) to assign any individual lines you want the  
modem to use to extension X.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modems  
2. If the modem will only dial outside the system, set Automatic Line  
Selection for extension X to select outside lines first. If you also use the  
modem for calls within the system, set Automatic Line Selection to select  
intercom first, and include a 9 or a pool access code and a couple of  
pauses in the modem’s dialing sequence for outside calls.  
3. Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to No  
Ring.  
4. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) for extension X to Assigned.  
5. Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension,  
Pickup Group Extension (#501), Calling Group Extension (#502), Night  
Service Group Extension (#504), or Hunt Group Extension (#505).  
6. Set the auto answer feature of the modem to Off.  
Send and Receive Modem  
If you need to place and receive calls with the modem, use the setup shown in  
Figure 4-10. This setup makes line A the primary modem line, but keeps the line  
available for users at other extensions when all other lines are busy.  
NOTE:  
To receive information, modems rely on an incoming signal to ring. Modems  
only work on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports of the  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module. Modems  
that are used for sending only may be used at any port.  
Modem  
Line A  
Ext  
X
Lines  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
MODEM  
Figure 4-10. Send and Receive Modem  
To Use:  
Calls on the modem line (line A) ring only at extension X. Also, line A is the last  
line selected by other extensions, so the modem line is unavailable for the modem  
only when all other lines in the system are being used.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
To Program:  
1. If extension X is a key extension, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign  
one or more lines to extension X (including line A).  
If extension X is a pooled extension, use Pool Line Assignment (#207) to  
remove line A from all pools. Then use Pool Extension Assignment  
(#314) to assign pools to extension X. Also use Line Assignment (#301)  
to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X.  
2. For extension X, set Automatic Line Selection to select pools and outside  
lines first (line A selected first).  
For all other extensions, set Automatic Line Selection so that line A is the  
last line in the select sequence. That way, the modem line is used for  
outgoing voice calls only when all other lines are busy.  
3. Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Immediate Ring. Set all other  
lines or pools assigned to extension X to No Ring. (For all other extensions,  
set line A to No Ring.)  
4. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) for extension X to Assigned.  
5. Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting (#316) extension,  
Pickup Group Extension (#501), Calling Group Extension (#502), Night  
Service Group Extension (#504), or Hunt Group Extension (#505).  
Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment  
You can set up modems, fax machines, and answering machines to receive calls  
automatically after hours. When Night Service is on, calls ring immediately at the  
appropriate extensions, so that no human intervention is required to transfer calls  
to the fax, modem, or answering machine. When Night Service is off, you can use  
the auxiliary equipment lines for normal business purposes, so that lines are  
dedicated to auxiliary equipment only after hours.  
NOTE:  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip  
Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring,  
they can be plugged into any port.  
By putting auxiliary equipment in the Night Service Group as described in this  
section, auxiliary equipment can start ringing and answering calls whenever you  
turn Night Service on. In other words, the Night Service button at extension 10  
acts like a switch, turning auxiliary equipment on and off, as well as putting the  
system into Night Service.  
NOTE:  
If you have a voice messaging system, turning Night Service on also  
activates Night Service operation of the voice messaging system.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment  
Figure 4-11 shows a system with a fax machine and a modem connected to  
separate extensions. Line A is published as the fax line, and line B is published as  
the modem line.  
Lines  
Ext  
A
B
C
X
FAX  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Ext  
Y
MODEM  
Figure 4-11. Night Service with Fax Machine and Modem  
Using Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment  
During the day, lines A and B do not ring at extensions X and Y. When you turn  
Night Service on, calls on line A ring immediately at the fax (extension X). Since  
that line is not assigned to any other extension in the Night Service Group, only  
extension X receives fax transmissions. Likewise, with Night Service on, calls on  
line B ring immediately at the modem (extension Y).  
NOTE:  
If answering machines are connected to Night Service extensions, you can  
join a call that was already answered by an answering machine from any  
system phone. If you have a Lucent Technologies answering machine with  
the Call Intercept feature, the answering machine drops off the call when  
you join it.  
Programming Night Service with Auxiliary  
Equipment  
Use the following procedure to program Night Service with auxiliary equipment.  
1. If extension X and Y are key extensions, use Line Assignment (#301) to  
assign only line A to extension X (for the fax machine to cover) and only line  
B to extension Y (for the modem to cover).  
If extensions X and Y are pooled extensions, use Pool Line Assignment  
(#207) to remove lines A and B from all pools and Pool Extension  
Assignment (#314) to remove all pools from extensions X and Y. Also use  
Line Assignment (#301) to assign only line A to extension X (for the fax  
machine to cover) and only line B to extension Y (for the modem to cover).  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
2. Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X and for line B at extension Y to  
No Ring.  
3. Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting (#316)  
extensions, Pickup Group Extensions (#501), Calling Group  
Extensions (#502), or Hunt Group Extensions (#505).  
4. Assign a Night Service Button (#503) at extension 10.  
5. Assign extensions X and Y to the Night Service Group (#504).  
Voice Messaging Systems  
Three Lucent Technologies voice messaging systems are compatible with your  
system. You can install one of the three depending on your business needs:  
The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System resides in the control  
unit. It is recommended that this system be installed in the last slot.  
The PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System is an auxiliary device that  
connects to the system through extension jacks.  
NOTE:  
With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip  
Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
module or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require  
a ring, they can be plugged into any port.  
The PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card is a PC card voice messaging  
system.  
All three Voice Messaging Systems offer your business complete call processing  
features. Specifically, they can:  
Insure that incoming calls are answered and directed to destination  
extensions correctly and efficiently, using immediate or delayed call  
handling. (Immediate call handling sends calls directly to the voice  
messaging system, while delayed call handling allows the receptionist to  
answer calls first.)  
Answer and route calls during the day and after normal business hours.  
Alleviate the problem of inaccurate or incomplete messages by allowing  
callers to leave detailed, confidential messages for subscribers.  
Allows subscribers to assign a password to their mailbox, change their  
personal greeting, and retrieve messages. Voice mail passwords should be  
changed periodically to help ensure privacy and to help prevent  
unauthorized use and toll fraud.  
The PARTNER MAIL system also offers advanced voice mail features, such as  
outcalling, group lists, broadcast messages, and fax management. For complete  
details, contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized  
Dealer, or refer to the documentation provided with the voice messaging system.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Voice Messaging Systems  
Delayed Call Handling  
Figure 4-12 shows a PARTNER MAIL VS system that provides delayed call  
handling. This setup allows the receptionist at extension 10 to provide  
personalized service by answering calls during normal business hours. The  
PARTNER MAIL VS system (connected to extensions Z1 and Z2) handles calls  
when the receptionist is busy or not available, so calls do not go unanswered. The  
PARTNER MAIL VS system also answers calls received outside of business hours  
and prompts callers to leave a message in the receptionist’s mailbox.  
This example also includes two user extensions (X and Y), which are not  
automatically covered by the PARTNER MAIL VS system. This allows the  
receptionist to give the caller more personalized service; if the receptionist  
transfers a call to extension X or Y and that extension does not answer, the call  
returns to the receptionist. The receptionist can then take a message or send the  
call to the extension’s mailbox if the caller prefers.  
PARTNER MAIL VS  
System  
Lines  
Ext. Z1  
Ext. Z2  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
Ext. X  
Ext. Y  
(not automatically covered by  
the PARTNER MAIL VS System)  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
2
3
+
Feature  
1
Ext. 10  
Receptionist’s Desk  
4
5
6
Cf  
l
i
7
8
9
HA
0
#
*
Figure 4-12. Delayed Call Handling  
To Use:  
Follow the instructions packaged with the PARTNER MAIL VS system to install.  
During normal business hours, the PARTNER MAIL VS system uses delayed call  
handling; the receptionist picks up all calls at extension 10. If the receptionist  
cannot answer within four rings, the system routes the call to the PARTNER MAIL  
VS system where the day menu plays to the caller. Outside of business hours  
(when Night Service is activated at extension 10), outside calls are answered  
directly by the PARTNER MAIL VS system. Any user who is in the office can pick  
up calls before the PARTNER MAIL VS system answers.  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Auxiliary Equipment  
To Program:  
The following list summarizes the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System  
programming procedures you use to implement the previous example:  
1. Use Group Call Distribution (#206) to assign all outside lines to Hunt  
Group 7 (the VMS hunt group) to provide Automated Attendant Service on  
these lines.  
2. Use Transfer Return Extension (#306) for extensions Z1 and Z2 to  
ensure that calls transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system return to  
extension 10 if they are not answered.  
3. Use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to assign extensions Z1 and Z2 to  
Hunt Group 7 (the VMS hunt group).  
4. Set the VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to Delayed.  
5. Set the VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to Always.  
6. Make sure that a Night Service Button (#503) is assigned at extension  
10—the receptionist’s extension. When Night Service is on, callers hear the  
night menu when no one is available to answer their calls.  
7. Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button at extension 10 to enable the  
receptionist to transfer calls directly to extension X’s and Y’s mailboxes  
without first ringing their phones. (This is useful when the receptionist  
knows that the users at extensions X and Y are away from their desks.)  
8. Program an Auto Dial button for the VMS hunt group (i 7 7 7) at  
extensions X and Y to allow the subscribers to call in for their messages  
with one touch.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Overview  
This chapter provides reference information for programming and using system  
features. Features are listed in alphabetical order. System Programming  
procedures include the procedure code (# and three-digit number) in the heading;  
dial-code features include the feature code (F for f or I for i, plus a  
two- or three-digit code). Headings without codes are general call-handling topics  
or Telephone Programming procedures.  
Each feature includes the following information, if applicable:  
Description  
Examples  
Programming  
Using  
Related Features  
Considerations  
Valid Entries (= factory setting)  
This chapter gives step-by-step instructions, using the following conventions:  
All of the instructions in this chapter assume that system phones select  
outside lines or pools first and standard phones select intercomStandard  
phones; Automatic Line Selection for first (as determined by each  
extension’s setting for Automatic Line Selection).  
See Chapter 2 for a review of the methods and buttons you can use while  
in programming mode.  
Programming instructions tell you to use the D button to change  
values for specific settings. You can, however, enter a value using the  
dialpad if you prefer. Similarly, there are different ways to exit programming  
mode as described in Chapter 2—use the method with which you are most  
comfortable.  
For Telephone Programming, this chapter provides only the instructions for  
Centralized Telephone Programming.  
Display prompts in the chapter are shown as they appear on PARTNER  
Endeavor-model phones.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature Reference  
If you have trouble finding a feature name in this chapter, consult the index.  
Perhaps you know the feature by a different name. Or, if you know the feature by  
its System Programming procedure code or feature dial code, consult the  
numerical listings below to find the correct feature name.  
Numerical Listing of  
Procedure Codes and Dial Codes  
System Programming Procedures  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
AA (Automated Attendant) Extensions  
(#607)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you identify extensions where auto  
attendants are connected to the system. Doing so lets the system notify users  
with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from  
the auto attendant. (This procedure applies only to auto attendants—do not use it  
with the Automated Attendant Service of a voice messaging system.) With the  
exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip Ring ports (the  
bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion  
module). Because headphones do not require a ring, they can be plugged into  
any port.  
Related Features  
For each auto attendant extension, use Transfer Return Extension (#306)  
to identify the extension to which a call should be routed if the destination  
extension does not answer.  
Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Not Assigned for the auto  
attendant extension if you want to be able to intercept calls routed to the  
device.  
Considerations  
Chapter 4 provides information about using auto attendants with the system.  
On system display phones, Automated Attendant displays when a call is  
being transferred from an auto attendant. Transfer from AA or Transfer from  
Auto Att displays when a call transferred by an auto attendant was not  
answered and is being returned to your extension.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify an extension where an auto attendant is installed:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 6 0 7 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the extension number to which the auto attendant is connected. For  
example, to select extension 27, press 2 7.  
3. To assign or unassign the extension, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To assign or unassign a second auto attendant extension, press n or  
puntilthe extensionnumbershowsonthedisplay. ThenrepeatStep3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Abbreviated Ringing (#305)  
Abbreviated Ringing (#305)  
Description  
This feature applies only to system phones.  
This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates Abbreviated  
Ringing at the system phone at a specific extension. When a user is on a call and  
Abbreviated Ringing is Active, any incoming call rings only once. The green light  
next to the line or pool button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs  
up (or for a transferred call, until it returns to the transfer return extension). This  
feature prevents incoming calls from distracting users when they are busy on  
another call. To allow calls to ring repeatedly, set Abbreviated Ringing to Not  
Active.  
Considerations  
Abbreviated Ringing is typically set to Not Active for receptionists and  
others who handle many calls quickly, so they have an audible reminder of  
incoming calls.  
Abbreviated Ringing applies to outside, transferred, and intercom calls.  
The volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring.  
Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal even if  
Abbreviated Ring is set to Not Active.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Active (incoming calls ring once) ✔  
2 = Not Active (incoming calls ring repeatedly)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Abbreviated Ringing setting for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 30 5 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 12, press 1 2.  
3. To set Abbreviated Ringing, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
4. To set Abbreviated Ringing for another extension, press nor p  
until the extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Allowed List Assignments (#408)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to eight Allowed Phone  
Number Lists to a specific extension.  
Related Features  
You must use Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407) to create the lists of allowed  
telephone numbers before you use this procedure.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to extension  
2 = Not Assigned to extension ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign Allowed Phone Number Lists to an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 8 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 27, press 2 7. The following appears on the display:  
AllowTo 27  
List No:  
3. Enter the list number (1–8). For example, to select list 1, press 1.  
4. To assign or unassign the list, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
5. At this point:  
To assign or unassign another list to this extension, press n or  
until the list number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 4.  
To program another extension, press N or P  
and begin at Step 2.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407)  
Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users can  
dial regardless of other dialing restrictions, as long as they have access to an  
outside line. For example, if you restrict an entire category of calls through  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404), you can permit calls to a specific  
number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number  
List. Using this procedure, you can create up to eight lists of up to 10 telephone  
numbers each.  
Related Features  
After completing this procedure, you must use Allowed List Assignments  
(#408) to assign the Allowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions.  
Allowed Phone Number Lists override Disallowed Phone Number Lists  
(#404) and Outgoing Call Restriction (#401), but not Line Access  
Restriction (#302) or Pool Access Restriction (#315) or Night Service  
Button (#503) with a System Password (#403). (There are other ways of  
overriding restrictions—see Emergency Phone List Numbers (#406), and  
System Password (#403) for more information.)  
The entries you must make to permit or restrict long-distance calls differ  
depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix (#402). This setting tells the  
system whether a “0” (for operator-assisted calls) or “1” (for direct-dial calls)  
is required when users make long-distance calls.  
If Star Code Dial Delay (#410) is active, after a valid star code is dialed,  
the system resets the dialing restrictions to check the number beginning  
with the first digit after the star code.  
Considerations  
Each list entry can include up to 12 digits. You can use the wildcard  
character (by pressing the h button on a system phone) to match any  
single digit (it appears as “!” on the telephone display).  
If you are restricting an extension from placing long-distance calls, do not  
place numbers beginning with a “0” on an Allowed Phone Number List for  
the extension. Once a user is active on an operator-assisted call, the user  
will be able to avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial  
restricted numbers.  
If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone  
numbers in a list, you must use N or P to do so since  
entering # and a three-digit code will be considered data for the telephone  
number.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Valid Entries  
Up to 12 digits including 0–9, #, *, and h (any single digit)  
Examples  
The examples below show how you would enter telephone numbers for an  
Allowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of “Programming.” When an Allowed List is  
assigned to an extension, users can dial numbers on that list, even if the numbers  
would otherwise be restricted.  
Specific Telephone Numbers. Enter the phone number exactly as you  
would dial it. For example, to allow calls to the number 201 555-1111, make  
the following entries:  
Toll Call Prefix required  
— 12015551111  
Toll Call Prefix not required  
— 2015551111  
All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code. The following list entries  
allow calls to the 800 area code:  
Toll Call Prefix required  
— 1800  
Toll Call Prefix not required  
— 800  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 7 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the List No:prompt, enter a list number (1–8). For example, to select  
the first list, press 1.  
3. At the Entry:prompt, select a list entry (01–10). For example, to select  
the first entry, press 0 1.  
4. At the Data- - - - - - - - - - - - prompt, enter the first telephone number.  
5. To save the telephone number in memory, you must press e.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407)  
6. At this point:  
To change the phone number you just entered, press r and  
repeat Steps 4 and 5.  
To delete the phone number you just entered, press r.  
To add other phone numbers to this list, press n and repeat  
Steps 4 and 5.  
To create another list, press N or P and go to  
Step 2.  
7. Select another procedure using N or P or exit  
programming mode.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Answering Calls  
Description  
This section describes how users can answer calls ringing at their own  
extensions. Additional features enable users to pick up calls at other extensions—  
see Related Features below. Standard phones can be used to make calls when  
plugged into any port of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC  
expansion module. However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the  
Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
Related Features  
A user can join a call in progress at another extension, as long as Privacy  
is not on for that extension (see Joining Calls).  
A user can answer a call ringing at another specific extension or at any  
extension in a group. For more information, see Call Pickup and Group  
A user can use Direct Line Pickup—Active Line to answer calls on lines  
not assigned to the user’s phone.  
A user can program the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back feature on a  
button with lights to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call. Also see  
You can use Call Waiting (#316) to specify standard phone extensions that  
can receive a call-waiting tone and a second incoming call.  
Considerations  
Calls that are answered by pressing a pool button can be held,  
conferenced, or transferred; however, pool buttons cannot be used to join  
calls.  
There are several ways to access a line for answering calls:  
— On either a system phone or a standard phone, lift the handset to  
answer a ringing call (if more than one call is ringing at a system  
phone, you get the call that has been ringing for the longest time).  
— On a system phone, press a specific line, pool, or i button.  
You can also use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call,  
or to join an active call, by dialing i 6 8 and the two-digit  
line number.  
— On a standard phone, you can use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a  
ringing or held call, or to join an active call on a specific line: at  
intercom dial tone, dial 6 8 and the two-digit line number.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Answering Calls  
For system phones and most standard phones, the user can identify the  
type of call by the system’s ringing patterns. System display phones can  
also show in the display the type of call that is ringing at the extension.  
(See Ringing Patterns.) Note that there are no unique ringing patterns for  
coverage calls or forwarded calls.  
How to Answer Calls Ringing at Your Extension  
System Phone  
You can answer a call on any line or pool that is ringing, or select a specific line or  
pool if more than one is ringing:  
When the telephone is ringing, lift the handset.  
You are connected to the incoming call. If more than one line or pool is  
ringing, you are connected to the line or pool that has been ringing for the  
longest time. If the call is an intercom call and you have a display phone,  
the caller’s extension number, and name if programmed, appear on your  
display until you pick up the handset or press S.  
To answer a call on a specific line, pool, or intercom button:  
1. Press the line, pool, or button for the line you want to answer.  
2. Lift the handset or press S.  
You are connected to the call.  
To answer a call when you are already on a call:  
1. Press h.  
The call you are on is placed on hold.  
2. Press the button for the new call.  
You are connected to the new call.  
3. To return to the first call, put the second call on hold; then press the  
line, pool, or i button for the first call.  
To answer a voice-signaled call (your phone beeps and you hear the  
caller’s voice):  
— If the microphone is on, you can speak after the beep.  
— If the microphone is not on, press! or lift the handset.  
To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call (you hear two beeps and the  
originator’s voice—be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking  
probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator’s  
voice):  
1. Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold, but do not put the  
call on hold.  
2. Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button.  
The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button  
turns on. Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back is activated.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
3. Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call.  
The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not  
hear your response, but you can hear that third party.  
4. Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button again (whether  
or not the originator has hung up) to resume the conversation with  
the third party.  
The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button  
turns off. Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back is deactivated. The  
originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously.  
To answer a coverage call:  
1. If your phone is a covering extension and it rings, check your display  
to see if the ringing call is a coverage call. Also, if you have an Auto  
Dial button for the originating extension, the green light next to the  
button flutters while the coverage call is ringing at your extension  
(and it is the next ringing call you will answer if you lift the handset).  
2. Lift the handset.  
You are connected to the coverage call.  
3. The first coverage call to ring at your extension is identified in the  
display. If more than one coverage call rings at your extension, you  
can press the Caller ID Inspect button. Then press the line, pool, or  
i button next to the flashing green light to view the number of  
the extension from which a coverage call is being sent.  
Standard Phone  
If your standard phone has a button labeled “Recall” or “Flash,” use this button  
whenever you are instructed to press the switchhook.  
To answer a call:  
When the telephone is ringing, lift the handset.  
You are connected to the incoming call.  
To answer a call when you are already on a call (you hear a call waiting  
tone—two beeps):  
1. Press the switchhook.  
The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connected to the  
new call.  
2. To return to the first call, press the switchhook again.  
3. You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth  
between the two calls.  
You cannot transfer either party, conference in additional parties, or  
use feature codes while both calls are active.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Dialing  
Auto Dialing  
Description  
Auto Dial buttons can be programmed only on system phones.  
This Telephone Programming procedure lets system phone users dial outside  
numbers, extension numbers, or feature codes with a single touch, by pressing a  
programmed button. If an extension number is stored on an Auto Dial button, the  
user can dial, signal, or transfer calls to the extension by pressing the button. An  
Auto Dial number can be stored on any programmable button (a button with no  
line or pool assigned) on a system phone.  
Related Features  
You can use the Auto Dial button instead of dialing the two-digit extension  
number required for these features: Call Coverage, Call Forwarding/Call  
Follow-Me, Call Park, Message Light On, Message Light Off, Station  
Unlock, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.  
To set up a Fax Management button, program the fax extension number on  
an Auto Dial button with lights. Special light patterns on the Auto Dial button  
for the fax extension indicate fax machine status. Chapter 4 provides more  
information about using a Fax Management button. Identify fax extensions  
using Fax Machine Extensions (#601).  
You can include special functions, such as a Pause, in the Auto Dial  
number. See Special Dialing Functions for more information.  
An Auto Dial number can begin with a star code; the system automatically  
inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay (#410) setting.  
Considerations  
If you program an extension number on a button with lights, the lights show  
calling activity at the extension (see Lights).  
You can connect an Intercom Autodialer to the system phones at extension  
10 or 11 to have Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system.  
Each user can have only one Auto Dial button—either on the system phone  
or on the Autodialer—for another extension in the system. That button can  
be programmed for intercom ringing, intercom voice signaling, or manual  
signaling.  
When programming emergency numbers for Auto Dialing and/or making  
test calls to those numbers, you should: 1) Remain on the line and briefly  
explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2)  
Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late  
evening.  
Auto Dial buttons do not override dialing restrictions for an extension.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
PARTNER-6 phones have only four buttons available for lines, pools, and/or  
Auto Dial numbers.  
A combined total of 576 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial  
numbers can be programmed.  
For PBX or Centrex systems that require a dial-out code to make calls  
outside the PBX or Centrex system, include the dial-out code followed by  
one or more pauses (if available) on an Auto Dial button for a number  
outside the PBX or Centrex system. (See “Changing Settings to Support  
PBX or Centrex Services” in Chapter 2 for more information.)  
Examples  
The examples below show some possible entries for an Auto Dial number in  
Step 4 of “Programming” below.  
Outside Phone Number. Enter the phone number (up to 28 digits) exactly  
as you would dial it. For example, to program 555-2398, press 5 5 5 2  
3 9 8.  
Extension Number. Press the left i button and enter the two-digit  
extension number. Press * before the extension number to program the  
Auto Dial button to voice signal an extension. For example, to program  
extension 20 for voice signaling, press i * 2 0. The display  
reads:  
Intercom *20  
Feature Code. Enter the appropriate code. For example, to program a  
button to turn on the message light at extension 20, press f 0 9 2  
0. When you press the programmed button, the Message Light at  
extension 20 turns on.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program an Auto Dial button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Enter an outside phone number, feature code, or PBX/Centrex feature  
access code; or press left i and enter an extension number.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to program additional Auto Dial buttons, or exit  
programming mode.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auto Dialing  
Using  
From a system phone, to dial an outside number or extension number (you can lift  
the handset or press S, but you do not have to do so):  
1. If you want to call on a specific line, press the line button (or press i  
8 and dial the two-digit line number).  
If you did not lift the handset, the lights next to S and! go on, and  
you are active on the speakerphone.  
If you want to call using a specific pool on a pooled extension, press the  
pool button (or press i and dial the three-digit pool access code).  
If you did not lift the handset, the lights next to S and ! go on, and  
you are active on the speakerphone.  
2. Press the Auto Dial button on which the outside number or extension  
number is programmed.  
The system automatically selects a line if you did not specify one, turns on  
the speaker (if you did not lift the handset), and dials the Auto Dial number.  
The number being dialed will show on a display phone.  
To use an Auto Dial button programmed with a feature code, follow the directions  
for the feature you want to use.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you prevent a user from joining an  
active call at an extension. When Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an  
extension, other users cannot join active calls at that extension. This feature is  
typically used for standard phones and extensions connected to fax machines,  
modems, and credit card scanners, which make and receive data calls that should  
not be interrupted. This feature can provide the Privacy function for standard  
phones.  
Related Features  
Users cannot join calls in progress on pool buttons regardless of the setting  
for this procedure or the state of the Privacy button.  
To manually change an extension’s Privacy state, system phone users can  
program the Privacy feature on a button with lights. Users can then press  
the Privacy button to activate the feature (green light on) or deactivate the  
feature (green light off) when they want someone to join a call at their  
extension. (If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned at an extension, the  
green light is lit automatically after programming the Privacy button to  
indicate that Privacy is currently active. If this is the case, and the Privacy  
button is pressed, the feature is deactivated. To activate Privacy again, you  
must press the button.)  
This feature applies only to active calls. Any user can retrieve a held call  
unless Exclusive Hold is used.  
Considerations  
If you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device—such  
as an answering machine, a voice messaging system, or an auto  
attendant—make sure Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the  
auxiliary equipment extension.  
Standard phones and system phones without a programmed Privacy  
button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 0 4 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 16, press 1 6.  
3. To assign or unassign Automatic Extension Privacy, press D until the  
appropriate value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Automatic Line Selection  
Description  
This Telephone Programming procedure determines the line or pool a user is  
connected to after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker to make a call. The  
system looks for lines or pools in the order specified by this procedure and selects  
the first available line or pool. For example, if you specify outside lines or pools  
first for an extension, but all outside lines or pools are busy, the user will hear the  
intercom dial tone after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker.  
Related Features  
To copy the Automatic Line Selection setting (as well as other system  
settings) to other extensions, you can use Copy Settings (#399).  
For an extension identified as an Hotline (#603) or Doorphone Extension  
(#604/#605), program the extension to select only the intercom, with no  
outside lines in the selection sequence.  
For an extension identified as an External Hotline (#311), program the  
extension to select outside lines or pools first.  
Considerations  
This feature must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 only, using  
Centralized Telephone Programming. Individual users cannot program this  
feature directly.  
You should program Automatic Line Selection when you first enter  
Centralized Telephone Programming, before programming any other  
features. However, if you want to program both Automatic Line Selection  
and Extension Name Display (which also must be programmed when you  
first enter Centralized Telephone Programming), first program Automatic  
Line Selection, then exit and re-enter Centralized Telephone Programming  
to program Extension Name Display.  
For standard touch-tone or rotary phones, or for any phone used mainly to  
call other extensions, program the extension to select intercom first.  
For combination extensions, the automatic line selection for both devices  
(including a standard device) follows the automatic line selection for the  
extension.  
You do not need to include all available lines or pools for an extension, only  
the ones you want the system to search through and connect automatically.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Automatic Line Selection  
Valid Entries  
Key Extension: Outside system lines, Intercom ✔  
Pooled Extension: Pool 880 button 1, button 2, Intercom, ✔  
Pools 881-883, individual lines  
NOTE:  
The Valid Entries are given in order of appearance.The () represents the  
default.  
Examples: System Phone  
At key extensions, with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting, the system  
first searches to find an idle outside line in numerical order (starting with the  
lowest line number). Then, if all outside lines are busy, the system searches for an  
idle intercom line. This order can be changed, however, to accommodate your  
business needs. For example, a telemarketing firm with a WATS line (line 5) to  
reduce telephone expenses would set Automatic Line Selection for all  
telemarketers’ extensions to “05, 01, 02, 03, 04, Intercom.” This way the WATS  
line would be selected first.  
At pooled extensions, with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting, the  
system first searches to find an available line in the main pool (pool 880 button 1,  
then button 2). If all outside lines in the pool are busy, the system selects an idle  
intercom line. However, you can change the order to accommodate a different  
automatic line selection. For example, your boss prefers her individual line (line  
15) to be selected when she lifts the handset then auxiliary pool 881, which is  
used for making international calls. To do this, set Automatic Line Selection to  
“15, 881, Intercom.”  
Examples: Standard Phone  
If a standard phone user intends to place intercom calls and access system  
features, Automatic Line Selection for his or her extension should be set to  
intercom first for proper operation. For example, the setting for a standard phone  
in a lobby, used for internal calling or making local calls on line 1, would be  
“Intercom, 1.”  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program Automatic Line Selection for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Automatic Line  
Selection.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
3. Press * *.  
4. Press the line, pool, or i buttons in the desired order. For each  
button pressed, the following appears on the display:  
Auto Line Select  
5. To exit Automatic Line Selection, press * *.  
6. Press c and enter a new extension number or exit  
programming mode.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic System Answer Button (#111)  
Automatic System Answer Button  
(#111)  
This feature is available only on the system phone at extension 10.  
This System Programming procedure identifies a button to be used to turn  
Automatic System Answer (ASA) on and off. This feature helps the receptionist  
answer calls during busy periods.  
When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Automatic System Answer,  
the system answers it after a specified number of rings and plays a short  
user-recorded greeting to the caller. Then, depending on how Automatic System  
Answer Mode (#121) is programmed, the system does one of the following:  
Places the call on hold at extension 10 (the light next to the line button  
winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have  
the line); the outside caller hears Music-On-Hold, if it is available.  
Continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line (the green light  
next to the line button at those extensions flash); the outside caller hears  
Music-On-Hold, if it is available.  
Disconnects the call.  
Related Features  
Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified  
using Automatic System Answer Lines (#204).  
Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are  
picked up after two rings, as a default. To change the number of rings, use  
Automatic System Answer Delay (#110).  
You must use Automatic System Answer Record/Playback to record the  
greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call.  
For callers to hear Music-On-Hold, Music-On-Hold (#602) must be Active  
and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module.  
The Automatic System Answer button returns to the status (on/off) it was in  
before a power failure occurred or System Reset (#728) was used.  
Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the  
disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by  
Hold Disconnect Time (#203).  
Direct Extension Dial is an alternative system answering feature that lets  
outside callers dial an extension or Hunt Group number directly, without the  
aid of the receptionist.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Considerations  
The Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed (see PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions).  
Use the Automatic System Answer Record/Playback feature to record a  
message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default  
message.  
An Automatic System Answer button must be programmed on a button with  
lights on the system display phone at extensions 10. (This feature will not  
work if it is programmed on a button without lights.)  
Automatic System Answer can handle up to three outside calls  
simultaneously.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
3 = Select button (then press a programmable button to assign Automatic System  
Answer to that button)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign or unassign an Automatic System Answer button with lights at extension  
10:  
1. Press f0 0 s s# 1 1 1.  
2. If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to the first available button,  
press D until the following appears on the display:  
ASA Button  
1 Assigned-Ext10  
If you want to unassign Automatic System Answer, press D until the  
following appears on the display:  
ASA Button  
2 Not Assigned  
If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to a specific button, press  
3. The following appears on the display:  
ASA Button  
3 Select Button  
Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Automatic System  
Answer to that button.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic System Answer Button (#111)  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
4. Label the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10.  
Using  
To turn Automatic System Answer on:  
Press the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10.  
The green light is on steady and Automatic System Answer is on. If calls  
are ringing when Automatic System Answer is turned on, the calls will be  
answered immediately by the system.  
To turn Automatic System Answer off:  
Press the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10.  
The green light goes off and Automatic System Answer is off. Any calls in  
the process of being answered by the system will continue to hear the  
recorded message and will be placed on hold.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Automatic System Answer Delay  
(#110)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure specifies the number of times (0–9) an  
incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Automatic System Answer  
feature.  
Related Features  
After a call is answered, Automatic System Answer plays a greeting then  
either places the call on hold, provides continuous ringing, or disconnects  
the call depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode  
(#121).  
Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified  
using Automatic System Answer Lines (#204).  
You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to  
turn Automatic System Answer on and off. Use Automatic System  
Answer Button (#111) to program the button.  
You must use Automatic System Answer Record/Playback to record the  
greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call.  
If you use Caller ID, make sure Automatic System Answer Delay is set to 2  
rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured.  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed (see PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions).  
Use the Automatic System Answer Record/Playback feature to record a  
message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default  
message.  
This feature works independently of Line Ringing, which determines how  
an outside call rings at the extension—immediately, after a 20 second  
delay, or not at all. Automatic System Answer Delay specifies the number of  
rings a caller hears before the system answers the call.  
Valid Entries  
0–9 (0 rings = answered immediately)  
2 ✔  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Automatic System Answer Delay (#110)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and on system phones.)  
To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the  
system answers it:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 1 0.  
2. To change the number of rings, press D until the appropriate value  
displays—see “Valid Entries” above.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Automatic System Answer Lines  
(#204)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies the lines on which incoming calls  
should be answered by the Automatic System Answer feature.  
Related Features  
After a call is answered, Automatic System Answer plays a greeting and  
then either places the call on hold, provides continuous ringing, or  
disconnects the call depending on the setting of Automatic System  
Answer Mode (#121).  
You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to  
turn this feature on and off. Use Automatic System Answer Button  
(#111) to program the button.  
Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are  
picked up after two rings, as a default. To change this number, use  
Automatic System Answer Delay (#110).  
You must use Automatic System Answer Record/Playback to record the  
greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call. If there is  
no message recorded for Automatic System Answer, the caller will be  
placed on hold immediately after the system answers.  
For callers to hear Music-On-Hold, Music-On-Hold (#602) must be Active  
and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module.  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed (see PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions).  
Use the Automatic System Answer Record/Playback feature to record a  
message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default  
message.  
All lines programmed with Automatic System Answer should be assigned to  
extension 10.  
Only outside calls on Automatic System Answer lines are answered  
automatically. Intercom, transferred, and transfer-return calls are not  
answered automatically.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatic System Answer Lines (#204)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered by the system:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 2 0 4.  
2. Enter the two-digit system line number of the desired line. For example, to  
specify line 1, press 0 1.  
3. To assign or unassign the line, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
4. To identify another line, press n or p until the line number  
shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all the lines that you want to identify.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Automatic System Answer Mode  
(#121)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure determines how the system handles  
Automatic System Answer calls after the greeting plays. There are three available  
modes:  
Hold: places the call on hold at extension 10 (the light next to the line  
button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions  
that have the line); the outside caller hears Music-On-Hold, if it is available.  
Ring: continues to ring and the green light next to the line button continues  
to flash at all extensions that have access to the line; the outside caller  
hears Music-On-Hold, if it is available.  
Disconnect: ends the call immediately after the Automatic System Answer  
greeting plays.  
Related Features  
Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified  
using Automatic System Answer Lines (#204).  
You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to  
turn Automatic System Answer on and off. Use Automatic System  
Answer Button (#111) to program the button.  
Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are  
picked up after two rings, as a default. To change the number of rings, use  
Automatic System Answer Delay (#110).  
You must use Automatic System Answer Record/Playback to record the  
greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call.  
For callers to hear Music-On-Hold, Music-On-Hold (#602) must be Active  
and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module.  
Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the  
disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by  
Hold Disconnect Time (#203).  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed (see PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions).  
Use the Automatic System Answer Record/Playback feature to record a  
message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default  
message.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatic System Answer Mode (#121)  
If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold, calls are placed on hold  
at extension 10; however, any extension with access to the line on which  
the call is held can retrieve the call.  
If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold and a call is placed on  
hold for longer than one minute, the system generates a short Hold  
Reminder Tone at extension 10. This tone sounds once every minute until  
the held call is retrieved, or until the caller hangs up.  
If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold or Disconnect, you can  
intercept a call while the message is playing—the light for the call will be  
steady red. To intercept the call, press the line button and lift the handset.  
The message stops playing when the call is retrieved.  
If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Ring, the line button on which  
an outside call rings shows green flash continuously, even while the system  
answers the call and plays the Automatic System Answer greeting. To  
answer the call, lift the handset. If the message was playing, it stops  
automatically.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Hold ✔  
2 = Disconnect  
3 = Ring  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Automatic System Answer Mode:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 2 1.  
2. To change the mode, press D until the appropriate value displays—  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Automatic System Answer  
Record/Playback (I891)  
Description  
This feature lets you record and play back the message that callers hear when a  
call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. The maximum length of  
the message is 20 seconds.  
Related Features  
After the Automatic System Answer greeting plays, the system either  
places the call on hold, provides continuous ringing, or disconnects the call  
depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode (#121).  
Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified  
using Automatic System Answer Lines (#204).  
You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to  
turn Automatic System Answer on and off. Use Automatic System  
Answer Button (#111) to program the button.  
Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are  
picked up after two rings, as a default. To change the number of rings, use  
Automatic System Answer Delay (#110).  
For callers to hear Music-On-Hold, Music-On-Hold (#602) must be Active  
and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module.  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed. If the PC Card has not been installed,  
see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions.  
Use the Automatic System Answer Record/Playback feature to record a  
message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default  
message.  
You should record a message before using Automatic System Answer  
since there is no default message.  
If you do not record a message for Automatic System Answer, calls will be  
placed on hold, continue to ring, or be disconnected immediately after the  
system answers, depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer  
Mode (#121).  
You must record the Automatic System Answer message from the system  
display phone at extension 10 or 11.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatic System Answer Record/Playback (I891)  
You cannot record or play a message while Automatic System Answer or  
Direct Extension Dial is answering a call. When you want to record or play  
a message, turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial  
and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be  
completed.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To record an Automatic System Answer message:  
1. The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed (see PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions).  
2. Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait  
for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be  
completed.  
3. Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11.  
4. Press i.  
5. Dial 8 9 1. The current time of day remains on the second line of the  
display for the duration of this procedure. The top line of the display reads:  
ASA: 1=Rec  
If a message was recorded previously, the following appears on the display:  
ASA: 1=Rec 2=Play  
6. Press 1. The following appears on the display for three seconds:  
Record at tone  
After three seconds, you hear a confirmation tone and you can begin  
recording your message. While you are recording, the following appears on  
the display:  
Press # to stop  
7. Press # when you are done recording.  
If the allotted time (20 seconds) for the message is completed before you  
press #, you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped  
recording.  
When you finish recording, the following appears on the display:  
ASA: 1=Rec 2=Play  
8. At this point:  
To re-record the message, follow the instructions from Step 5 in this  
current procedure.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
To play back the message, follow the instructions from Step 5 in the  
following procedure.  
To exit from the procedure, hang up the handset.  
To play back an Automatic System Answer message:  
1. Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait  
for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be  
completed.  
2. Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11.  
3. Press the i button.  
4. Dial 8 9 1. The following appears on the display:  
ASA: 1=Rec 2=Play  
5. Press 2. The following appears on the display:  
Message Playback  
After the message is played back, you hear a confirmation tone and the  
following appears on the display:  
ASA: 1=Rec 2=Play  
6. At this point:  
To re-record the message, follow the instructions from Step 5 in the  
procedure for recording a message.  
To play back the message, follow the instructions from Step 5  
directly in this current procedure.  
To exit from the procedure, hang up the handset.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic VMS Cover (#310)  
Automatic VMS Cover (#310)  
Description  
This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system.  
This System Programming procedure automatically routes an extension’s  
unanswered intercom and transferred calls to the Call Answer Service of the voice  
messaging system after a specified number of rings (default for all system  
extensions is three rings), so callers can leave a message.  
Related Features  
To manually change an extension’s VMS Cover state, users can program  
the VMS Cover feature on a button with lights. Users can then press the  
VMS Cover button to activate the feature (green light on) or deactivate the  
feature (green light off). (If Automatic VMS Cover is Assigned at an  
extension, the green light is lit automatically after programming the VMS  
Cover button to indicate that VMS Cover is currently active. If this is the  
case, and the VMS Cover button is pressed, the feature is deactivated. To  
activate VMS Cover again, you must press the button.)  
Automatic VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned  
ownership with Line Coverage Extension (#208).  
Use VMS Cover Rings (#117) to change the number of times intercom  
and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at all  
system extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system.  
Users with Automatic VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to  
Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox.  
If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Coverage active, calls  
ring at the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage  
Rings (#116). If the covering extension does not answer, the call is routed  
to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the  
specified amount of VMS cover rings.  
If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active,  
calls ring at the forwarding destination; they are not covered by the voice  
messaging system.  
Considerations  
Standard phones and system phones without a programmed VMS Cover button  
cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension:  
1. Press f0 0 s s # 3 1 0 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging  
system.  
3. To assign or unassign Automatic VMS Cover, press D until the  
appropriate value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Background Music (F19)  
Background Music (F19)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones with speakers.  
This feature provides background music through the speaker of an idle system  
phone for a user’s work area. Background Music plays the recorded material from  
the Music-On-Hold audio source.  
Related Features  
Background Music is available only if Music-On-Hold (#602) is active and an  
audio source is connected to the processor module.  
Considerations  
The Background Music feature broadcasts music over telephone lines. The  
performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under  
United States Copyright law. Accordingly, in order for the performance of  
that music to be lawful, it must be licensed annually to the user by the  
copyright owners or their representatives (such as ASCAP or BMI).  
The Magic-On-Hold system includes the required license for the first year.  
This license must be renewed annually.  
Background Music stops when a user makes or answers a call, but  
resumes when the phone becomes idle again.  
If a system phone and a standard phone with a message waiting light are  
connected in a combination extension, the standard phone’s message  
waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone.  
You can program a Background Music button on a system phone to use the  
feature with one touch. A button with lights is recommended.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Background Music button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button, preferably a button with lights.  
4. Press f1 9.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Using  
To turn Background Music on:  
1. From a system phone with a speaker, press the programmed button or  
press f 1 9.  
If the phone is idle, you hear Background Music. If the Background Music  
button has lights, the green light turns on.  
2. To adjust the volume of Background Music, use the phone’s volume control  
buttons while listening to the Background Music.  
To turn Background Music off:  
1. Press the programmed button or press f 1 9 again.  
If the Background Music button has lights, the green light turns off.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123)  
Backup Programming—Automatic  
(#123)  
Description  
The backup of system and telephone programming is optional, but recommended.  
This System Programming procedure determines whether the automatic backup  
of all programming (except the system date, day, and time) occurs or not. The  
default setting is Not Active. When Backup Programming—Automatic is set to  
Active, the information is backed up at 2:00 a.m. on the first day of each month  
(determined by the system date and time settings) to a Backup/Restore PC Card.  
If Backup Programming—Automatic is Active and an automatic backup fails, a  
Backup-Failure Alarm message appears (instead of the system date and time) on  
the top line of the telephone display at idle extension 10 or 11. If the message is:  
Backup Failed IC, see the note that follows.  
NOTE:  
If an ASA/DXD or PARTNER Voice Mail PC card is in use, remove the card  
(see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions for removing and inserting  
PC cards). Perform Backup Programming—Manual (#124) as described in  
the following section. Deactivate automatic backup to prevent this from  
reoccurring.  
If any other message is displayed, see Chapter 6, ‘‘Troubleshooting,’’ for  
suggested corrective actions, and for the procedure for clearing the  
Backup-Failure Alarm message.  
Related Features  
Verify that the System Date (#101), System Day (#102), and System  
Time (#103) are set correctly, so that the automatic backup occurs at the  
correct time. These settings are not backed up.  
You can use Backup Programming—Manual (#124) in place of or to  
supplement the automatic backups, if desired.  
Once the system and telephone programming settings have been backed  
up to a PC Card, you can use the Restore Programming (#125)  
procedure to restore the settings if they become corrupted. You can also  
use Restore Programming (#125) to verify the date on a backup file.  
Considerations  
To perform either automatic or manual backups, purchase a  
Backup/Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies. If the PC Card has not  
been installed, see the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions.  
Whenever the setting for Backup Programming—Automatic is changed  
from Not Active to Active, a backup will occur at the next occurrence of 2:00  
a.m. After that, backups will be done at 2:00 a.m. on the first day of each  
month until the setting is changed back to Not Active.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
NOTE:  
Although you can change the setting for Backup Programming—  
Automatic (#123) without having a Backup/Restore in the PC Card  
slot, you must have a PC Card in the slot before a backup can take  
place.  
The same Backup/Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and  
manual backups, since the data is recorded in two separate files. An  
automatic backup replaces the AUTO.mmddyy file only (where mmddyy  
represents the date of the backup in month, day, year format), and a  
manual backup replaces the MAN.mmddyy file only. Restore  
Programming (#125) asks you to specify which backup file you want to  
use.  
Calls will continue to be handled normally during an automatic backup.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Active  
2 = Not Active ✔  
3 = Backup Alarm Cleared  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
Changing the Setting  
To change the setting for Backup Programming—Automatic:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s# 1 2 3 at extension  
10 or 11.  
The current setting is displayed.  
2. Press D or d to change the setting, or press r to return  
the setting to the default.  
3. Exit programming mode.  
If you chose Option 1, Active:  
The system will be backed up to the PC Card at 2:00 a.m., and thereafter at  
2:00 a.m. on the first day of each month, provided that a valid  
Backup/Restore PC Card is in the PC Card slot. (See PARTNER PC Card  
Installation Instructions.)  
The old AUTO.mmddyy file on the PC Card is replaced by the new one.  
(The MAN.mmddyy file is unaffected.) You can use the Restore  
Programming (#125) feature to check the date on the AUTO.mmddyy file  
to verify that the backup was successful.PPP  
If you chose Option 2, Not Active, no automatic backups will be performed.  
Using  
Use Option 3 to clear Backup-Failure Alarms. See Clearing a Backup-Failure  
Alarm in Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting.”  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Backup Programming—Manual (#124)  
Backup Programming—Manual (#124)  
Description  
The backup of system and telephone programming is optional, but recommended,  
especially if you are changing the processor module or upgrading the system, or  
before and after any major programming changes. This System Programming  
procedure manually backs up all the programming (except the system date, day,  
and time) to a Backup/Restore PC Card.  
NOTE:  
If another PC card is in the slot, remove it before performing this procedure.  
See the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions for removing and  
inserting the card.  
Related Features  
Verify that the System Date (#101), System Day (#102), and System  
Time (#103) are set correctly. These settings are not backed up.  
You can use Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) if you prefer. If so,  
backups are done automatically at 2:00 a.m. on the first day of each month.  
You can also use both methods, performing manual backups between the  
scheduled monthly backups.  
Once the system and telephone programming settings have been backed  
up to a PC Card, you can use the Restore Programming (#125)  
procedure to restore the settings if they become corrupted. You can also  
use Restore Programming (#125) to verify the date on a backup file.  
Considerations  
To perform either manual or automatic backups, purchase a  
Backup/Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies. If the PC Card has not  
been installed, see the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions.  
You must have a Backup/Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot before a  
backup can take place.  
The same Backup/Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and  
manual backups, since the data is recorded in two separate files. An  
automatic backup replaces the AUTO.mmddyy file only (where mmddyy  
represents the date of the backup in month, day, year format), and a  
manual backup replaces the MAN.mmddyy file only. Restore  
Programming (#125) asks you to specify which backup file you want to  
use.  
Calls will continue to be handled normally during a manual backup.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To begin a manual backup of system settings:  
1. Verify that a Backup/Restore Card is in the processor module.  
2. Press f 0 0 s s# 1 2 4 at extension  
10 or 11.  
If there is a problem, see Chapter 6, ‘‘Troubleshooting,’’, for explanations  
and corrective actions.  
Otherwise, the display instructs you to press e to begin the backup.  
3. Press e.  
A status message is displayed indicating that a backup is in progress, and  
within 30 seconds, a message displays indicating the result.  
If the backup was successful, the new backup information replaces the  
information in the old MAN.mmddyy file on the Backup/Restore PC Card  
and the.mmddyy extension now reflects the current date. Backup  
information created during a manual backup does not overwrite any  
AUTO.mmddyy file. Go on to Step 4.  
If the backup failed and the display shows an error message, go to Step 4  
and then see Chapter 6, ‘‘Troubleshooting,’’, for explanations and  
corrective actions.  
4. Exit programming mode.  
NOTE:  
If you exit the procedure before the backup finishes, you will not  
interrupt the backup, but you will not see feedback messages on the  
display.  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call Coverage (F20,XX,XX)  
Call Coverage (F20,XX,XX)  
Description  
This feature redirects all intercom, transferred, and outside calls on lines assigned  
ownership from a user’s extension to another system extension (where XX is a  
system extension number) for coverage. When Call Coverage is activated,  
covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of  
rings. Callers can then leave a message with the person at the covering  
extension. This feature is helpful for users who want their callers to have  
personalized service when they are unable to answer calls.  
Related Features  
You must use Line Coverage Extension (#208) to designate an extension  
as the owner of a specific outside line, so the extension can activate Call  
Coverage for that line. An extension’s owned line is eligible for coverage  
only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line  
Access Restriction (#302) or Pool Access Restriction (#315) is set to  
No Restriction or In Only.  
You can use Call Coverage Rings (#116) to specify the number of times a  
covered call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering  
extension.  
If Call Coverage and Do Not Disturb are active, covered calls are routed  
immediately to the covering extension, without ringing the extension first.  
You can turn on Call Coverage while a call is ringing, to send a call  
immediately for coverage. Similarly, if Call Coverage is on and a call begins  
to ring, you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call immediately for  
coverage. (See Send All Calls.)  
If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active, covered calls  
ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage  
Rings. Then:  
— If the covering extension does not answer, the call is routed to the  
voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the  
specified number of VMS Cover Rings (#117).  
— If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active, the call is  
routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that  
activated Call Coverage.  
If an extension has Call Coverage active without voice mail coverage,  
covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call  
Coverage Rings. Outside and intercom calls continue to ring at the  
covering extension until the call is answered or the caller hangs up.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
For transferred calls:  
— If the covering extension does not answer, the call goes to the  
transfer return extension after the specified number of Transfer  
Return Rings (#105).  
— If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active, the call rings  
one more time at the user’s extension before it goes to the transfer  
return extension.  
If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active, calls are  
routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension (Call Forwarding takes  
precedence).  
If a user at a covering extension has a system display phone and is busy on  
a call, he or she can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the  
extension from which a coverage call is being sent. If a user is not active on  
a call and multiple coverage calls are ringing, he or she can press the line,  
pool, or i buttons to view the number of the extension from which  
each coverage call is being sent; however, if the user picks up the handset,  
he or she will join or answer the call that was previously ringing at the  
originating extension shown on the display.  
Call Coverage does not apply to parked calls. See Call Park.  
Considerations  
A system display phone is recommended for the covering extension so the  
user can identify coverage calls. “Cover for XX” appears on the display  
when a coverage call rings at a covering extension rather than Caller ID  
information, if available.  
If the covering extension has an Auto Dial button for the originating  
extension, the light shows green flutter while the coverage call is ringing at  
the covering extension. If the user at the extension lifts the handset, he or  
she will be connected to this call.  
Intercom, transferred, and outside calls on lines assigned ownership can  
be covered. Group calls, forwarded calls, transfer-return calls,  
voice-signaled calls, Voice Interrupt on Busy calls, Wake-Up Service calls,  
and calls to doorphone alert extensions cannot be covered.  
Do not designate any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7, which contains the  
extensions associated with the voice messaging system, as a covering  
extension.  
A single extension can cover multiple extensions; however, an extension  
programmed for Call Coverage can have only one covering extension. Only  
one Call Coverage button can be programmed per extension.  
The user at an extension who has activated Call Coverage can intercept an  
outside call routed for coverage by pressing the outside line button.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Coverage (F20,XX,XX)  
You can program Call Coverage on a button on a system phone. Use a  
button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are being  
covered. When the green light is on, your calls are being covered; when the  
green light is off, Call Coverage is not active.  
If the Call Coverage feature code and optional originating and covering  
extensions are programmed on a button with lights, you can use the button  
to turn Call Coverage on and off with one touch. (The lights show when Call  
Coverage is on, even if calls are covered by a different extension than the  
one stored on the button, and you can still use the button to turn Call  
Coverage off.)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Call Coverage button:  
1. Press f0 0 s s c.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button, preferably a button with lights.  
4. At this point, you can do one of the following:  
Press f2 0.  
Press f20 and the number of the originating extension.  
Press f20 the number of the originating extension, and the  
number of the covering extension.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
To send calls for coverage manually:  
1. Press f20.  
2. Dial your extension number.  
3. Dial the extension number of the covering extension.  
To remove Call Coverage manually:  
1. Press f2 0.  
2. Dial your extension number twice.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
To send calls for coverage using the programmed button:  
1. Press the programmed button.  
If an originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on  
the button, Call Coverage is activated (on a button with lights, the green  
light is on). Skip Steps 2 and 3.  
2. If no originating extension was programmed, dial your extension number.  
3. If no covering extension was programmed, dial the extension number of the  
covering extension.  
Call Coverage is activated (on a button with lights, the green light is on).  
To remove Call Coverage using the programmed button:  
1. Press the programmed button.  
If an originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on  
the button, Call Coverage is deactivated (on a button with lights, the green  
light is off). Skip Steps 2 and 3.  
2. If no originating extension was programmed, dial your extension number.  
3. If no covering extension was programmed, dial your extension number  
again.  
Call Coverage is deactivated (on a button with lights, the green light is off).  
Standard Phone  
To send your calls for coverage:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 2 0.  
3. Dial your extension number.  
4. Dial the extension number of the covering extension.  
To remove Call Coverage:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 2 0.  
3. Dial your extension number twice.  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Coverage Rings (#116)  
Call Coverage Rings (#116)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure, which applies to all system extensions  
programmed for Call Coverage, defines the number of times intercom, transferred,  
and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at an extension before they are  
sent to the covering extension.  
Related Features  
Call Coverage redirects an extension’s covered calls to the covering  
extension.  
You must use Line Coverage Extension (#208) to designate an extension  
as the owner of a specific outside line, so the extension can activate Call  
Coverage for that line.  
If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active, covered calls  
ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage  
Rings. Then:  
— If the covering extension does not answer, the call is routed to the  
voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the  
specified number of VMS Cover Rings (#117).  
— If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active, the call is  
routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that  
activated Call Coverage.  
Valid Entries  
1–9  
2 ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the number of times a call rings at an extension before it is sent to the  
covering extension:  
1. Press 0 0 s s# 1 1 6.  
2. Enter a different setting (1–9).  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me  
(F11,XX,XX)  
Description  
This feature forwards all intercom, transferred, and outside calls from a user’s  
extension to another system extension (where XX is an extension number). Users  
can activate this feature from their own extension (Call Forwarding) or from any  
other extension in the system (Call Follow-Me).  
Related Features  
An extension’s outside calls on lines or pools assigned to the extension are  
eligible for Call Forwarding only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or  
Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction (#302) or Pool Access  
Restriction (#315) is set to No Restriction or In Only.  
If an extension in a Hunt Group (#505) activates Call Forwarding, the  
system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt  
Group.  
If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active, calls ring at the  
Call Forwarding destination extension; they are not covered by the voice  
messaging system.  
If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active, calls are  
routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension (Call Forwarding takes  
precedence).  
Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls. See Call Park.  
Considerations  
You can forward outside, intercom, and transferred calls. You cannot  
forward group calls, calls to doorphone alert extensions, voice-signaled  
calls, Voice Interrupt on Busy calls, coverage calls or transfer-return calls.  
Calls cannot be forwarded outside the system.  
The phone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps  
once each time a call is forwarded (unless Do Not Disturb is active).  
Do not forward your calls to any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7, which  
contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system.  
At an extension that has Call Forwarding activated, if multiple calls are  
ringing, the system forwards them one at a time. This means that each  
subsequent call is not forwarded until the previous call is finished.  
If you press the Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring, that call  
will not be forwarded.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F11,XX,XX)  
You can program Call Forwarding on a button on a system phone. Use a  
button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are  
forwarded. When the green light is on, your calls are forwarded; when the  
green light is off, calls ring at your extension.  
If the Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating and destination  
extensions are programmed on a button with lights, you can use the button  
to turn Call Forwarding on and off with one touch. (The lights show when  
Call Forwarding is on, even if calls are forwarded to a different extension  
than the one stored on the button, and you can still use the button to turn  
Call Forwarding off.)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Call Forwarding button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button, preferably a button with lights.  
4. At this point, you can do one of the following:  
Press f 1 1.  
Press f 1 1 and the number of the originating extension.  
Press f 1 1, the number of the originating extension, and  
the number of the destination extension.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
To forward calls manually:  
1. Press f 1 1.  
2. Dial your extension number.  
3. Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring.  
To remove Call Forwarding manually:  
1. Press f 1 1.  
2. Dial your extension number twice.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
To forward calls using the programmed button:  
1. Press the programmed button.  
If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed  
on the button, Call Forwarding is activated (on a button with lights, the  
green light is on). Skip Steps 2 and 3.  
2. If no originating extension was programmed, dial your extension number.  
3. If no destination extension was programmed, dial the extension number at  
which you want the calls to ring.  
Call Forwarding is activated (on a button with lights, the green light is on).  
To remove Call Forwarding using the programmed button:  
1. Press the programmed button.  
If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed  
on the button, Call Forwarding is deactivated (on a button with lights, the  
green light is off). Skip Steps 2 and 3.  
2. If no originating extension was programmed, dial your extension number.  
3. If no destination extension was programmed, dial your extension number  
again.  
Call Forwarding is deactivated (on a button with lights, the green light is  
off).  
Standard Phone  
To forward your calls:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 1 1.  
3. Dial your extension number.  
4. Dial the number of the extension at which you want your calls to ring.  
To remove Call Forwarding:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 1 1.  
3. Dial your extension number twice.  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call Park  
Call Park  
Description  
This feature allows you to “park” a call, or put it on a special type of hold, so it can  
be picked up from any phone in the system.  
Related Features  
Use Call Pickup to retrieve parked calls.  
When a call is parked, the caller hears Music-On-Hold (#602) if it is active  
and an audio source is connected to the processor module, regardless of  
the Ring on Transfer (#119) setting.  
If you frequently park calls and you have a system phone, program your  
extension number on an Auto Dial button, so you can park a call simply by  
pressing the button. See Auto Dialing.  
Other ways of placing a call on hold include Hold and Exclusive Hold.  
Parked calls do not receive Call Waiting, Call Coverage, Call  
Forwarding, or VMS Cover.  
Considerations  
Call Park typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode, because  
users can retrieve calls without knowing which line the call is on.  
It is recommended that you park only one call at a time from your extension  
to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you pick up  
the parked call.  
Call Park is useful for standard phone users because they can retrieve a  
parked call without knowing which line the call is on.  
Using  
System Phone  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)To park a call:  
1. While on a call, press & and dial your two-digit extension number or  
press the Auto Dial button programmed for your extension.  
2. Hang up.  
If the call is not picked up within three minutes, it rings back at your  
extension. If you used an Auto Dial button, the green light next to the button  
flutters.  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup:  
1. Dial i 6.  
2. Dial the extension number or press an Auto Dial button for the extension  
where the call is parked.  
Standard Phone  
To park a call:  
1. While on a call, press the switchhook or R.  
The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial your two-digit extension number.  
3. Hang up.  
If the call is not picked up within three minutes, it rings back at your  
extension. If you are on another call when the parked call returns, you will  
not receive notification even if Call Waiting is Assigned to your extension.  
The parked call rings back when your phone is idle.  
To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 6 and the extension number where the call is parked.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Pickup (I6XX)  
Call Pickup (I6XX)  
Description  
This feature lets users answer any intercom, outside, or transferred call ringing at  
another specified extension (where XX is a system extension number). This  
feature is useful for officemates who agree to answer each other’s calls.  
Related Features  
Use this feature to retrieve a parked call—see Call Park. Note that if you use Call  
Pickup to answer a call that is parked at an extension that also has ringing calls,  
you will be connected to the parked call—parked calls take precedence over  
ringing calls.  
Considerations  
You can program a Call Pickup button on a system phone to pick up with one  
touch a call that is ringing or parked at another specified extension.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Call Pickup button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. To specify the extension to be answered, press left i, followed by6  
and the two-digit system extension number. For example, to answer a call  
ringing at extension 23, press left i 6 2 3.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
1. If you want, lift the handset.  
2. Press the programmed button, or press i 6 and the two-digit  
number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked.  
Standard Phone  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 6 plus the two-digit number of the extension at which the call is  
ringing or parked.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Call Waiting (#316)  
Description  
This feature applies only to standard phones. Standard phones can be used to  
make calls when plugged into any port of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
or 362EC expansion module. However, standard phones will ring only when  
plugged into the Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
This System Programming procedure specifies standard phone extensions that  
are eligible for Call Waiting. Users who receive a call waiting tone hear two beeps  
when they are on a call to indicate a second incoming intercom, transferred, or  
outside call. The user can press the switchhook (or Recall or Flash button, if  
available) to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call. To return to  
the first call, the user simply presses the switchhook again.  
Related Features  
For instructions for using Call Waiting, see Answering Calls.  
Call Waiting does not apply to parked calls. See Call Park.  
Considerations  
This feature is distinct from the local telephone company’s Call Waiting  
feature. If you use this system feature, do not use your local telephone  
company’s Call Waiting feature.  
The Call Waiting tone (two beeps) is not repeated.  
Use Call Waiting only for standard phone extensions. Do not assign Call  
Waiting to extensions that have fax machines, credit card scanners,  
modems, or auto attendants because the call-waiting tone will interrupt the  
data connection.  
You cannot transfer either party connected using Call Waiting, conference  
in additional parties, or use feature codes while both calls are active.  
Transfer-return, group call distribution, hunt group, and wake-up calls are  
not considered incoming calls for this feature.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Call Waiting (#316)  
To change the Call Waiting setting for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 1 6 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to receive Call Waiting.  
3. To assign or unassign Call Waiting, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Caller ID  
Description  
Caller ID is available on system display phones on all lines for which you  
subscribe to Caller ID service. Caller ID information is the caller’s telephone  
number (or name, if available). When active on a call, a user automatically  
receives Caller ID information for the duration of the call. When an extension is  
idle, a user receives Caller ID information for the call the user will be connected to  
when the handset is lifted. This feature requires no special programming;  
however, you must subscribe to Caller ID service (if it is available) on a per-line  
basis from your local telephone company.  
Related Features  
Any users who have access to Caller ID line(s) will receive Caller ID  
information on their system display phones. You can restrict users from  
viewing Caller ID information using the following procedures:  
— For ringing calls, you can block Caller ID from displaying at specific  
extensions by restricting access to the Caller ID lines. Use Line  
Access Restriction (#302) to restrict access to lines, Pooled  
Access Restriction (#315) to restrict access to all lines within a  
specific pool, or both procedures for pooled extensions that have  
pools and lines.  
— For active calls, you can activate Privacy at your extension to  
prevent other users from joining your calls and from accessing the  
Caller ID information displayed at your extension.  
— For held calls, use Exclusive Hold rather than Hold to prevent other  
users from picking up your held call and from accessing the Caller  
ID information associated with the held call.  
There are two ways to inspect Caller ID lines:  
If you are active on a call, you automatically get Caller ID information  
for that call. However, If you want to view Caller ID information for a  
second call without ending the active call or putting it on hold, use  
Caller ID Inspect.  
If you are not active on a call, you can press line buttons to view  
Caller ID information for those lines; however, keep in mind that if  
you pick up the handset you will join or answer the call shown on the  
display.  
In some regions, users will have the option to subscribe to the name  
service for Caller ID. This service allows the user to have a name and/or  
number associated with Caller ID information. If you want access to the  
name, you can program Caller ID Name Display onto a button with lights.  
This allows users to toggle between the Name and Number for an incoming  
call.  
Caller ID information does not display for extensions active on Conference  
Calls.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Caller ID  
If users receive a call routed to their extension by Direct Extension Dial, a  
voice messaging system, or automated attendant, the Caller ID information  
is passed to their extension when they answer the call.  
If users Transfer a call, the Caller ID information is passed to the  
destination extension.  
If users send calls for Call Coverage, the Caller ID information is not  
passed to the covering extension. “Cover for XX” appears instead so the  
user at the covering extension can identify the person for whom the call  
was originally intended.  
A user at a covering extension who has a system display phone and who is  
busy on a call can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the  
extension from which a Call Coverage call is being sent. If users are not  
active on a call and multiple coverage calls are ringing, they can press line,  
pool, and intercom buttons to view the number of the extension from which  
each coverage call is being sent; however, if they pick up the handset they  
will join or answer the call indicated on the display.  
Caller ID information is displayed if you Join a call; however, you cannot  
join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated.  
Caller ID information is displayed if users pick up calls with Direct Line  
Pickup—Active Line, Call Pickup, or Group Pickup, but the restrictions  
stated previously apply.  
For incoming calls, Caller ID information displays only when a call is audibly  
alerting at an extension. This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb  
activated or extensions that have lines with Line Ringing set to No Ring do  
not receive Caller ID information. However, Caller ID information is  
displayed once the call is answered or if the line is preselected.  
Caller ID Type (#122) can be set to either USA or Singapore. For proper  
operation in the United States, leave the default setting, USA.  
Considerations  
Subscriptions to Caller ID service are on a per-line basis.  
The lines associated with Caller ID must be connected to a line jack on a  
PARTNER Endeavor processor module or a 362EC module. For more  
information, refer to the PARTNER Endeavor Installation guide.  
Caller ID information is passed to an extension between the first and  
second ring. To receive Caller ID information, wait until the second ring  
before answering the call.  
Individuals with Call Waiting from the local telephone company will not  
receive Caller ID information for the second call.  
Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed. This varies by local phone  
company. When Caller ID information is not captured, the system date and  
day (default) displays instead.  
The incoming telephone number replaces the system date and time display  
on system phones for the duration of the call. An out-of-area message  
(- - - - - - - - - - - -) displays if a call is being dialed from a region that does  
not support Caller ID. A privacy message (Privacy) displays if the caller  
has blocked transmission of Caller ID information.  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Caller ID Inspect (F17)  
Description  
This feature allows a user who is active on a call to view Caller ID information for a  
second call, without disconnecting the current call or putting it on hold. Users can  
inspect ringing, active, or held calls.  
Related Features  
If you program a Caller ID Name Display button, you can toggle between  
Caller ID name and Caller ID number while inspecting lines.  
Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information.  
A user at a covering extension who has a system display phone and who is  
busy on a call can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the  
extension from which a Call Coverage call is being sent.  
Considerations  
This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system  
display phone.  
The user should make sure the green light next to the Caller ID Inspect  
button is fluttering before pressing a line or pool button or else the call the  
user is active on is disconnected, and the user is connected to the call on  
the line or pool button that was pressed.  
The user can inspect outside calls that appear on intercom buttons. (If the  
call is an intercom call, the default display is shown.)  
If users are not active on a call, they can press line, pool, and intercom  
buttons to view Caller ID or Call Coverage information for those lines;  
however, if they pick up the handset, they will join or answer the call shown  
on the display.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Caller ID Inspect button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button with lights.  
4. Press f 1 7.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
1. While active on a call, press the programmed button.  
The green light flutters. Caller ID Inspect is activated.  
2. Press a line, pool, or intercom button.  
The Caller ID or Call Coverage information for the selected line, pool, or  
intercom displays.  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Caller ID Inspect (F17)  
3. Press the programmed button to deactivate the feature.  
The feature is deactivated automatically if you hang up the handset or  
press any button other than a line, pool, or intercom button. The green light  
is off when the feature is deactivated.  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Caller ID Name Display (F16)  
Description  
This feature lets users with system display phones toggle the display between  
Caller ID number and Caller ID name. Caller ID name is an optional feature of the  
Caller ID service provided by your local telephone company and may not be  
available in your area (even if Caller ID number is available).  
Related Features  
To view Caller ID information for a second call, while active on a call, users  
can program Caller ID Inspect onto a button.  
Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information.  
This feature has no effect on Call Coverage calls. Coverage calls always  
display the extension number of the user who is sending calls for coverage.  
Considerations  
This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system  
display phone. When Caller ID Name Display is on, the green light is on,  
indicating that the Caller ID name will be displayed rather than the Caller ID  
number.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Caller ID Name Display button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button with lights.  
4. Press f 1 6.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
Press the programmed button to turn Caller ID Name Display on; press it again to  
turn it off. Use the button like a switch—when the light is on, Caller ID Name  
Display is on.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Caller ID Type (#122)  
Caller ID Type (#122)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure can be set for Singapore or USA operation.  
USA Operation  
Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming,  
replacing the system date and time display on system phones for the duration of  
the call. An out-of-area message (- - - - - - - - - - - -) displays if a call is being dialed  
from a region that does not support Caller ID. A privacy message (Privacy)  
displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information.  
Singapore Operation  
Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming.  
When there is no incoming number, the system detects a “P” or an “O” in the  
“reason for DN (Directory Number) absence” field, and substitutes the information  
sent by the local telephone company Central Office in the Name parameter field:  
If the name is supplied, the system displays it.  
If the name is not supplied, either Privacy or - - - - - - - - - - - - is  
displayed.  
Related Features  
The Caller ID Name Display feature affects whether the caller’s name is  
displayed (if available) instead of the caller’s number.  
Caller ID Inspect enables you to view Caller ID information for a second  
line while remaining active on the first call.  
Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information.  
Considerations  
The Caller ID Type you set applies to the entire system.  
A change to the Caller ID Type setting takes effect when the next Caller ID  
call comes into the system.  
Valid Entries  
1 = USA ✔  
2 = Singapore  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Caller ID Type setting:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 2 2 at extension  
10 or 11.  
The system shows the current setting.  
2. Press D or d until the appropriate value displays, or press  
r to return to the default setting.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calling Group Extensions (#502)  
Calling Group Extensions (#502)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies the extensions in a Calling  
Group—a group of extensions that can be called at the same time. Any user in the  
system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same time or  
transfer a call to a Calling Group; the first extension to pick up the call is  
connected to the caller. This feature is useful for conversing with any individual in  
a specific group such as a sales pool or for paging all individuals in the group. The  
system can have up to four Calling Groups.  
Related Features  
For instructions on making a ringing call, see Group Calling–Ring/Page.  
Considerations  
Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group. In addition, you can  
assign all extensions in the system to one group—this is especially useful  
for making paging announcements to all employees.  
Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment (auto  
attendants, voice messaging systems, fax machines, answering machines,  
hotline phones, or doorphones) or extensions assigned as External Hotline  
phones to a Calling Group.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to group  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To create a Calling Group:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 5 0 2 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Group: prompt, enter a group number (1–4). For example, to select  
group 1, press 1.  
3. At the Extension:prompt, enter the number of the extension to be  
programmed. For example, to select extension 31, dial 3 1.  
4. To assign or unassign the extension, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
5. At this point:  
To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 4.  
To program another group, press N or P and  
repeat Steps 2 through 4.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Conference Calls  
Description  
This section explains how to set up conference calls using the C button on a  
system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone. For system phones, a  
conference call connects up to five parties (including the conference originator) in  
a single call. For standard phones (Tip Ring phones), a conference call connects  
up to three parties (including the conference originator). Users can connect both  
outside and inside parties in a conference call, but the call cannot include more  
than two outside parties.  
Related Features  
You can use Outside Conference Denial (#109) to disallow conference  
calls with multiple outside parties.  
During the conference call, any inside party can exit the call at any time  
simply by hanging up. However, if an outside party hangs up during a  
conference call, the callers that remain in the conference may hear a dial  
tone. Use Conference Drop to remove the last-added outside party from a  
conference call.  
Caller ID information does not display for extensions that are active on a  
conference call.  
Considerations  
Users can use System Speed Dial, Personal Speed Dial, or Auto Dial  
numbers to add parties to the conference.  
Do not add a busy or ringing outside call to a conference; if you do, all  
callers hear the busy or ringing signal. If you hear a busy signal or the party  
does not answer, reconnect with the held party by pressing the line button.  
(This applies only to system phones.)  
Users cannot join a conference call; the originator must add each party to  
the conference.  
If the conference originator puts the call on hold, other parties can continue  
to talk. Other inside parties can put their extensions on hold if there are  
outside parties on the conference call.  
When the originator hangs up, the conference is disconnected.  
Conference calls cannot be transferred.  
If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system, the PBX or  
Centrex system may include a conference calling feature that lets you  
connect multiple callers on a single PBX or Centrex line. The number of  
callers you can connect depends on your PBX or Centrex system. For more  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Conference Calls  
information about such features, see the documentation for your PBX or  
Centrex system. (When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to  
use a switchhook flash, use the Recall feature instead.)  
Outside parties may be harder to hear on a conference call than on a  
two-party call, depending on the number of parties and the outside lines  
connected to the system.  
Standard phones cannot have more than three parties.  
Using  
System Phone  
1. Set up the call to the first party. (You can call the party, pick up the call from  
hold, or answer an incoming call.)  
You are connected with the first party.  
2. Press C.  
The first party is now on hold.  
3. Set up the call to the second party.  
You are connected with the second party. If you are adding an inside party  
to a call, you must wait until the party answers. If you are active on a call  
using a pool button and you want to set up a conference call using one of  
the other lines in that pool, you can press i and dial the pool’s  
access code to gain access to another line in that pool.  
4. Press C again to add the second party to the call.  
You can now speak with the first and second parties.  
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add more parties.  
Standard Phone  
1. Set up the call to the first party. (You can call the party, pick up the call from  
hold, or answer an incoming call.)  
You are connected with the first party.  
2. Press the switchhook down once rapidly.  
The first party is now on hold. You hear intercom dial tone.  
3. To add an outside party, dial 9 or a pool access code plus the outside  
number. If the number is busy or does not answer, hang up and the first  
party rings back.  
To add an inside party, dial the two-digit extension number. If the extension  
is busy or does not answer, press the switchhook down once rapidly and  
you are reconnected with the first party.  
4. When the second party answers, press the switchhook down once rapidly.  
You are now connected with both parties.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Conference Drop (F06)  
Description  
This feature drops the last outside party added to a conference call, without  
disconnecting the other parties.  
Related Features  
For instructions on setting up conference calls, see Conference Calls.  
You can use Outside Conference Denial (#109) to disallow conference  
calls with multiple outside parties.  
Considerations  
You can program a Conference Drop button on a system phone to use the feature  
with one touch.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Conference Drop button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 0 6.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
Press the programmed button or press f 0 6.  
The last-added outside party is dropped from the conference.  
Standard Phone  
Press the switchhook down once rapidly.  
The last-added party (inside or outside) is dropped from the conference.  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copy Settings (#399)  
Copy Settings (#399)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure copies all of the following settings from one  
extension to another:  
#301 Line Assignment  
#316 Call Waiting  
#302 Line Access Restriction  
#303 Display Language  
#401 Outgoing Call Restriction  
#405 Disallowed List Assignments  
#408 Allowed List Assignments  
#501 Pickup Group Extensions  
#502 Calling Group Extensions  
#504 Night Service Group  
#505 Hunt Group Extensions  
#601 Fax Machine Extensions  
#607 AA Extensions  
#304 Automatic Extension Privacy  
#305 Abbreviated Ringing  
#308 Distinctive Ring  
#309 Intercom Dial Tone  
#310 Automatic VMS Cover  
#311 External Hotline  
#312 Voice Interrupt On Busy  
#313 Line Access Mode Line Ringing  
#314 Pool Extension Assignment  
#315 Pool Access Restriction  
Automatic Line Selection  
Line Ringing  
Considerations  
This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures  
when cycling. To use this procedure, enter the code (#399) directly.  
For each type of phone, program one extension, then use this procedure to  
copy the programming from that extension to the others with the same  
number of line or pool buttons.  
Pooled extension settings can be copied to key extensions, except for  
extension 10. Key extension settings can be copied to pooled extensions.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To copy the programmed settings from one extension to another of the same type:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 9 9 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension:prompt, enter the source extension to copy from. For  
example, to copy the current settings from extension 18, press 1 8.  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
3. At the Data- - - - - - - - - - - -prompt, enter the target  
extension to copy to—any extension except the source extension is valid.  
For example, to copy to extension 22, press 2 2.  
4. At this point:  
To copy the same settings to another extension, enter the new  
extension number.  
To copy another extension’s settings, press n or p until  
the extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dial Mode (#201)  
Dial Mode (#201)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies individual lines as touch-tone or  
rotary. You should check with your local phone company if you are not sure which  
type of line is being provided to you.  
Related Features  
If you are having difficulty using touch-tone phones on rotary lines, you may  
need to adjust the Rotary Dialing Timeout (#108).  
If the system has rotary lines, you can use Touch-Tone Enable to send  
touch-tone signals over a rotary line (for example, to access bank-by-phone  
services).  
If Dial Mode (#201) is set to Rotary, star codes are entered by dialing 11  
instead of *. If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call  
Restriction (#401) set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the  
Dial Mode (#201) set to Rotary, you should add “11” to an Allowed Phone  
Numbers List (#407) and assign the list to these extensions. Otherwise,  
when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code, the  
system interprets this as an attempt to place a long-distance call, the call is  
blocked, and the user hears the reorder tone.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Touch-Tone line ✔  
2 = Rotary line  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Dial Mode setting for a specific line:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 2 0 1 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the first line to be programmed. For example, to program line 8, press  
0 8.  
3. To change the dial mode, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
4. To program another line, press n or p until the line number  
shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all lines that you want to change.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Direct Extension Dial Button (#113)  
Description  
This feature is available only on the system phone at extension 10.  
This System Programming procedure identifies a button to be used to turn Direct  
Extension Dial (DXD) on and off. This feature permits an outside caller to dial an  
extension or Hunt Group directly, without the aid of the receptionist. It is ideal for  
outside callers who frequently talk with specific employees or service groups, and  
know the extension number they are trying to reach. When an outside call rings on  
a line programmed with Direct Extension Dial, the system picks it up after a  
specified number of rings and plays a short message prompting the caller to dial  
the digits of the designated extension or Hunt Group.  
Related Features  
Do not use this feature in places where Hold Disconnect Time (#203) is  
not recognized, because if a caller hangs up after Direct Extension Dial  
answers, the line will appear to be busy.  
The Direct Extension Dial button returns to the status (on/off) it was in  
before a power failure occurred or System Reset (#728) was used.  
Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using  
Direct Extension Dial Lines (#205).  
Calls that ring on Direct Extension Dial lines are picked up after two rings,  
as a default. To change the number of rings, use Direct Extension Dial  
Delay (#112).  
You must use Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback to record a  
message to prompt callers to dial an extension number or Hunt Group  
number after the system answers an outside call.  
If Direct Extension Dial is on, callers hear ringing when the call is  
transferred regardless of the Music-On-Hold (#602) or Ring on Transfer  
(#119) setting.  
By default, unanswered calls return to extension 10. You can use Transfer  
Return Extension (#306) to specify a different Transfer Return Extension  
for extension 10. In this case, all unanswered Direct Extension Dial calls  
return to the specified extension as do unanswered calls manually  
transferred by extension 10.  
If Do Not Disturb is active at a directly dialed extension, the call returns to  
extension 10 (or its transfer return extension), unless Call Forwarding,  
Call Coverage, or VMS Cover is used.  
Automatic System Answer is an alternative system answering feature  
that aids the receptionist during busy periods.  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Direct Extension Dial Button (#113)  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed (see the PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions.  
Use the Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback to record a message  
before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default message.  
It is recommended that you use only one automated answering option for  
incoming calls (either this feature, the Automated Attendant Service of the  
voice messaging system, or a PARTNER Attendant).  
Direct Extension Dial does not transfer calls to Calling Groups.  
This feature can handle three outside calls simultaneously.  
If you have lines programmed for Direct Extension Dial and Automatic  
System Answer, Direct Extension Dial answers the call first.  
A Direct Extension Dial button must be programmed on a button with lights  
on the system display phone at extension 10. (This feature will not work if it  
is programmed on a button without lights.)  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
3 = Select button (then press a programmable button to assign Direct Extension  
Dial to that button)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign or unassign a Direct Extension Dial button with lights at extension 10:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 1 3.  
2. If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to the first available button,  
press D until the following appears on the display:  
DXD Button  
1 Assigned-Ext10  
If you want to unassign Direct Extension Dial, press D until the  
following appears on the display:  
DXD Button  
2 Not Assigned  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to a specific button, press 3. The  
display reads:  
DXD Button  
3 Select Button  
Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Direct Extension  
Dial to that button.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
4. Label the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10.  
Using  
To turn Direct Extension Dial on:  
Press the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10.  
The green light is on steady and Direct Extension Dial is on. If calls are  
ringing when Direct Extension Dial is turned on, the calls will be answered  
immediately by the system.  
To turn Direct Extension Dial off:  
Press the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10.  
The green light goes off and Direct Extension Dial is off. Any calls in the  
process of being answered by the system will continue to hear the recorded  
message and will be prompted to enter a destination extension.  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Extension Dial Delay (#112)  
Direct Extension Dial Delay (#112)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure specifies the number of times (0–9) an  
incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Direct Extension Dial  
feature.  
Related Features  
Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using  
Direct Extension Dial Lines (#205).  
You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to  
turn Direct Extension Dial on and off. Use Direct Extension Dial Button  
(#113) to program the button.  
You must use Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback to record a  
message to prompt callers to dial an extension number or Hunt Group  
number after the system answers an outside call.  
If you use Caller ID, make sure Direct Extension Dial Delay is set to 2 rings  
or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured.  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed. If the PC Card has not been installed,  
see the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions.  
Use the Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback feature to record a  
message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default  
message.  
This feature works independently of Line Ringing, which determines how  
an outside call rings at the extension—immediately, after a 20 second  
delay, or not at all. Direct Extension Dial Delay specifies the number of  
rings a caller hears before the system answers the call.  
Valid Entries  
0–9 (0 rings = answered immediately)  
2 ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the  
system answers it:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 1 2.  
2. To change the number of rings, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Direct Extension Dial Lines (#205)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies the lines on which incoming calls  
are to be answered for Direct Extension Dial.  
Related Features  
You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to  
turn Direct Extension Dial on and off. Use Direct Extension Dial Button  
(#113) to program the button.  
Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked  
up after two rings, as a default. To change the number of rings, use Direct  
Extension Dial Delay (#112).  
You must use Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback to record a  
message to prompt callers to dial an extension number or Hunt Group  
number after the system answers an outside call.  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed. If the PC Card has not been installed,  
see the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions.  
Use the Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback feature to record a  
message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default  
message.  
All lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial should be assigned to  
extension 10 or its transfer return extension.  
If a caller enters an invalid extension number or does not enter one at all,  
the call is transferred to the receptionist at extension 10 (or to the  
designated transfer return extension for extension 10).  
To intercept a call while the message is playing—the red light next to the  
line button is on steady—press the line button and lift the handset. The  
message stops playing when the call is retrieved.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
5-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Direct Extension Dial Lines (#205)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered for Direct  
Extension Dial:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 2 0 5.  
2. Enter the desired system line number. For example, to specify line 1, press  
0 1.  
3. To assign or unassign Direct Extension Dial, press D until the  
appropriate value displays.  
4. To specify another line, press n or p until the line number  
shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all desired lines.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback  
(I892)  
Description  
This feature lets you record and play back the message that callers hear when a  
call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature. The maximum length of the  
message is 40 seconds.  
Related Features  
Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using  
Direct Extension Dial Lines (#205).  
You must program a button with lights on the system display phone at  
extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off. Use Direct  
Extension Dial Button (#113) to program the button.  
Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked  
up after two rings, as a default. To change the number of rings, use Direct  
Extension Dial Delay (#112).  
Considerations  
The Automatic System/Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased  
separately and must be installed. If the PC Card has not been installed,  
see the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions.  
You should record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since  
there is no default message.  
You can record only one message for this feature.  
If you do not record a message for Direct Extension Dial, callers will not  
know to enter an extension or Hunt Group number when the call is  
answered.  
You must record the Direct Extension Dial message from the system  
display phone at extension 10 or 11.  
You cannot record or play a message while Direct Extension Dial or  
Automatic System Answer is answering a call. When you want to record  
or play a message, turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System  
Answer and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the  
system to be completed.  
Using  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
5-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback (I892)  
To record a Direct Extension Dial message:  
1. Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at  
extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by  
these features to be completed.  
2. Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11.  
3. Press the i button.  
4. Dial 8 9 2. The current time of day remains on the second line of the  
display for the duration of this procedure. The top line of the display reads:  
DXD: 1=Record  
If a message was previously recorded, the following appears on the  
display:  
DXD: 1=Rec 2=Play  
5. Press 1. The following appears on the display for three seconds:  
Record at tone  
After three seconds, you hear a tone and you can begin recording your  
message. While you are recording, the following display appears:  
Press # to stop  
6. Press # when you are done recording.  
If the allotted time (40 seconds) for the message is completed before you  
press #, you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped  
recording.  
When you finish recording, the following appears on the display:  
DXD: 1=Rec 2=Play  
7. At this point:  
To re-record the message, follow the instructions from Step 5 in this  
procedure.  
To play back the message, follow the instructions from Step 5 in the  
playback procedure that follows.  
To exit the procedure, hang up the handset.  
To play back a Direct Extension Dial message:  
1. Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at  
extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by  
these features to be completed.  
2. Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11.  
3. Press the i button.  
4. Dial 8 9 2. The following appears on the display:  
DXD: 1=Rec 2=Play  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
5. Press 2. The following display appears:  
Message Playback  
After the message is played back, you hear a confirmation tone and the  
following appears on the display:  
DXD: 1=Rec 2=Play  
6. At this point:  
To re-record the message, follow the instructions from Step 5 in the  
procedure for recording a message.  
To play back the message, follow the instructions from Step 5 in this  
procedure.  
To exit the procedure, hang up the handset.  
5-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Line Pickup—Active Line (I68LL)  
Direct Line Pickup—Active Line (I68LL)  
Description  
This feature allows users to access a ringing or held call, or to join a call in  
progress on a specific outside line (where LL is a system line number).This  
feature is useful for picking up a ringing or held call or for joining a call on a line  
that is not assigned to the phone.  
Related Features  
If a line is idle, users cannot access it with this feature (they hear busy  
tone). For information about accessing an idle line, see Direct Line  
If Line Access Restriction (#302) or pool Access Restriction (#315) is set  
to No Access or Out Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within  
a pool, a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line  
Pickup is used to answer a call on that line which is ringing at another  
extension (but the user can join a call or access a held or transferred call on  
the line).  
Direct Line Pickup cannot be used to access an active call at an extension  
that has Privacy activated or that is part of a Conference Call, or a held  
call at an extension that used Exclusive Hold.  
Calls picked up with this feature get Caller ID information, unless Line  
Access Restriction (#302) or Pool Access Restriction (#315) is used to  
prevent users at specific extensions from viewing Caller ID for ringing calls.  
Considerations  
This feature is useful when users are requested or paged to pick up a call  
on a specific line that does not appear on their phone.  
Users cannot access conference calls using this feature.  
You can program a Direct Line Pickup—Active Line button on a system  
phone to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two-digit line  
number.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Direct Line Pickup—Active Line button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press left i 6 8.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
1. If you want, lift the handset.  
2. Press a button programmed with Direct Line Pickup—Active Line, then dial  
the two-digit system line number of the line you want to pick up or join; or  
press i 6 8 and the two-digit line number.  
If you did not lift the handset, the speaker comes on automatically.  
Standard Phone  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 6 8 and the two-digit system line number of the line you want to pick  
up or join.  
5-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line (I8LL)  
Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line (I8LL)  
Description  
This feature allows users to access a specific outside line (where LL is a system  
line number) when the line is not in use. This feature is useful for accessing a line  
that is not assigned to the phone.  
Related Features  
If a line is in use, users cannot access it with this feature (they hear busy  
tone). For information about accessing a ringing or held call, or joining a  
If Line Access Restriction (#302) or pool Access Restriction (#315) is set  
to No Access or In Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a  
pool, a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line  
Pickup is used to access that line to place a call.  
Considerations  
This procedure applies to individual lines. If you have a pooled extension  
and you want to access lines in pools that are not assigned to your  
extension, dial the pool access code at intercom dial tone.  
You can program a Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line button on a system phone  
to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two-digit line  
number.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press left i 8.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Using  
System Phone  
1. If you want, lift the handset.  
2. Press the programmed button and dial the two-digit system line number of  
the idle line you want to access; or press i 8 and the two-digit line  
number.  
If you did not lift the handset, the speaker comes on automatically.  
Standard Phone  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 8 and the two-digit system line number of the idle line you want to  
access.  
5-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disallowed List Assignments (#405)  
Disallowed List Assignments (#405)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to eight Disallowed  
Phone Number Lists to specified extensions.  
Related Features  
You must use Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404) to create the lists of  
disallowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure.  
Considerations  
When a Disallowed Phone Number List is assigned to an extension, the list  
applies to all lines to which the extension has access.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to extension  
2 = Not Assigned to extension ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign Disallowed Phone Number Lists to an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 5 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 27, press 2 7. The following appears on the display:  
DisallowTo 27  
List No:  
3. Enter the list number (1–8). For example, to select list 1, press 1.  
4. To assign or unassign the list, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
5. At this point:  
To assign or unassign another list for this extension, press n  
or p until the list number shows on the display. Then repeat  
Step 4.  
To program another extension, press N or P  
and begin at Step 2.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users  
cannot dial. For example, you may want to prevent calls to a specific telephone  
number or to categories of numbers, such as international numbers. Use this  
procedure to create up to eight lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each.  
Related Features  
After completing this procedure, you must use Disallowed List  
Assignments (#405) to assign the Disallowed Phone Number Lists to  
specific extensions.  
Allowed Phone Numbers, Emergency Phone Numbers, and marked  
System Speed Dial Numbers override the Disallowed List.  
The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on  
the setting for Toll Call Prefix (#402). This setting tells the system whether  
a “0” (for operator-assisted calls) or “1” (for direct-dial calls) is required  
when you make toll calls.  
If Star Code Dial Delay (#410) is active, the system checks for allowed and  
disallowed phone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star  
code.  
Considerations  
Each list entry can include up to 12 digits. You can use the wildcard  
character (by pressing the h button on a system phone) to match any  
single digit (it appears as “!” on the telephone display).  
When a user dials a number that is on a Disallowed List for the user’s  
extension, the user hears a reorder tone (fast busy signal) after dialing the  
part of the number that is stored in the list (for example, an area code).  
If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone  
numbers in a list, you must use N or P to do so since  
entering # and a three-digit code will be considered data for the telephone  
number.  
Valid Entries  
Up to 12 digits including 0–9, #, *, and h (any single digit)  
Examples  
The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for a Disallowed  
Phone Number List in Step 4 of “Programming.”  
5-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404)  
Specific Telephone Numbers. Enter the phone number exactly as you  
would dial it. For example, to prevent calls to the local number 555-5678,  
press 5 5 5 5 6 7 8.  
All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code. The following list entries  
prevent calls to the 900 area code:  
Toll Call Prefix required  
1900 and 0900  
Toll Call Prefix not required  
900 and 0900  
All Telephone Numbers in One Exchange. The following entries prevent  
calls to the 976 exchange:  
Toll Call Prefix required  
976  
Prevents local calls  
1!!!976  
0!!!976  
Prevents direct-dial calls to all area codes  
Prevents operator-assisted calls to all area  
codes  
1976  
0976  
Prevents direct-dial toll calls in the same area  
code (needed only when 0 or 1 is required for  
toll calls in the same area code)  
Prevents operator-assisted toll calls in the  
same area code (needed only when 0 or 1 is  
required for toll calls in the same area code)  
Toll Call Prefix not required  
976  
Prevents local calls  
!0!976  
Prevents calls to area codes with “0” as the  
second digit, such as 203  
!1!976  
Prevents calls to area codes with “1” as the  
second digit, such as 212  
International Long Distance. To prevent international calls, enter the  
international prefix number, 011.  
All Star Codes. To prevent the use of all star codes, enter * (for touch-tone  
phones) and 11 (equivalent to a * on rotary phones).  
Specific Star Codes. To prevent the use of a specific star code (for  
example, *67 to block Caller ID information), enter the * plus the 2- or  
3-digit code (for touch-tone phones) and 11 (equivalent to a * on rotary  
phones) plus the 2- or 3-digit code.  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
— For touch-tone phones  
*67  
Prevents use of *67 to block Caller ID information  
— For rotary phones  
1167  
Prevents use of 1167 to block Caller ID information  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 4 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the List No:prompt, enter a list number (1–8). For example, to select  
the first list, press 1.  
3. At the Entry: prompt, select a list entry (01–10).  
4. At the Data- - - - - - - - - - - -prompt, enter the first telephone  
number.  
5. To save the telephone number in memory, you must press e.  
6. At this point:  
To add other phone numbers to this list, press n to select a  
different list entry and repeat Steps 4 and 5.  
To change the phone number you just entered, press r and  
repeat Steps 4 and 5.  
To delete the phone number you just entered, press r.  
To create another list, press N or P and repeat  
from Step 2.  
7. Select another procedure using N or P or exit  
programming mode.  
5-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display  
Display  
Description  
PARTNER Endeavor-model display phones have a 2-line, 16-character (per line)  
adjustable display area for calling and programming feedback. Specifically, the  
display shows:  
Current date (excluding year), day, and time when the phone is idle  
Number dialed when making a call  
Duration of call (call timer)  
Number (and name if programmed) of the extension calling when receiving  
an intercom call or transferred call  
Number (and name if programmed) of the extension returning a transferred  
call when no one answers at the destination extension  
Automated Attendant (AA), Voice Messaging System (VMS), or Direct  
Extension Dial (DXD) when a call is transferred from an auto attendant, a  
voice messaging system, or the Direct Extension Dial feature, respectively.  
Transfer from AAor TransferFrom VMS, or TransferFrom DXDif  
a call is returning to your extension after an unsuccessful transfer by an  
auto attendant, a voice messaging system or the Direct Dial Extension  
feature, respectively.  
Caller ID number (or name) of calling party, if applicable  
Cover for XXon the display of users receiving a coverage call (XX  
represents the number of the extension that activated call coverage)  
Forward:xx xxon the display of users forwarding their calls (the first xx  
represents the number of the user’s extension; the second xx represents  
the number of the destination extension).  
Wake Up on the display of users receiving a wake up call.  
Volume level bars, as volume is adjusted  
Programming messages and prompts when in programming mode  
When you are in Telephone Programming mode, the current line  
assignment, feature code, or Speed Dial number (if any) assigned to a  
button displays when the button is pressed. Blankdisplays if nothing is  
programmed.  
At idle extension 10 or 11 only, specific messages appear on the top line of  
the display instead of the usual day/date message in the following  
circumstances. Users at these two extensions should be instructed to notify  
the System Manager when such a message appears.  
ChgBat W/PowerOn appears when PARTNER Endeavor  
processor module batteries need to be replaced. The message may  
flicker on and off as the batteries near the low-power threshold.  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
These batteries are used to retain system programming settings  
during a power failure. See Chapter 6, ‘‘Troubleshooting,’’, for  
instructions for replacing the batteries.  
— Backup-Failure Alarm messages appear if an automatic backup is  
unsuccessful. The message is displayed until you clear the alarm (or  
until the next successful automatic backup or system restart). See  
Related Features  
The System Date (#101), System Day (#102), and System Time (#103)  
settings are shown as the default display.  
You can use Display Language (#303) to identify the language in which  
messages appear, if the extension has a system display phone.  
Users can assign a name to their extension. Then, when that extension is  
used to make an intercom call, group call, or transferred call, the name and  
extension number appear on the system display phone receiving the call.  
Similarly, users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension  
number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the  
transferred call. See Extension Name Display for more information.  
Considerations  
The call timer is displayed along with the default display.  
Most messages (other than the default display and Caller ID) display for  
approximately 15 seconds.  
Marked System Speed Dial numbers do not display when they are dialed.  
5-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Language (#303)  
Display Language (#303)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies the language in which display  
messages appear if the extension has a system display phone. The language is  
set for each extension, so phones in the same system can display different  
languages.  
Valid Entries  
1 = English ✔  
2 = Spanish  
3 = French  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Display Language setting for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 0 3 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
The current display language displays.  
3. To change the display language, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
4. To change the display language for another extension, press n or  
until the extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Distinctive Ring (#308)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure determines whether calls should ring at a  
standard device using the system’s distinctive ringing patterns—different patterns  
for outside, intercom, and transferred calls—or whether all calls to the standard  
device should ring like outside calls.  
Considerations  
Change the setting to Not Active if a standard device such as a modem or  
answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls.  
If distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension where both a system  
phone and a standard device are installed, the system phone continues to  
use the system’s distinctive ringing patterns, but all calls ring at the  
standard device using a single ring burst.  
The system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX  
or central office through to extensions (regardless of the setting for this  
feature).  
Valid Entries  
1 = Active (outside, intercom, and transferred calls ring differently, using the  
ssystem’s distinctive ringing patterns) ✔  
2= Not Active (outside, intercom, and transferred calls all ring using a single ring  
burst)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Distinctive Ring setting:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 0 8 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension: prompt, enter the number of the extension to be  
programmed. For example, to program extension 22, press 2 2.  
3. To activate or deactivate Distinctive Ring for the extension, press D  
until the appropriate value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do Not Disturb (F01)  
Do Not Disturb (F01)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones.  
This feature lets a system phone user press a programmed button to prevent  
incoming calls for the extension from audibly alerting (lights still flash). When Do  
Not Disturb is on, outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy  
signal. This feature is recommended only if someone answers outside calls for  
your extension when you do not answer them.  
Related Features  
Caller ID information for incoming calls displays only when a call is audibly  
alerting at an extension. This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb  
activated do not receive Caller ID information, unless the call is answered.  
Users with Automatic VMS Cover (#310) Assigned or with VMS Cover  
turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to  
their voice mailbox.  
Users with Call Coverage turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All  
Calls immediately to the covering extension.  
Considerations  
This feature requires a button with lights. When the Do Not Disturb feature  
is on, the light is also on, indicating that the phone will not ring.  
Use this feature when you do not want the auto attendant or the voice  
messaging system to transfer calls to you.  
Use this feature if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your  
desk, so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and ring  
immediately at the next available extension in the group.  
To avoid missing calls when this feature is not needed, turn it off.  
If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension, the person at the  
doorphone hears signaling, but the alert extension is not signaled.  
Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not  
Disturb active will ring at that extension if they transfer return.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
To program a Do Not Disturb button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button with lights.  
4. Press f 0 1.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
From a system phone, press the programmed button to turn Do Not Disturb on;  
press it again to turn it off. Use the button like a switch—when the light is on, Do  
Not Disturb is on.  
5-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doorphone Alert Extensions (#606)  
Doorphone Alert Extensions (#606)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies extensions that are signaled when  
a doorphone button is pressed. When a person uses the doorphone, it signals all  
alert extensions at the same time. If the alert extension is a system phone, the call  
signals with a unique ding-dong sound to distinguish it from other calls.  
Additionally, if you have two doorphones, they signal with different tones so you  
can distinguish between them.  
Related Features  
You must use Doorphone Extensions (#604 and #605) to identify the  
extensions to which doorphones are connected.  
If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension, the person at  
the doorphone hears signaling, but the alert extension is not signaled.  
Considerations  
You cannot bridge two doorphones together.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Not an Alert Extension ✔  
2 = Doorphone 1 Alert Extension  
3 = Doorphone 2 Alert Extension  
4 = Doorphones 1 and 2 Alert Extension  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify doorphone alert extensions:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 6 0 6 at extension  
10.  
2. Enter the first alert system extension number. For example, to identify  
extension 10, press 1 0.  
3. To change the alert status, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
4. To identify another alert extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Doorphone Extension (#604 and #605)  
Description  
Each of these System Programming procedures identifies an extension to which a  
doorphone is connected. A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance, to  
screen visitors. You can connect up to two doorphones to the system—use  
Doorphone 1 Extension (#604) to identify the extension to which the first  
doorphone is connected and Doorphone 2 Extension (#605) to identify the  
extension to which the second doorphone is connected.  
NOTE:  
Doorphones should not be connected to an Enhanced Tip Ring only port  
since doorphones rely on receiving a forward disconnect signal to  
disconnect a call. Connect doorphones to Tip Ring ports, which are the  
bottom two ports of any processor or 362EC expansion module. If a Tip Ring  
device is connected to an Enhanced Tip Ring only port, a forward  
disconnect signal is not sent and ringing is not heard at that port.  
Related Features  
You must use Doorphone Alert Extensions (#606) to identify the  
extensions that are signaled when the doorphone button is pressed. Each  
doorphone can signal any number of alert extensions.  
To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone,  
use Line Assignment (#301) to remove all outside lines and/or Pool  
Extension Assignment (#314) to remove all pools from the doorphone  
extension. (Automatic Line Selection for the doorphone extension will be  
automatically set to select intercom lines first.)  
You can use Message Light On with the doorphone (for example, the  
doorphone’s light flashes to signal a delivery person.  
Considerations  
An extension cannot be used for a doorphone and a hotline at the same  
time. However, hotlines and doorphones can have the same alert  
extensions.  
Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from doorphone extensions.  
You cannot bridge two doorphones together.  
A PARTNER MAIL VS module should be installed in the last slot to prevent  
incorrect numbering of the doorphone extensions.  
Valid Entries  
One of the bottom two ports on the processor or 362EC modules.  
None Assigned ✔  
5-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Doorphone Extension (#604 and #605)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a doorphone extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 6 0 4 for  
doorphone 1 (or # 6 0 5 for doorphone 2) at extension 10.  
2. Enter the doorphone extension number. For example, to identify extension  
16 as a doorphone extension, press 16—or press r to unassign  
an existing doorphone extension.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Emergency Phone Number List (#406)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure creates a list of up to ten telephone  
numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they  
have access to an outside line. Typical list entries include fire, police, and  
emergency services numbers.  
Related Feature  
The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on  
the setting for Toll Call Prefix (#402). This setting tells the system whether  
a “0” (for operator-assisted calls) or “1” (for direct-dial calls) is required  
when you make toll calls.  
Considerations  
Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to  
emergency numbers, you should: 1) remain on the line and briefly explain  
to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up, and 2) perform  
such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.  
Valid Entries  
Up to 12 digits (0–9)  
Examples  
The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for the Emergency  
Phone Number List in Step 3 of “Programming.”  
911. To allow 911 calls from any extension that has an outside line, create  
the following entry for the Emergency List:  
911  
Overriding Number on a Disallowed List. You can use Emergency List  
entries to override numbers that would otherwise be disallowed. For  
example, if you created Disallowed List entries to prevent calls to area code  
201, but you want to allow calls to a specific number in that area code (such  
as the number of a manager who is on call after hours), put the number in  
the Emergency Lists.  
Toll Call Prefix required  
12015556666and 02015556666  
Toll Call Prefix not required  
2015556666  
5-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Emergency Phone Number List (#406)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To create an Emergency Phone Number List:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 6 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Select a list entry (01–10). For example, to select the third entry, press 0  
3. The following appears on the display:  
EmergencyList 03  
Data - - - - - -  
3. Enter the telephone number.  
4. To save the telephone number in memory, you must press e.  
5. At this point:  
To enter other phone numbers, press n to select a different  
list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4.  
To change the phone number you just entered, press r and  
repeat Steps 3 and 4.  
To delete the phone number you just entered, press r.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Exclusive Hold (F02)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones.  
This feature prevents other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on  
hold at a specific extension with a system phone.  
Related Features  
You can use the Hold button to put calls on regular hold (any extension can pick  
up the held call).  
Considerations  
You can program an Exclusive Hold button on a system phone to use the  
feature with one touch.  
For system phones, if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute, the  
extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone.  
This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved, or until  
the caller hangs up.  
If you put a call on a line or a pool on hold and another user picks up that  
call, it will no longer be available to you. To ensure that no one else can  
retrieve your held call on a pooled line, use Exclusive Hold.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program an Exclusive Hold button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the extension number to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 0 2.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Exclusive Hold (F02)  
Using  
While active on an outside call on a system phone:  
1. Press the programmed button or press f 0 2 to put the call on  
Exclusive Hold.  
The green light next to the line, pool, or i button flutters. At all other  
extensions, the line appears busy (steady red).  
2. To retrieve the call, press the line, pool, or i button on which the call  
is held and lift the handset or press S.  
You can pick up a call on Exclusive Hold only at the extension at which it  
was put on Exclusive Hold.  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Extension Name Display  
Description  
Users can assign a name to their extension: up to 12 characters long on  
PARTNER Endeavor-model phones. Then, when that extension is used to make  
an intercom, group, or transferred call, the name appears on the system display  
phone receiving the call. Similarly, users receiving a transfer return call see the  
name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred  
call.  
Related Features  
Display Language (#303) has no effect on this feature. This means that the  
extension name displays exactly as it is programmed.  
Considerations  
Any extension, regardless of the phone type on that extension, can be  
programmed with a name through Centralized Telephone Programming. If  
users want to program their own extension name, they must have a system  
display phone at their extension.  
You should program Extension Name Display when you first enter  
Centralized Telephone Programming, before programming any other  
features. If you want to program both Extension Name Display and  
Automatic Line Selection (which also must be programmed when you first  
enter Centralized Telephone Programming), first program Automatic Line  
Selection, then exit and re-enter Centralized Telephone Programming to  
program Extension Name Display.  
Valid Entries  
Up to 12 characters, including letters A–Z, numbers 0–9, and blank spaces. See  
Table 5-1 for the corresponding codes.  
5-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Extension Name Display  
Table 5-1. Character Codes  
Letters:  
A = 21  
B = 22  
C = 23  
D = 31  
E = 32  
F = 33  
G = 41  
H = 42  
I = 43  
Numbers:  
blank = 11  
0 = 00  
1 = 10  
2 = 20  
3 = 30  
4 = 40  
5 = 50  
6 = 60  
7 = 70  
8 = 80  
9 = 90  
N = 62  
O = 63  
P = 71  
Q = 72  
R = 73  
S = 74  
T = 81  
U = 82  
V = 83  
W = 91  
X = 92  
Y = 93  
Z = 94  
J = 51  
K = 52  
L = 53  
M = 61  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign a name to an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 12, press 1 2.  
3. Press left i. For extension 12, the display reads:  
12 Enter Name  
If a name was assigned previously to this extension, that name displays  
instead.  
4. Enter the two-digit code for each character you want to enter. (See Table  
5-1 for codes.) For example, to enter the name Andy, press 21 62  
31 93. The display reads:  
12 ANDY  
5. If you make a mistake, you can press! to clear the display. Repeat  
Step 4 to enter the correct name.  
6. Program a button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
External Hotline (#311)  
Description  
This procedure applies only to standard phones. Standard phones can be used to  
make calls when plugged into any port of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor  
or 362EC expansion module. However, standard phones will ring only when  
plugged into the Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
This System Programming procedure identifies an external hotline extension.  
When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline, a predetermined outside  
number is dialed automatically. The external number might be, for example, a  
frequently called service bureau. The external hotline must be a standard phone,  
not a system phone.  
After you identify an external hotline extension, you must store the external phone  
number for the hotline extension as Personal Speed Dial code 80. Both  
procedures are included in “Programming” on the next page.  
Related Features  
Use Hotline (#603) to identify an internal hotline extension.  
Use Line Assignment (#301) to assign outside lines to the external hotline  
extension, Pooled Extension Assignment (#314) to assign pools to the  
external hotline extension, and Automatic Line Selection to set the  
extension to select outside lines or pools first.  
If your use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the  
programmed number, dedicate a line for use by this extension (do not  
assign the line to any other extension or use the line for any other purpose).  
You can set Line Ringing to No Ring for all lines or pools assigned to the  
external hotline to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the extension. If a  
phone is set to No Ring, it can be on any port.  
Make sure there are no call, or line, or pool restrictions assigned to an  
external hotline because that will prevent the outside number from being  
Do not use Station Lock at an external hotline because it will prevent the  
outside number from being dialed.  
Remove external hotlines from Night Service Group Extensions (#504),  
Calling Group Extensions (#502), and Hunt Group Extensions (#505).  
Considerations  
Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage, the external hotline  
may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately (for example, if  
many of the standard devices connected to your system dial out at the  
same time). See “Using” for more information.  
5-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
External Hotline (#311)  
A standard phone without a dialpad is recommended for use as the  
external hotline.  
You can identify several extensions as external hotlines.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify an external hotline extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 1 1 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension:prompt, enter the external hotline extension number.  
For example, to program extension 16 as the external hotline, press 1 6.  
3. To assign or unassign the extension, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
To program the external hotline phone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c.  
2. Dial the extension number of the external hotline.  
3. Press f 8 0.  
4. Enter the external hotline phone number exactly as you would dial it.  
5. Continue programming or exit programming mode.  
Using  
1. Lift the handset of the external hotline.  
After approximately three seconds, the programmed phone number is  
dialed automatically.  
2. If you do not hear dial tone or dialing noises, hang up for about 20 seconds  
and try again.  
3. When the call is answered, speak into the handset.  
5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Fax Machine Extensions (#601)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies extensions to which fax machines  
are connected. If you want the fax to receive incoming faxes, the fax machine  
extension must be on the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362  
processor or 362EC expansion module.  
Related Features  
If you want to monitor fax machine status and make one-touch transfers to  
the fax machine, see Auto Dialing to program a Fax Management button  
and Using the Fax Management Feature to use the button.  
To prevent other extensions from interrupting a fax call, program the fax  
extension for Automatic Extension Privacy (#304).  
Considerations  
Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from fax machine extensions.  
If an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL  
system, the Automated Attendant Service of that system can be  
programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the  
extension Hunt Group for the fax machines (if you have multiple fax  
machines). See the PARTNER MAIL documentation for instructions.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify a Fax Machine extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 6 0 1 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension: prompt, enter the extension to which the fax machine is  
connected. For example, to identify extension 16, press 1 6.  
3. To assign or unassign the extension, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Group Call Distribution (#206)  
Group Call Distribution (#206)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure assigns outside lines to Hunt Groups. Doing  
so allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being  
answered and transferred by the receptionist. You can assign lines to Hunt Groups  
1–7. (Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system.)  
Related Features  
You must use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to assign extensions to  
Hunt Groups.  
If you assign lines to Hunt Group 7 for the voice messaging system’s  
Automated Attendant Service, you may want to adjust when the lines  
should ring in the group. See VMS Hunt Delay (#506) and VMS Hunt  
Schedule (#507) for more information.  
If you are using a voice messaging system, you have two Group Call  
Distribution options:  
— If you want Automated Attendant Service for some or all lines,  
Assign (setting 1) those lines to Hunt Group 7.  
— If you want calls to route directly to the voice mailbox of a specific  
user after four rings, choose VMS Line Cover (setting 3) for those  
lines and assign a line owner in the voice messaging system. For  
more information about voice messaging system options, refer to the  
documentation shipped with the voice messaging system.  
As an alternative to the VMS Line Cover setting, you can use Line  
Coverage Extension (#208) with VMS Cover. This provides more flexibility  
because it lets you specify the number of times calls ring (using VMS  
Cover Rings (#117)) at the user’s extension before going to the user’s  
mailbox. In addition, if the user’s extension has Do Not Disturb on, calls on  
the line can go immediately to coverage.  
Considerations  
Each outside line can be assigned to only one Hunt Group.  
If a Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned receives an outside call and  
all members of that Hunt Group are busy (or have Do Not Disturb on), the  
caller hears ringing, which continues until the call is answered.  
5-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Examples  
Here are some useful applications for Group Call Distribution:  
Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt  
Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group. Doing so lets  
outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by  
the receptionist. For example, a mail-order company assigns the  
extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line  
to the group. The company then publishes the number as its customer  
service number, so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to  
place an order.  
If you install a voice messaging system, assign the system extensions  
associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7.  
Then, use this procedure to assign outside lines to Hunt Group 7 for  
Automated Attendant Service. Callers hear a greeting and are prompted to  
enter digits to transfer to a specific extension or group without the  
assistance of the receptionist.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned (for hunting to groups 1–6, or to group 7 for the voice messaging  
system’s Automated Attendant Service)  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
3 = VMS Line Cover (available only for Hunt Group 7)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To set up lines for Group Call Distribution:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 2 0 6 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Group:prompt, enter a group number (1–6; 7 for the voice  
messaging system). For example, to select group 1, press 1.  
3. At the Line:prompt, enter the desired line number. For example, to select  
line 1, press 0 1.  
4. To assign or remove a line for groups 1–6, or to assign or remove a line or  
use VMS Line Cover for group 7, press D until the appropriate value  
displays.  
5. At this point:  
To program another line, press n or p until the line  
number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 4.  
To program another group, press N P, enter a  
new group number, and repeat Steps 3 and 4.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Calling—Ring/Page (I7G/I*7G)  
Group Calling—Ring/Page (I7G/I*7G)  
Description  
This feature lets users ring, page, or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the  
extensions in any one of four Calling Groups (G is a Calling Group number from  
1–4). When paging, the caller hears a beep and begins speaking; the caller’s  
voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system phones in the selected Calling  
Group. The first extension to answer the call (by picking up the handset or  
pressing S, or by pressing! to answer a page) is connected to the caller.  
Related Features  
You must use Calling Group Extensions (#502) to assign extensions to a Calling  
Group. Extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 can receive simultaneous paging.  
Considerations  
Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group.  
Exclude extensions that connect auxiliary equipment (auto attendants,  
voice messaging systems, fax machines, internal and external hotline  
phones, and doorphones) from Calling Groups.  
Extensions that have phones without built-in speakers (for example, a  
standard phone) will not hear the page.  
If a Calling Group is in use, a user attempting to page that group hears a  
busy tone.  
If a user leaves the microphone on for hands-free answer on intercom  
(HFAI), the microphone is turned off when that phone receives a group  
page; the user must lift the handset or press! to answer the page.  
Calls can be transferred to a Calling Group manually or using a button  
programmed to ring the Calling Group.  
You can program a Group Calling button on a system phone to ring or page  
a specified Calling Group or to transfer a call to a Calling Group with one  
touch.  
When a call is transferred to a Calling Group and the call is not answered, it  
goes back to the specified Transfer Return Extension (#306). The call  
must be ringing, not a voice page.  
Examples  
Here are some useful applications for this feature:  
Group page employees for general announcements; this feature is an  
inexpensive alternative to a paging system.  
5-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Put the extensions of people with similar responsibilities in a Calling Group,  
so when a caller needs to talk with anyone in the group, the receptionist  
can transfer the call to the group instead of making separate intercom calls.  
For example, a car dealership puts all extensions for the sales staff into  
Calling Group 1. To let a prospective customer talk to any salesperson, the  
receptionist simply transfers the call to the group by dialing & 7 1.  
All phones in the group ring, and the customer is connected to the first  
salesperson to answer.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Calling Group button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. To ring the group, press left i 7.  
If you want calls to page the group, press left i * 7. (Note that  
buttons programmed for paging a Calling Group cannot be used to transfer  
a call to that Calling Group.)  
5. Dial a Calling Group number (1–4).  
6. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
To use when programmed on a button:  
To ring or page the Calling Group, press the programmed button first, then  
lift the handset. All available extensions in the Calling Group ring.  
— If you ring the group, all available extensions in the Calling Group  
ring.  
— If you page the group, start talking after the beep.  
Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that  
are idle or have Do Not Disturb turned off in the Calling Group. If  
someone answers the page, you are connected to that person and  
the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page.  
5-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Calling—Ring/Page (I7G/I*7G)  
To transfer a call to the Calling Group, while on a call, press the button  
programmed for ringing a Calling Group. You can hang up or stay on the  
line to announce the call.  
All available extensions in the Calling Group ring.  
To manually ring or page a Calling Group:  
1. Lift the handset and press i.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 7 and a group number (1–4).  
All available extensions in the Calling Group ring.  
To make a paging call, press * 7 and a group number (1–4). After the  
beep, start talking.  
Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not  
busy in the Calling Group. If someone answers the page, you are  
connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears  
the page.  
To manually transfer a call to a Calling Group:  
1. While on a call, press &.  
2. Dial 7 and a group number (1–4). You can hang up or stay on the line to  
announce the call.  
All available extensions in the Calling Group ring.  
Standard Phone  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion  
module. However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip  
Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
To ring or page a Calling Group:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 7 and a group number (1–4).  
All available extensions in the Calling Group ring.  
To make a paging call, press * 7 and a group number (1–4). After the  
beep, start talking.  
Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not  
busy in the Calling Group. If someone answers the page, you are  
connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears  
the page.  
5-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
To transfer a call to a Calling Group:  
1. While on a call, press the switchhook down once rapidly.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 7 and a group number (1–4). You can hang up or stay on the line to  
announce the call.  
All available extensions in the Calling Group ring.  
5-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Hunting—Ring/Voice Signal (I77G/I*77G)  
Group Hunting—Ring/Voice Signal  
(I77G/I*77G)  
Description  
This feature lets you distribute call volume among extensions in a group, to offload  
call activity from a single user. When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a  
Hunt Group (where G is a Hunt Group number from 1–7), the system rings or  
voice signals the first available (non-busy) extension in the group, passing over  
busy extensions (or those with Do Not Disturb on) in a circular hunt. If a ringing  
call is not answered within three rings, it moves to the next available extension,  
and so on, until the call is answered or the caller hangs up. For a voice-signaled  
call, only the first available extension is signaled; if that extension does not  
answer, the call does not keep hunting. After an extension receives a Hunt Group  
call, the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first  
unless all other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer.  
The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups; however, Hunt Group 7 is used  
exclusively for the voice messaging system. For more information, refer to Voice  
Related Features  
You must use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to assign extensions to a  
Hunt Group.  
Set Transfer Return Rings (#105) to four or greater, to ensure that calls  
continue hunting to other group extensions if the call is not answered.  
Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave  
your desk, so that a call to your extension moves directly to the next  
available extension in the group.  
You can use Group Call Distribution (#206) to assign outside lines to a  
Hunt Group. Doing so allows outside calls on those lines to route directly  
into that Hunt Group instead of being transferred by the receptionist.  
Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover.  
When using PARTNER MAIL, a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a  
Hunt Group mailbox.  
Considerations  
Extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group.  
Outside calls can be answered and transferred to a Hunt Group. The voice  
messaging system and the auto attendant also can transfer calls to a Hunt  
Group.  
Calls cannot be transferred to a Hunt Group if all extensions in that group  
are busy.  
5-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
If only one extension in a Hunt Group is available and that extension does  
not answer an incoming call, the call returns to the extension that  
transferred the call (or to that extension’s transfer return extension) after the  
programmed amount of transfer return rings.  
You can program a Group Hunting button on a system phone to ring or  
voice signal a Hunt Group with one touch.  
If you have a voice messaging system, you can program Hunt Group 7  
(i 7 7 7) on a button to retrieve messages with one touch.  
Examples  
Here are some useful applications for a Hunt Group:  
Place the extensions of employees who work in a department sharing calls,  
such as a customer service group, in a Hunt Group so that when a call  
comes in to the receptionist it can be transferred to the next available  
extension. This alleviates the problem of one employee receiving most of  
the calls.  
Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt  
Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group. Doing so lets  
outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by  
the receptionist. For example, a mail-order company assigns the  
extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line  
to the group. The company then publishes the number as its customer  
service number, so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to  
place an order.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Hunt Group button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. To program the button to ring the next available extension in the Hunt  
Group, press left i 7 7.  
To program the button to voice signal the next available extension in a Hunt  
Group, press left i * 7 7.  
5. Dial a Hunt Group number (1–7 for ringing calls; 1–6 for voice-signaled  
calls).  
6. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Hunting—Ring/Voice Signal (I77G/I*77G)  
Using  
System Phone  
To use when programmed on a button:  
To ring or voice signal an extension in the Hunt Group, simply lift the  
handset or press S and press the programmed button. If you are voice  
signaling, start talking after the beep.  
To transfer a call to an extension in the Hunt Group, while on a call press  
the programmed button.  
To manually ring or voice signal a Hunt Group:  
1. Lift the handset and press i.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. To make a ringing call, dial 7 7 and a group number (1–7).  
The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings. If no one answers  
within three rings, the call hunts to the next available extension.  
To make a voice-signaled call, press * 7 7 and a group number (1–6).  
After the beep, start talking.  
Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone  
that is not busy. If no one answers, the call does not keep hunting.  
To manually transfer a call to a Hunt Group:  
1. While on a call, press &.  
2. Dial 7 7 and a group number (1–7).  
The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings. If no one answers  
within three rings, the call hunts to the next available extension. However, if  
Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings, the call  
returns to the extension that transferred the call, or to that extension’s  
transfer return extension.  
Standard Phone  
NOTE:  
Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion  
module. However, standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip  
Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports.  
To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. To make a ringing call, dial7 7 and a group number (1–7).  
The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings. If no one answers  
within three rings, the call hunts to the next available extension.  
5-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
To make a voice-signaled call, press * 7 7 and a group number (1–6).  
After the beep, start talking.  
Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone  
that is not busy. If no one answers, the call does not keep hunting.  
To transfer a call to a Hunt Group:  
1. While on a call, press the switchhook down once rapidly.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 7 7 and a group number (1–7).  
The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings. If no one answers  
within three rings, the call hunts to the next available extension. However, if  
Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings, the call  
returns to the extension that transferred the call, or to that extension’s  
transfer return extension.  
5-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Pickup (I66G)  
Group Pickup (I66G)  
Description  
This feature allows users at any extension in the system to answer any outside,  
intercom, or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group (where G is  
a Pickup Group number from 1–4). In other words, when a call rings at an  
extension that is in a Pickup Group, a user at any extension in the system can  
answer the call, without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without  
being in the same Pickup Group. The system can have up to four Pickup Groups.  
Related Features  
You must use Pickup Group Extensions (#501) to assign extensions to Pickup  
Groups.  
Considerations  
Extensions can be in more than one Pickup Group.  
You can program a Group Pickup button on a system phone to pick up calls  
in a Pickup Group with one touch.  
Examples  
Here are some useful applications for a Pickup Group:  
Put all system extensions in a Pickup Group (except the boss’ private  
extension), so anyone on the system can answer a ringing call (except calls  
to the boss).  
Put the extensions of people who work near each other and who can hear  
each other’s phones ring, but who don’t have each other’s lines on their  
phones, in a Pickup Group.  
For example, a group of typists work in a large room separated by cubicles,  
and all of their extensions are in Pickup Group 1. When a typist leaves the  
room and the typist’s phone rings, anyone else in the system who can hear  
the call ring can pick it up simply by dialing the Pickup Group code for that  
group (i 6 6 1).  
5-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Pickup Group button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press left i 6 6.Dial a Pickup Group number (1–4).  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
To use Group Pickup when programmed on a button, press the programmed  
button.  
To use manually:  
1. Lift the handset and press i.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 6 6 and a group number (1–4) to pick up a call ringing at any  
extension in the group.  
Standard Phone  
To use Group Pickup:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 6 6 and a group number (1–4) to pick up a call ringing at any  
extension in the group.  
5-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hold  
Hold  
Description  
This section explains how to place and retrieve calls on hold, using either the h  
button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone. (The user can  
make and receive other calls on another line or pool while a call is on hold.)  
Related Features  
System phone users can use Exclusive Hold to put calls on hold that can  
be retrieved only from their own extension. (Placing a call on Exclusive  
Hold also prevents other users from accessing Caller ID information for the  
held call.)  
If you put a call on a line in a pool on hold and another user picks up that  
call, it will no longer be available to you. To ensure that no on else can  
retrieve your held call on a pooled line, use Exclusive Hold.  
Use Call Park to put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up  
from any phone in the system. This type of hold typically is used for pooled  
extensions in Hybrid mode, because it allows the user to retrieve a call  
without having to know which line the call is on.  
Callers on hold hear Music-On-Hold (#602) only if it is active and an audio  
source is connected to the processor module.  
Standard phone users can put a call on hold to retrieve a second call  
provided Call Waiting (#316) is programmed for their extensions.  
Considerations  
For system phones, if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute, the  
extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone.  
This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until  
the caller hangs up.  
Only one party on an intercom call can put the call on hold. If both parties  
try to put the call on hold, the call is disconnected.  
If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system, the PBX or  
Centrex system may include a call hold feature that lets you place a call on  
hold and place another call on the same line. For more information, see the  
documentation for your PBX or Centrex system. (When your Centrex or  
PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash, use the Recall  
feature instead.)  
Hold acts differently on feature phones (standard phones with feature  
buttons). When you press a Hold button on a feature phone, the call is held  
at the phone itself. This means other phones in the system cannot see that  
the call is on hold (it appears as a busy line). Also, callers on hold at a  
feature phone will not hear the system’s music-on-hold.  
5-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Using  
System Phone  
To put a call on hold:  
1. Press h.  
The green light next to the i, line, or pool winks.  
To retrieve a call that you put on hold:  
1. Press the i, line, or pool button next to the winking green light.  
2. If the handset is in the cradle, lift it up or press S.  
You are reconnected to the held call. The green light next to the line or  
intercom button changes to on steady.  
To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold, press the button  
next to the winking red light (or press i 6 8 and the two-digit line  
number).  
Standard Phone  
To put a call on hold:  
1. Press the switchhook down once rapidly.  
You hear intercom dial tone. The call is on hold. (Do not hang up the  
handset while the call is on hold. If you hang up the handset, the phone  
rings. Lifting the handset reconnects you to the held call.)  
To retrieve a call that you put on hold:  
1. Hang up.  
The call “rings back.”  
2. Lift the handset.  
You are reconnected to the held call.  
To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold:  
1. Lift the handset.  
2. At the intercom dial tone, dial 6 8 and the two-digit line number.  
To answer a call when you are already on a call (you hear a call-waiting tone—two  
beeps):  
1. Press the switchhook.  
The first call is put on hold and you are connected to the new call.  
2. To return to the first call, press the switchhook again.  
3. You can continue to press the switchhook to move between the two calls.  
5-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hold Disconnect Time (#203)  
Hold Disconnect Time (#203)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you change the hold disconnect time for  
an outside line. When a caller on hold hangs up, the local telephone company  
may send a special signal to the system to free the line. Different telephone  
companies use different length signals. The length of the signal is called the hold  
disconnect time. If you put a call on hold and the caller hangs up, but the call does  
not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up, the hold disconnect time  
is probably set too high, or set at No Detection.  
Considerations  
If the telephone company does not send a signal, keep the hold disconnect  
time set to 450 msec, the default setting. The user must disconnect a held  
call manually by retrieving the call then hanging it up.  
Shorten the hold disconnect time only if abandoned calls on hold do not  
disconnect.  
Lengthen the hold disconnect time only if calls are being disconnected  
prematurely.  
Valid Entries  
00 = No Detection  
01 = 50 msec  
02 = 100 msec  
03 = 150 msec  
04 = 200 msec  
05 = 250 msec  
06 = 300 msec  
07 = 350 msec  
08 = 400 msec  
09 = 450 msec ✔  
10 = 500 msec  
11 = 550 msec  
12 = 600 msec  
5-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the hold disconnect time:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 2 0 3 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Line:prompt, enter the two-digit number of the line for which you  
are adjusting the hold disconnect time.For example, to adjust line 1, press  
0 1.  
The current hold disconnect time for the line number you specified is  
displayed. For example, if line 1 is set to the default setting, 09 – 450 msec  
shows in the display.  
3. To change the hold disconnect time, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To program the next line, press n, then repeat Step 3.  
5. Repeat Step 4 for each line in the system.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hotline (#603)  
Hotline (#603)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies an internal hotline extension and  
its alert extension. When a user lifts the handset of the hotline phone, the alert  
extension rings. You can set up several hotline and alert extension pairs. The alert  
extension can be the same or different for multiple hotline extensions.  
We recommend using a standard phone as the hotline phone since this feature  
makes use only of the phone’s intercom. The alert extension can be any type of  
phone. Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module. However,  
standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip Ring ports, which are the  
bottom two ports.  
Related Features  
To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline phone,  
use Line Assignment (#301) to remove all outside lines or Pool  
Extension Assignment (#314) to remove all pools from the hotline  
extension.  
Set Automatic Line Selection for the hotline extension to intercom only.  
Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions (#504),  
Calling Group Extensions (#502), and Hunt Group Extensions (#505).  
Use External Hotline (#311) to identify an extension that automatically  
dials a programmed outside number when a user lifts the handset.  
Considerations  
The same extension cannot be assigned as both a hotline and a  
doorphone. Assigning a doorphone extension as a hotline extension  
cancels the doorphone setting.  
The hotline phone can receive transferred calls (but the user at that  
extension should not pick up the handset until the phone rings).  
Valid Entries  
An alert system extension  
Hotline extension  
No hotline or alert extension assigned ✔  
Example  
A supermarket installs a hotline phone at its meat counter so a customer can  
signal the butcher.  
5-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify a hotline extension and its alert extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 6 0 3 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension:prompt, enter the hotline extension number. For  
example, to program extension 33 as the hotline, press 3 3.  
3. At the Data - - - - - - - - - - - - prompt, enter the alert extension number—  
see “Valid Entries” on the previous page. For example, to program  
extension 32 as the alert extension, press 3 2. The following appears on  
the display:  
HotLine Ext 33  
Data 32  
4. At this point:  
To change the hotline and alert extension numbers you just entered,  
repeat Steps 2 and 3.  
To delete the existing hotline and alert extension numbers, press  
r.  
To identify another hotline and alert extension pair, press n or  
p until the new hotline extension number shows on the  
display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
Using  
To use the hotline phone:  
1. Lift the handset of the hotline phone.  
The designated alert extension rings.  
2. When the call is answered, speak into the handset.  
5-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505)  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you assign any number of extensions to  
a Hunt Group. The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups; however, Hunt  
Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system.  
Related Features for Hunt Groups 1–6  
For instructions on ringing or paging extensions in a Hunt Group or  
transferring calls to a Hunt Group, see Group Hunting.  
If a ringing call to the Hunt Group is not answered within three rings, the  
call moves to the next available extension in the Hunt Group. If users in the  
Hunt Group leave their desks, they should turn on Do Not Disturb at their  
extensions so calls hunt immediately to the next available extension.  
For instructions on making outside calls ring directly in a Hunt Group, see  
Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover.  
When using PARTNER MAIL, a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a  
Hunt Group mailbox.  
Related Features for Hunt Group 7  
This Hunt Group applies only to the voice messaging system. For more  
After you assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging  
system hardware to Hunt Group 7, you should set the Transfer Return  
Extension (#306) for those extensions to extension 10 (or another  
extension with a person who can assist the caller).  
Considerations for Hunt Groups 1–6  
Any number of extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group. In  
addition, extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group.  
You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a Hunt  
Group.  
If you have a PARTNER MAIL system and multiple fax machines, you can  
assign the fax machines to a Hunt Group. Then you can program the  
PARTNER MAIL system so that when an automatic fax call comes in on a  
5-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
line covered by the PARTNER MAIL’s Automated Attendant Service, the  
PARTNER MAIL system recognizes that it is a fax call and automatically  
transfers it to the first available fax machine in the group.  
Considerations for Hunt Group 7  
This Hunt Group is used exclusively for the extensions associated with the voice  
messaging system hardware. Do not assign any other extensions to this group. A  
voice messaging system requires special hardware and set up procedures—refer  
to Voice Messaging Systems and to the documentation shipped with the voice  
messaging system for more information.  
NOTE:  
When using the PARTNER MAIL system, you can only use the bottom two  
ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC  
expansion module.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to group  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign extensions to a Hunt Group:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 5 0 5 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Group: prompt, enter a group number (1–7). For example, to select  
group 1, press 1. The following appears on the display:  
Hunt Group 1  
Extension:  
3. Enter the desired extension number. For example, to select extension 31,  
press 3 1.  
4. To assign or unassign the extension, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
5. At this point:  
To assign or unassign another extension, press n or p  
until the extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 4.  
To program another group, press N P, enter a  
new group number, and repeat Steps 3 and 4.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Intercom Dial Tone (#309)  
Intercom Dial Tone (#309)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure determines the type of dial tone that the  
system provides at an extension. It may be necessary to change this setting to  
Machine (outside line) dial tone for an autodialing device, such as a fax or modem,  
that has trouble making calls. For example, if you have a modem that checks for  
outside line dial tone before dialing, use this procedure to change from Regular to  
Machine dial tone.  
Considerations  
Use this procedure only if an autodialing device has trouble making calls.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Regular dial tone ✔  
2 = Machine (outside line) dial tone  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 0 9 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension: prompt, enter the number of the extension to be  
programmed. For example, to select extension 22, press 2 2.  
3. To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting, press D until the  
appropriate value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Joining Calls  
Description  
Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress, the same way you do on a home  
telephone by picking up an extension. (This is different from conferencing, in  
which the originator “pulls you into” the call.) Up to three system extensions can  
join a call on an outside line (for a total of one outside and four inside parties).  
Related Features  
You can use Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to prevent other  
extensions from joining calls on a specific extension. This is especially  
useful for answering machines, fax machines, modems, and credit card  
scanners, because trying to join one of these devices could interfere with  
its operation.  
Users can program Privacy onto a system phone button to allow or prevent  
others from joining their calls as needed.  
Caller ID information displays if you join a call; however, you cannot join a  
call at any extension that has Privacy activated.  
If a line is not assigned to a user’s extension and access to that line is not  
restricted for that extension, the user can use Direct Line Pickup—Active  
Line to join a call on that line.  
You can join a call answered by Automatic System Answer or Direct  
Extension Dial by pressing the line button and lifting the handset. The  
message stops playing when you join the call.  
Pooled extension users can add other parties to a call by pressing pool  
buttons.  
Considerations  
You cannot join a call by pressing a pool button.  
You cannot join an intercom call or a conference call at another extension.  
You cannot join a call on an extension that has a voice interrupt on busy call  
in progress.  
You can join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system,  
but only if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions  
associated with the voice messaging system hardware. If this is the case,  
when you join the call, the voice messaging system disconnects  
automatically so you can speak to the caller.  
You cannot put a joined call on hold.  
You can tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next  
to the line or pool button change to alternately flashing red and green.  
If a system phone joins a call on a standard phone, there is a momentary  
“break” in the call on the standard phone.  
5-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Joining Calls  
How to Join a Call  
System Phone  
A steady red light next to a line button indicates a call is in progress at another  
extension.  
To join a call:  
Press the line button next to the steady red light and lift the handset,  
or  
Lift the handset and press i 6 8and the two-digit line  
number.  
The red and green lights alternately flash. You are now joined with  
the call.  
Standard Phone  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 6 8 and the number of the line on which the call is being conducted.  
5-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Last Number Redial (F05)  
Description  
This feature redials the last outside number dialed (maximum 28 digits). It is  
useful for immediately redialing a busy number.  
Related Features  
You can use Save Number Redial to temporarily save the last number  
dialed. The difference between Last Number Redial and Save Number  
Redial is that Save Number Redial allows you to make other outside calls  
before redialing the saved number.  
System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be redialed with this feature.  
A Last Number Redial number can begin with a star code; the system  
automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
setting.  
Considerations  
This feature redials all digits dialed on the last outside call.  
You can program a Last Number Redial button on a system phone to redial  
a number with one touch.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Last Number Redial button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 0 5.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Last Number Redial (F05)  
Using  
System Phone  
To use Last Number Redial:  
1. If you want, lift the handset.  
2. Press the programmed button or press f 0 5.  
Digits are displayed on system display phones as they are dialed.  
Standard Phone  
To use Last Number Redial:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 0 5.  
5-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Line Access Mode (#313)  
Description  
This procedure applies only to systems configured for Hybrid mode.  
This System Programming procedure identifies individual extensions that are to  
operate as key extensions even though the system is configured for Hybrid mode.  
If an extension’s Line Access Mode is changed to Key, individual lines can be  
assigned to specific buttons on that extension’s phone regardless of whether they  
are part of a pool.  
Related Features  
When an extension is changed from Pooled to Key, any previously  
assigned pool buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access  
Restriction (#315) is set to No Access. Additionally, the extension is  
programmed with factory settings for Line Assignment (#301), Line  
Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line  
Ringing.  
When an extension is changed from Key to Pooled, any previously  
assigned line buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access  
Restriction (#315) is set to No Restriction. Additionally, the extension is  
programmed with factory settings for Pool Line Assignment (#314), Pool  
Extension Assignment (#314), Automatic Line Selection, and Line  
Ringing.  
Considerations  
Extension 10 operates as a key extension regardless of how the system is  
configured. The Line Access Mode for extension 10 cannot be changed.  
Extensions that are programmed as key extensions cannot access pools  
either by pressing pool buttons or by dialing pool access codes.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Pooled all extensions except 10  
2 = Key extension 10 only  
5-128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Access Mode (#313)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such ass and e on system phones.)  
To change the Line Access Mode setting for a specific extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 1 3.  
2. Enter the desired extension number. For example, to program extension  
18, press 1 8.  
3. To change the Line Access Mode, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all extensions that you want to change.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Line Access Restriction (#302)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure restricts an extension from receiving and/or  
making outside calls on a specific line. For example, you may want a secretary to  
answer calls on a manager’s line, but not to make any outgoing calls on the line; in  
this case you can assign the manager’s line to the secretary’s extension and  
restrict it to In Only.  
Related Features  
This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing. For example, an  
extension with a line set to In Only or No Access cannot select the line to  
dial out— even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List  
(#406). See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions for a summary of all  
dialing restrictions.  
For pooled extensions, use Pool Access Restriction (#315) to assign  
restrictions to all the lines assigned to a specific pool. (Pool Access  
Restriction overrides Line Access Restriction.) For individual lines on  
pooled extensions, use Line Access Restriction.  
To prevent an extension from using a line, restrict the line even if it is not  
assigned to the extension, so it cannot be accessed using Direct Line  
Pickup. If an extension’s access to a line is set to No Access or In Only, the  
extension cannot place calls on that line, either by pressing the line button  
or by using Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line. Likewise, if the extension’s  
access to a line is set to No Access or Out Only, the extension cannot  
receive calls on that line that are ringing at other extensions, either by  
pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup—Active Line.  
When a user has access to an outside line for outgoing calls, dialing  
restrictions can be customized for the user’s extension by using Outgoing  
Call Restriction (#401) and Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404).  
Caller ID information does not display for ringing calls on lines  
programmed for Out Only or No Access.  
Considerations  
If a line is assigned to a phone, but is restricted to No Access, the line button lights  
show calling activity; but the line cannot be used to place or receive calls.  
Valid Entries  
1 = No Restriction (calls permitted on that line) ✔  
2 = Out Only (can only make outside calls, not receive them, on that line)  
3 = In Only (can only receive calls, not make them, on that line)  
4 = No Access (cannot receive or make calls, but can join calls, receive  
transferred calls, or pick up calls on hold on that line)  
5-130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Line Access Restriction (#302)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To restrict an extension from making calls on a specific line:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 0 2 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension:prompt, enter the extension number to be  
programmed. For example, to program extension 23, press 2 3.  
3. At the Line:prompt, enter the line number to be restricted at this  
extension. For example, to restrict line 2, press 0 2.  
The current restriction displays.  
4. To change the line restriction for this extension, press D until the  
appropriate value displays—see “Valid Entries” on the previous page.  
5. At this point:  
To restrict another line at this extension, press n or p  
until the line number shows on the display. Repeat Step 4.  
To restrict another extension, press N P and  
begin at Step 2.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Line Assignment (#301)  
Description  
This procedure applies to key extensions or to individual lines on pooled  
extensions.  
This System Programming procedure assigns the outside lines that are available  
at an extension. The default order of line assignment to the buttons on a system  
phone is from left to right, starting in the bottom left corner (see Figure 5-1 on the  
next page). To put the lines in a different order, first use this procedure to remove  
all assigned lines; then assign lines in the desired order.  
Related Features  
Number of Lines (#104) can be used only during initial system setup to  
assign a subset of lines to all extensions. You can use Line Assignment to  
assign additional lines to specific extensions. For example, if five lines were  
assigned to all extensions using Number of Lines (#104) and there are  
eight lines in the system, use Line Assignment (#301) to assign lines 6, 7,  
and 8 to specific extensions.  
After you finish Line Assignment, you can use Line Ringing to identify  
when each outside line assigned to an extension should start ringing. If you  
add a line to the system, its factory setting is Immediate Ring.  
You can use Automatic Line Selection to determine the order in which the  
system selects a line for an extension when the user at that extension lifts  
the handset or turns on the speaker to make a call. If you add a line to the  
system, it becomes the last line in the selection sequence.  
Remove all outside lines from Hotline (#603) and Doorphone (#604/#605)  
extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them.  
If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing a line, make  
sure you restrict the line for that extension using Line Access Restriction  
(#302) even if the line is not assigned to that extension, so it cannot be  
accessed using Direct Line Pickup. Similarly, if you want to prevent a user  
at an extension from accessing all the lines in a pool, make sure you  
restrict the pool for that extension using Pool Access Restriction (#315)  
even if the pool is not assigned to that extension, so it cannot be accessed  
using the pool access code.  
The user must have access to an outside line in order to dial numbers on  
the Emergency Phone Number List (#406).  
5-132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Assignment (#301)  
Message  
Ext.  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Ext.  
Message  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Ext.  
Intercom  
Message  
Figure 5-1. Default Line Assignments  
5-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Considerations  
You cannot assign a line that belongs to a pool as an individual line on that  
pooled extension.  
A line must be assigned to a button with lights. If a line is assigned to a  
button without lights, you cannot access that line, nor can you program  
anything else on the button.  
You can assign multiple lines (up to 19) to a standard phone, but a  
single-line phone can handle only one call at a time. To make a call, a user  
lifts the handset and dials 9 at the intercom dial tone; the system selects  
the first available line based on the Automatic Line Selection  
programmed for the extension. (Alternatively, the user can use Direct Line  
Pickup to access a specific line.)  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned ✔  
2 = Not Assigned  
3 = Select Button (then press a line button to assign the line to that button)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign lines to a specific extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 0 1 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the extension number to be programmed. For example, to program  
extension 15, press 1 5.  
The red light next to each button that has a line assigned is on steady; the  
red light next to each button that has a pool assigned flashes. To remove all  
existing line assignments, press r before selecting a line.  
3. Enter the line number to be assigned. For example, to select line 1, press  
0 1.  
4. At this point:  
If you want to assign the line to the first available button with lights,  
press D until the display reads:  
LineAssign15 L01  
1 Assigned  
If you want to remove a line assignment, press D until the  
following appears on the display:  
LineAssign15 L01  
2 Not Assigned  
5-134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Assignment (#301)  
If you want to assign the line to a specific button, press 3. The  
following appears on the display:  
LineAssign15 L01  
3 Select Button  
Then press a button with lights to assign the line to that button. If you use  
option 3 after a line has been assigned, the line moves from the old button  
to the new button you select.  
5. At this point:  
To program another line for this extension, press n or p  
until the line number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 4.  
To program another extension, press N P and  
begin at Step 2.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Line Coverage Extension (#208)  
Description  
This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system.  
This System Programming procedure identifies an extension as the “owner” of a  
specific outside line, so the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover  
for that line.  
Related Features  
An extension’s “owned” line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is  
set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction  
(#302) is set to No Restriction or In Only.  
Use Call Coverage to redirect an extension’s calls on owned lines to the  
covering extension.  
Use Call Coverage Rings (#116) to specify the number of times a call  
rings at the owner’s extension before it is sent to the covering extension.  
Use VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover (#310) to redirect the  
extension’s calls on owned lines to the voice messaging system.  
Use VMS Cover Rings (#117) to specify the number of times a call rings at  
the owner’s extension before it is sent to the voice messaging system.  
Users with Call Coverage or VMS Cover turned on can Send All Calls  
immediately to their covering extension or their voice mailbox by activating  
Do Not Disturb.  
Considerations  
Only one owner can be assigned to a specific line. However, multiple lines  
can be owned by the same extension.  
This feature provides an alternative method of routing outside calls to the  
voice messaging system for Call Answer Service.  
This feature has no effect on the CO Line Ownership procedure in  
PARTNER MAIL, PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC  
Card.  
Valid Entries  
System line number  
System extension number  
No lines owned by an extension ✔  
5-136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Line Coverage Extension (#208)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Line Coverage setting for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 2 0 8 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the desired line number. For example, to program line 12, press 1  
2.  
3. Enter the number of the extension to be assigned ownership of the line.  
4. At this point:  
To delete the current setting, press r.  
To program another line, press n or p until the line  
number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Line Ringing  
Description  
This Telephone Programming procedure determines how each outside line or pool  
assigned to an extension rings. A line or pool can ring immediately, ring with a  
20-second delay, or not ring at all. Delayed Ring is useful for backup coverage on  
shared lines or pools, such as for secretaries who cover each other’s lines. No  
Ring is useful for all extensions except 10 when a receptionist answers all calls, or  
for phones with no regular users, such as those in conference rooms.  
Related Features  
To copy the Line Ringing settings (as well as other system settings) to other  
extensions, you can use Copy Settings (#399).  
Users automatically receive Caller ID information for calls that audibly alert  
at the extension:  
— For lines or pools set to Immediate Ring, Caller ID information is  
displayed after the first ring.  
— For lines or pools set to Delayed Ring, Caller ID information is  
displayed as soon as the call begins audibly alerting.  
— For lines or pools set to No Ring, no Caller ID information is  
displayed.  
If the phone is idle, users can press the line button to see the Caller ID  
information.  
If the phone is in use, users can press a button programmed with Caller ID  
Inspect to see the information.  
Considerations  
Program this feature from extension 10 or 11 only, using Centralized  
Telephone Programming. Individual users cannot program this feature.  
System phone users see the light patterns for the lines assigned to their  
extensions even if Line Ringing is set to Delayed Ring or No Ring. Light  
patterns do not appear for incoming calls on pool buttons that are set to No  
Ring.  
If a line at an extension is set to No Ring, a user at that extension has to  
manually select the line to answer a call.  
Valid Entries  
Immediate Ring Lines  
Delayed Ring  
No Ring Pools  
5-138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Ringing  
Examples  
Receptionist Call Routing. If you want calls to be answered by the  
receptionist first, set the lines at the receptionist’s extension to Immediate  
Ring and the lines at the users’ extensions to No Ring.  
Receptionist Backup. If you want all calls on a line or in a pool to ring  
directly at users’ extensions—with the receptionist providing backup—set  
the line or pool at the users’ extensions to Immediate Ring. Then set the  
line on the receptionist’s extension to Delayed Ring. An incoming call that is  
not answered by a user within 20 seconds also rings at the receptionist’s  
extension.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the way outside lines or pools ring at an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Line Ringing.  
The green lights next to the line or pool buttons show the current Line  
Ringing settings for all lines or pools assigned to the extension. (If a line or  
pool is not assigned to a button, the green light next to that button is off.)  
The following ringing options can be shown by the green light next to the  
line or pool button:  
Immediate Ring — on steady  
Delayed Ring — flashes slowly  
No Ring — flutters quickly  
3. To change Line Ringing on any line or pool, press the line or pool button  
until the button light shows the correct setting (the setting for the currently  
selected line or pool also appears on the display).  
4. Continue programming or exit programming mode.  
5-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
Making Calls  
Description  
A user can make a call by dialing an outside phone number or an extension  
number. There are also several ways to speed dial a number—see “Related  
Features” below.  
Hybrid Mode Only  
Making calls in Hybrid mode is the same as in Key mode except users can  
select a pool button rather than a line button to access an outside line.  
When a user presses a pool button, the system automatically selects an  
idle line belonging to the pool.  
To access a line in a pool that is not assigned to that extension or to access  
a line in a pool that the user is already using, system phone users can  
press i and dial the pool access code. If all lines in a pool are busy,  
the user hears busy tone.  
Automatic Line Selection can be programmed to change the way the  
system selects pools when a user lifts the handset to make a call.  
To restrict an extension’s access to all lines assigned to a pool, use Pool  
Access Restriction (#315). If users are not allowed outgoing access to a  
pool, they hear a reorder tone after dialing the pool access code at the  
intercom dial tone.  
Related Features  
You can store an outside number, an intercom number, or a feature code on  
a button, so a user can dial the number with a single touch. For information  
about programming and using Auto Dial buttons, see Auto Dialing.  
You can program outside numbers for one extension or for the entire  
system, so a user can dial a number by pressing f (or # on a  
standard phone) plus a two- or three-digit code (80–99 for Personal Speed  
Dial numbers, 600–699 for System Speed Dial numbers). For more  
If a user lifts the handset before pressing a line or pool button, the system  
automatically selects the first available outside line or pool, or the intercom.  
The order in which the system makes the selection is determined by the  
Automatic Line Selection for the extension.  
On either a system phone or a standard phone, users also can use Direct  
Line Pickup—Idle Line to access a line for making an outside call.  
Users can ring or page any of four Calling Groups. For more information,  
5-140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Making Calls  
Users can ring any of the seven Hunt Groups or voice signal Hunt Groups  
1–6. For more information, see Group Hunting—Ring/Voice Signal.  
If Station Lock is used at an extension, users cannot dial outside numbers  
except marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers on the  
Emergency Phone Number List (#406).  
If dialing restrictions are programmed for an extension, the system may  
prevent a user at that extension from placing certain calls. For example, a  
user may not be allowed to dial 900 numbers from the extension. (Or an  
extension may be programmed to take incoming calls only, so the user  
cannot dial out at all.) The following features provide dialing restrictions:  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404), Line Access Restriction  
(#302) Pool Access Restriction (#315), and Outgoing Call Restriction  
(#401).  
The following features can be used to override dialing restrictions: Allowed  
Phone Number Lists (#407), Emergency Phone Number List (#406),  
marked System Speed Dial Numbers, and System Password (#403).  
Users can signal, then speak to, system phone users who are already  
active on a call to alert them of important business matters, provided Voice  
Interrupt On Busy (#312) is Assigned for the recipient.  
Considerations  
The following instructions assume that system phones are set (using Automatic  
Line Selection) to automatically select outside lines first, and standard phones are  
set to select intercom first. This means that when a user with a system phone lifts  
the handset, the user hears outside dial tone (if an outside line is available); but  
when a user with a standard phone lifts the handset, the user hears intercom dial  
tone.  
How to Make an Outside Call  
System Phone  
1. Lift the handset or press S.  
The green light next to a line or pool button is on steady and you hear the  
outside dial tone.  
2. Dial the phone number.  
On a system display phone, the dialed number appears on the display.  
If you are using a PBX or Centrex line, you also may need to use a dial-out  
code (usually 9) before you dial a number outside the system.  
To make an outside call on a specific line:  
1. Press the idle line button (red and green lights are both off) or dial  
i8 plus the two-digit line number.  
2. If desired, lift the handset.  
5-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
3. Dial the phone number.  
To make an outside call using a specific pool:  
1. Press the idle pool button (red and green lights are both off) or dial i  
plus the three-digit pool access code (880, 881, 882, or 883).  
2. If desired, lift the handset.  
3. Dial the phone number.  
To reserve a busy line or pool so your phone beeps when the line or pool becomes  
free—this is useful when you share a line, such as a WATS line, with other people:  
1. Press the busy line or pool button (red light is on steady) without lifting the  
handset or pressing S.  
2. When the line is free and your phone beeps, lift the handset and dial the  
number. (If more than one person reserves a line, all their phones beep  
when the line is free. The first person to pick up the phone after the beep  
gets the line, and the other reservations are canceled.)  
Standard Phone  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 9 to get an outside line.  
You hear outside line dial tone.  
3. Dial the phone number. (If you are using a PBX or Centrex line, you also  
may need to use a dial-out code (usually 9) before you dial a number  
outside the PBX or Centrex system.)  
To make an outside call on a specific line:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial 8 plus the two-digit line number.  
3. Dial the phone number.  
To make an outside call using a specific pool:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial the three-digit pool access code (880, 881, 882, or 883).  
3. Dial the phone number.  
How to Make an Intercom Call  
An intercom call, or inside call, is a call between two extensions without using an  
outside line. There are two ways you can signal the extension you are calling: by  
ringing or by voice.  
5-142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Making Calls  
System Phone  
You can lift the handset or press S before dialing, then:  
1. Press an idle i button (red and green lights are both off).  
You hear intercom dial tone, and the green light next to the i button  
is on steady.  
2. To ring the extension, dial the two-digit extension number.  
To voice-signal a system phone at the extension, press * plus the  
two-digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses:  
If you hear one beep, you have reached an idle system phone. You  
can speak after the beep.  
Your voice is heard through the other extension’s speaker. If the  
recipient is present, he or she can reply.  
If you hear two beeps, you have reached a busy system phone with  
Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned. You can speak after the beeps.  
Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking  
probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your  
voice.Be brief and discreet in your interruption.  
If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button, wait  
for a response.  
If you hear ringing, you have reached an idle standard, TransTalk  
9000-series phone, or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On  
Busy Not Assigned. Your call is not completed until someone  
answers.  
Standard Phone  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. To ring the extension, dial the two-digit extension number.  
To voice-signal a system phone at the extension, press * plus the  
two-digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses:  
If you hear one beep, you have reached an idle system phone. You  
can speak after the beep.  
Your voice is heard through the other extension’s speaker. If the  
recipient is present, he or she can reply.  
If you hear two beeps, you have reached a busy system phone with  
Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned. You can speak after the beeps.  
Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking  
probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your  
voice. Be brief and discreet in your interruption.  
If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button, wait  
for a response.  
5-143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
If you hear ringing, you have reached an idle standard, TransTalk  
9000-series phone, or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On  
Busy Not Assigned. Your call is not completed until someone  
answers.  
5-144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Signaling (F13XX or F13*XX)  
Manual Signaling (F13XX or F13*XX)  
Description  
This feature is only available on system phones.  
This feature lets you program a button on your PARTNER or PARTNER Endeavor  
phone that you can use to signal a predetermined co-worker’s extension. It  
typically is used by a receptionist to alert a user when the user is busy on another  
call. You can use a Manual Signaling button to beep, ring, or voice signal the user  
at the target extension.  
Related Features  
Voice Interrupt on Busy (#312) is an alternative feature that lets a user  
signal, then speak to, a user who is active on a call.  
You can use the Manual Signaling button instead of dialing the two-digit  
extension number required for these features: Call Coverage, Call  
Forwarding/Call Follow-Me, Message Light On, Message Light Off,  
Station Lock, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.  
To transfer a call to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling  
button, press & before pressing the Manual Signaling button. See  
Considerations  
A PARTNER or PARTNER Endeavor phone is required at both extensions  
to use this feature.  
You must program the Manual Signaling feature code and the target  
extension number on a button. Use a button with lights if you want to view  
the status of the target extension, similar to an Auto Dial button.  
You can have only one button per extension—either on the system phone  
or on the Intercom Autodialer—for a target extension. The button can be  
programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button. The  
lights next to the button show calling activity—see Lights for more  
information.  
If you signal an extension that has an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button  
programmed for your extension, the green light next to that button flutters to  
identify your extension as the signaling extension.  
You can signal the target extension while you are on an outside call. (This  
does not initiate a one-touch transfer.)  
A Manual Signaling button does not initiate an intercom call unless you lift  
the handset or press S, press i, and then press the Manual  
Signaling button.  
5-145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
To respond to a signal, the target extension must place an intercom call to  
the person signaling.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Manual Signaling button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 1 3.  
5. Dial the two-digit extension number of the target extension. For example, to  
identify extension 22 as the target extension, press 2 2. (Enter * before  
the extension number if you want to use the button for voice signaling.)  
6. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
To beep the target extension:  
1. While the handset is in the cradle, press the programmed button.  
The extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed.  
To ring or voice signal the target extension:  
1. Lift the handset or press S.  
2. Press i.  
3. Press the programmed button.  
To transfer a call to the target extension:  
1. While active on the call, press &.  
2. Press the programmed button.  
5-146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message Light Off (F10XX)  
Message Light Off (F10XX)  
Description  
This feature turns off the message light at a specified extension (where XX is a  
system extension number).  
Related Features  
For instructions for turning on the message light, see Message Light On  
Considerations  
This feature turns off the message light on system phones and standard  
phones that have message lights. (See Standard Telephones for a list of  
standard phones with message lights.)  
For message-waiting capability, standard phones with LED-compatible  
message-waiting lights must be connected to the PARTNER Endeavor 62  
processor or 362EC expansion module.  
Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice  
messaging system. The voice messaging system automatically turns off  
the message light at a subscriber’s extension when messages in the  
mailbox have been deleted.  
If a message light is inadvertently turned off at an extension that has a  
message in the mailbox, the message light is refreshed during the voice  
messaging system’s daily maintenance (3 a.m.).  
If you use the Message Light On feature to signal someone at a doorphone  
extension, you must use this feature to turn the light off.  
You can program a Message Light Off button on a system phone to turn the  
message light off at a specific extension with one touch.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Message Light Off button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 1 0.  
5-147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
5. Optionally, dial the two-digit extension number of your most common  
destination, or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the  
button.  
6. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
To turn off the message light:  
1. Press the programmed button or press f 1 0.  
If you programmed the destination extension number on the button, the  
message light for the destination extension goes off. Skip Step 2.  
2. If no extension number was programmed on the button, dial the extension  
number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off, or use an  
Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button.  
Standard Phone  
To turn off the message light:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press# 1 0.  
3. Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to  
turn off.  
5-148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message Light On (F09XX)  
Message Light On (F09XX)  
Description  
This feature turns on the message light at a specified extension (where XX is a  
system extension number).  
Related Features  
For instructions on turning off the message light, see Message Light Off  
You may be able to use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone  
Considerations  
This feature turns on the message light on system phones and standard  
phones that have message lights. (See Standard Telephones for a list of  
standard phones that have message lights.)  
For message-waiting capability, standard phones with LED-compatible  
message-waiting lights must be connected to the PARTNER Endeavor 362  
processor or 362EC expansion module.  
On a standard phone, the message light flashes (only when the phone is  
idle) to indicate that the extension has received a message. Standard  
phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of the  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module. However,  
standard phones will ring only when plugged into the Tip Ring ports, which  
are the bottom two ports.  
Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice  
messaging system. The voice messaging system automatically turns on  
the message light at a subscriber’s extension when a message is left in the  
mailbox.  
If you use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension, you  
must use Message Light Off to turn the light off.  
You can program a Message Light On button on a system phone to turn the  
message light on at a specific extension with one touch.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Message Light On button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
5-149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 0 9.  
5. Optionally, dial the two-digit extension number of your most common  
destination, or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the  
button.  
6. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
To turn on the message light:  
1. Press the programmed button or press f 0 9.  
If you programmed the destination extension number on the button, the  
message light for the destination extension goes on. Skip Step 2.  
2. If no extension number was programmed on the button, dial the extension  
number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on, or use an  
Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button.  
Standard Phone  
To turn on the message light:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear the intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 0 9.  
3. Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to  
turn on.  
5-150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music-On-Hold (#602)  
Music-On-Hold (#602)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates the Music-On-Hold  
jack on the processor module. The jack must be active and an audio source must  
be connected to the jack in order to provide recorded music or messages to  
callers on hold.  
Related Features  
You can adjust the volume of Music-On-Hold using Music-On-Hold  
Volume (#614).  
If Ring on Transfer (#119) is Not Active and Music-On-Hold is Active,  
transferred callers hear music-on-hold until the call is answered.  
If Music-On-Hold is Active, users with system phones with speakers can  
play Background Music through their phones’ speakers.  
If Automatic System Answer is on, callers hear music-on-hold while  
waiting for someone to answer the call.  
If Direct Extension Dial is on, callers hear ringing when the call is  
transferred regardless of the settings for Music-On-Hold (#602) and Ring  
on Transfer (#119).  
If the receptionist at extension 10 uses the Wake Up Service Button  
(#115) to schedule wake up calls, the recipients hear Music-On-Hold when  
they answer their wake up calls.  
Considerations  
If Music-On-Hold is Not Active or if no audio source is connected, callers on  
hold hear silence.  
The audio source must be connected to the control unit using an RCA  
phono plug. The Music-On-Hold input jack accepts a maximum input of 2  
Volts at 50 Kohms. For more information, see the PARTNER Endeavor  
Communications System Installation guide.  
If the audio source develops trouble (such as a bad tape), you can quickly  
turn it off by changing the Music-On-Hold setting to Not Active until you are  
able to solve the problem.  
The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance  
under United States Copyright law. Accordingly, in order for the  
performance of that music to be lawful, it must be licensed annually to the  
user by the copyright owners or their representatives.  
The Magic-On-Hold system, available from Lucent Technologies, includes  
the required license for the first year. This license must be renewed  
annually.  
5-151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Valid Entries  
1 = Active ✔  
2 = Not Active  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the setting of the Music-On-Hold jack:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 6 0 2 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. To activate or deactivate the Music-On-Hold jack, press D until the  
appropriate value displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Music-On-Hold Volume (#614)  
Music-On-Hold Volume (#614)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure allows you to select one of seven volume  
settings for the external music source provided through the Music-On-Hold jack on  
the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module. This setting is system-wide.  
Related Features  
Music-On-Hold (#602) activates or deactivates the Music-On-Hold jack on the  
processor module.  
Considerations  
Changes to the Music-On-Hold Volume setting will have immediate effect on all  
calls currently receiving Music-On-Hold treatment.  
Valid Entries  
+
+
+
+  
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+
+
Note: 1 = lowest volume, 10 = highest volume  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Music-On-Hold Volume setting:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 6 1 4 at extension  
10 or 11.  
The display shows the current setting.  
2. To change the setting, press the number of the setting on the dialpad, or  
press D or d until the correct setting is displayed.  
3. If you want to return the volume to the default setting, press r.  
5-153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Night Service Button (#503)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at  
extension 10 to be used to turn Night Service on and off. When Night Service is  
on, all lines and pools assigned to the phones of the users in the Night Service  
Group ring immediately, regardless of their normal Line Ringing settings.  
Night Service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours. For  
example, although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly  
during the day, you want them to answer incoming calls after hours.  
Related Features  
Night Service affects only the extensions identified using Night Service  
Group Extensions (#504).  
If you program a System Password (#403), the password must be entered  
when turning Night Service on or off. In addition, when Night Service is on,  
users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency  
Phone Number List (#406) and marked System Speed Dial Numbers  
without entering the System Password. Night Service with a System  
Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours.  
If you have a voice messaging system, VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)  
determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group (always,  
day only, or night only). The status of the Night Service button at extension  
10 tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode.  
The Night Service button returns to the status (on/off) it was in immediately  
prior to a power failure or to System Reset (#728) being used.  
Considerations  
A Night Service button must be programmed on the system phone at  
extension 10.  
Night Service must be programmed on a button with lights. This feature  
does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights.  
A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after-hours outside call  
only if it comes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user’s phone.  
Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can  
vary from one extension to another.  
Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain  
the same as during normal daytime operation.  
If you reassign the Night Service button, it is removed from the button  
where it was previously assigned.  
5-154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Night Service Button (#503)  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to next available button at extension 10  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
3 = Select Button (then press a programmable button to assign Night  
Service to that button)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Night Service Button at extension 10:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 5 0 3 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At this point:  
If you want to assign Night Service to the first available button, press  
D until the following appears on the display:  
Night Service  
1 Assigned-Ext10  
If you want to remove the Night Service button assignment, press  
D until the following appears on the display:  
Night Service  
2 Not Assigned  
If you want to assign Night Service to a specific button, press 3.  
The following appears on the display:  
Night Service  
3 Select Button  
Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Night  
Service to that button.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
4. Label the Night Service button at extension 10.  
Using  
To turn Night Service on:  
1. Press the Night Service button at extension 10.  
If a System Password is programmed, the green light next to the  
button flashes; you must continue with Step 2.  
If no System Password is programmed, the green light is on steady  
and Night Service is on.  
5-155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Reference  
2. Enter the password.  
The green light is on steady. Night Service is on.  
To turn Night Service off:  
1. Press the Night Service button at extension 10.  
If a System Password is programmed, the green light next to the  
button flashes; you must continue with Step 2.  
If no System Password is programmed, the green light goes out and  
Night Service is off.  
2. Enter the password.  
The green light goes out. Night Service is off.  
5-156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Night Service Group Extensions (#504)  
Night Service Group Extensions (#504)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure assigns extensions to the Night Service  
Group. When Night Service is on and a call comes in, all extensions in the Night  
Service Group ring immediately, regardless of normal Line Ringing settings. Any  
extensions that would normally ring during the day, will also ring.  
Related Features  
You must use Night Service Button (#503) to program the button that is  
used to turn Night Service on and off.  
If you program a System Password (#403), when Night Service is on,  
users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency  
Phone Number List (#406) and marked System Speed Dial Numbers  
without entering the System Password.  
If you have a voice messaging system, lines that are assigned to the user’s  
phones in the Night Service Group are covered by the voice messaging  
system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay (#506) and VMS Hunt  
Schedule (#507).  
Considerations  
Do not include extensions connected to certain auxiliary equipment (auto  
attendants, voice messaging systems, internal or external hotline phones,  
or doorphones) in the Night Service Group.  
A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after-hours outside call  
only if it comes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user’s phone.  
Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can  
vary from one extension to another.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to group  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 5 0 4 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 13, press 1 3.  
3. To assign or unassign the extension, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To assign or unassign another extension, press n or p until  
the extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Number of Lines (#104)  
Description  
This feature should be used only for initial system setup.  
This System Programming procedure determines in Key mode the number of  
outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions; in Hybrid  
mode, it determines the number of lines assigned to the main pool. (This number  
does not have to match the actual number of lines connected at the control unit.)  
This feature should be used only for initial system setup.  
Related Features  
In Hybrid mode, do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after  
initial setup, because it changes Pool Line Assignment (#207), Pool Extension  
Assignment (#314), Pool Access Restriction (#315), Automatic Line  
Selection, and Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings.  
Additionally, it changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction  
(#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line Ringing for individual lines back to  
factory settings. To change pool assignments without affecting other settings, use  
Pool Line Assignment (#207) and Pool Extension Assignment (#314).  
In Key mode, do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after initial  
setup, because it changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction  
(#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line Ringing for existing lines back to  
factory settings. To change line assignments without affecting other settings, use  
Line Assignment (#301).  
Considerations  
You can use this feature to tell the system how many lines are actually  
connected at the control unit. For example, if some line jacks do not have  
lines connected, use this procedure to indicate the number of jacks that  
actually have lines connected; otherwise the line numbers associated with  
empty jacks would be assigned to phones as though there were actually  
lines connected.  
You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that are  
automatically assigned to all extensions. For example, if there are ten lines  
connected to the control unit, you can use this procedure to set the number  
of lines to eight, so that only the first eight lines are assigned to all system  
extensions. You can then use Line Assignment (#301) to assign lines 9  
and 10 to specific extensions.  
Valid Entries  
3 lines for the PARTNER Endeavor processor module and 362EC module.✔  
5-158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Number of Lines (#104)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign lines to the system at initial system setup:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 0 4 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter two digits for the number of outside lines in the system that you want  
to assign to all extensions or the main pool. For example, dialing 0 6  
means that all extensions are assigned lines 1 through 6 or lines 1 through  
6 are assigned to the main pool.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies the types of outgoing calls that  
can be made on all lines at an extension. See Dialing Restrictions and  
Permissions for a summary of calling restrictions.  
Related Features  
This restriction also applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct  
Line Pickup—Idle Line.  
To override this feature, users can dial marked System Speed Dial  
Numbers and numbers from an Allowed Phone Number List (#407) and  
the Emergency Phone Number List (#406). Also, if a System Password  
(#403) is defined.  
You can program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used  
to quickly change an extension’s Outgoing Call Restriction setting. See  
You can use Line Access Restriction (#302) to restrict extensions from  
making or receiving calls on specific lines, Pool Access Restriction  
(#315) to restrict extensions from making or receiving calls on all lines  
belonging to a specific pool, and Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404)  
to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial.  
If Star Code Dial Delay (#410) is active, the system checks for allowed and  
disallowed phone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star  
code.  
Considerations  
While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective, absolute protection  
against misuse cannot be guaranteed. System phones give you more  
protection against such misuse than standard phones. Therefore, we  
strongly recommend that you install system phones where restricting  
phone use is important.  
If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial-out code  
(usually 9) is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system, the  
control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to  
Local Only. If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines, use Centrex  
restrictions instead.  
If you want to restrict the use of star code s, include them in the Disallowed  
Phone Number Lists.  
5-160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401)  
Valid Entries  
1 = No Restriction (can make toll, local, and intercom calls) ✔  
2 = Inside (intercom) Only  
3 = Local (intercom and local) Only  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To identify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an  
extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 1 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Extension: prompt, enter the number of the extension to be  
programmed. For example, to select extension 30, press 3 0.  
3. To change the type of call restriction, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button (#114)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at  
extension 10 to be used to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for  
an extension.  
This button is useful for quickly changing an extension’s restriction. For example,  
after a guest’s departure, a hotel manager can change the Outgoing Call  
Restriction setting of the room phone from No Restriction to Inside Only so  
outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out.  
Conversely, a receptionist can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of a  
conference room phone from Local Only (which prevents users from making long  
distance calls) to No Restriction so a client can dial long distance.  
Related Features  
Rather than using an Outgoing Call Restriction button, you can use  
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) to change an extension’s Outgoing Call  
Restriction setting through System Programming if you prefer.  
You must use an Auto Dial button with lights to designate the extension you  
want to change after you press the Outgoing Call Restriction button. It is  
recommended that you use an Auto Dial button on the PARTNER-CA48  
Intercom Autodialer. However, you can use an intercom Auto Dial button on  
the system phone at extension 10 provided the button has lights. For  
information about programming Auto Dial buttons, see Auto Dialing.  
Considerations  
An Outgoing Call Restriction button must be programmed on the system  
phone at extension 10.  
Outgoing Call Restriction must be programmed on a button with lights. This  
feature does not work if it is programmed on a button lights.  
The system considers extension 10 busy while you are using the Outgoing  
Call Restriction button, and the phone acts as if it is in System  
Programming mode. You cannot use other features or handle calls at  
extension 10 until you are through using the feature.  
You cannot use the Outgoing Call Restriction button to change an  
extension’s setting while extension 11 is in System Programming mode.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to next available button at extension 10  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
3 = Select button (then press a programmable button with lights to assign  
Outgoing Call Restriction to that button)  
5-162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Outgoing Call Restriction Button (#114)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program an Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 1 4 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At this point:  
If you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to the first available  
button, press D until the following appears on the display:  
CallRstr Button  
1 Assigned-Ext10  
If you want to remove the Outgoing Call Restriction button  
assignment, press D until the following appears on the  
display:  
CallRstr Button  
2 Not Assigned  
If you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to a specific button,  
press 3. The following appears on the display:  
CallRstr Button  
3 Select Button  
Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing  
Call Restriction to that button.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
4. Label the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10.  
Using  
To change an extension’s Outgoing Call Restriction setting:  
1. Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10.  
The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button turns on and  
extension 10 appears busy to the system.  
2. Press the Auto Dial button for the desired extension repeatedly until its  
lights show the correct setting as follows:  
No Restriction. The green light next to the Auto Dial button is on  
steady.  
Inside Only. The red light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady.  
Local Only. The green light next to the Auto Dial button flashes.  
5-163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
3. Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 or lift the  
handset and replace it back in the cradle.  
The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button goes off and  
extension 10 resumes normal operation.  
5-164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Outside Conference Denial (#109)  
Outside Conference Denial (#109)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure determines whether users can include more  
than one outside party in a conference call.  
Related Features  
For instructions on making conference calls, see Conference Calls.  
Use Conference Drop to drop the last outside party added to the  
conference.  
Considerations  
This feature setting applies to all system users.  
A conference call connects up to five parties (including the conference  
originator). If outside conference is allowed, you can have up to two outside  
parties and up to three inside parties. If outside conference is disallowed,  
you can have one outside party and up to four inside parties.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Allow conference calls with up to two outside parties ✔  
2 = Disallow conference calls with two outside parties  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To allow or disallow conferences with two outside parties:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 0 9 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. To allow or disallow two outside parties on a conference call, press  
D until the appropriate value displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Personal Speed Dial Numbers  
Description  
This Telephone Programming procedure lets you store up to 20 frequently-dialed  
numbers for each extension. Personal Speed Dial numbers can be dialed quickly  
by pressing f (or # at intercom dial tone on a standard phone) and the  
two-digit code from 80 through 99. The Personal Speed Dial numbers  
programmed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension.  
Related Features  
Personal speed dialing, which lets users dial a number by pressing three  
buttons, is different from Auto Dialing, which lets users dial a number by  
pressing a single button.  
For instructions on entering special characters (such as Pause) in a  
You can use System Speed Dial Numbers to create a list of up to 100  
frequently dialed numbers available to all system users.  
External Hotline (#311) uses Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the external  
hotline telephone number.  
A Personal Speed Dial number can begin with a star code; the system  
automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
setting.  
Considerations  
If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial-out code  
(usually 9) is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system,  
include the dial-out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the  
PBX or Centrex system.  
Personal Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed onto Auto Dial buttons.  
You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone, but the  
numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11.  
A combined total of 576 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial  
numbers can be programmed.  
Valid Entries  
Any phone number—up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0–9, *, #, and  
special dialing functions that you can access by pressing h (Pause),!  
(Stop), S (Recall), and & (Touch-Tone Enable)—assigned to codes 80  
through 99.  
No number assigned to any code ✔  
5-166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Personal Speed Dial Numbers  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program Personal Speed Dial numbers:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Select a two-digit code by pressing f and dialing two digits between  
80 and 99. For example, to select code 81, press f 8 1.  
If a number is assigned already to the code, the number appears on the  
display. If no number is assigned to the code, the display reads:  
Blank  
4. Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it.  
5. At this point:  
To program another Personal Speed Dial number, start from Step 3.  
To program over an existing number, enter the new number after  
selecting the two-digit code.  
To remove a Personal Speed Dial number, enter the number’s  
two-digit code and press! once.  
6. Continue programming or exit programming mode.  
Using  
System Phone  
You can lift the handset or press S before dialing:  
1. If you want to call on a specific line, press the line button (or press i  
8 and the two-digit line number) or if you want to call using a specific pool,  
press the pool button (or press i and the three-digit pool access  
code).  
2. Press f.  
3. Dial the two-digit Personal Speed Dial code (80–99).  
If you did not specify an outside line or pool, the system automatically  
selects one, turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle, and dials  
the number. The number being dialed shows on a display phone.  
5-167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Standard Phone  
You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone, but the numbers  
must be programmed from extension 10 or 11. To dial a programmed Personal  
Speed Dial number:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press #.  
3. Dial the two-digit Personal Speed Dial code (80–99).  
The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number.  
5-168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pickup Group Extensions (#501)  
Pickup Group Extensions (#501)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you assign extensions to a Pickup  
Group. When a call rings at an extension in a Pickup Group, a user at any other  
extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group  
code. The Pickup Group feature is useful when a user needs to answer calls on  
lines or pools not assigned to his or her phone. The system supports up to four  
Pickup Groups.  
Related Features  
For instructions on answering calls in a Pickup Group, see Group Pickup (I66G).  
Considerations  
An extension can be assigned to as many as four different Pickup Groups.  
Extensions where extra alerts (such as a loud bell) are installed can be  
assigned to a Pickup Group, to enable anyone who hears the alert to  
answer the call.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned to group  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign extensions to a Pickup Group:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 5 0 1 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At the Group: prompt, enter a group number (1–4). For example, to select  
group 1, press 1. The following appears on the display:  
Pickup-Group 1  
Extension:  
3. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
select extension 29, press 2 9.  
4. To assign or unassign the extension, press D until the appropriate  
value displays.  
5. At this point:  
To assign or unassign another extension, press n or p  
until the extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step  
4.  
To program another group, press N P and  
enter a new group number. Then repeat Steps 3 and 4.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Pool Access Restriction (#315)  
Description  
This procedure applies only to pooled extensions in Hybrid mode.  
This System Programming procedure restricts a pooled extension from receiving  
and/or making outside calls on all lines belonging to a specific pool. For example,  
you may want customer service representatives to make calls using the WATS  
lines that belong to auxiliary pool 881, but not receive incoming calls on the lines  
in that pool; in this case, you assign pool 881 to the customer service  
representative’s phones and restrict the pool to Out Only.  
Related Features  
This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing. For example, an  
extension set to In Only or No Access for a particular pool cannot select  
that pool to dial out—even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number  
List (#406). See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions for a summary of  
all dialing restrictions.  
When a user has access to a pool for outgoing calls, you can customize  
dialing restrictions for the user’s extension by using Outgoing Call  
Restriction (#401) and Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404).  
To restrict a pooled extension from receiving and/or making calls on  
individual lines, you must use Line Access Restriction (#302).  
You can use Pool Extension Assignment (#314) to assign pools to  
specific extensions.  
You can use Pool Line Assignment (#207) to assign lines to or remove  
lines from pools.  
Caller ID information does not display for ringing calls on lines belonging to  
a pool programmed for Out Only or for No Access.  
Considerations  
For extension 10 and any extensions for which Line Access Mode (#313) is set to  
Key, this procedure is automatically set to No Access.  
Valid Entries  
1 = No Restriction (calls permitted on all lines in that pool) ✔  
2 = Out Only (can only make outside calls, not receive them, on lines in that pool)  
3 = In Only (can only receive calls, not make them, on lines in that pool)  
4 = No Access (cannot receive or make calls, but can receive transferred calls on  
lines in that pool)  
5-170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Pool Access Restriction (#315)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To restrict an extension from making or receiving calls on all the lines in a specific  
pool:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 1 5.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 23, press 2 3. The following appears on the display:  
PoolRstrctXXPXXX  
Pool:  
3. Enter the pool number (880, 881, 882, or 883) to be restricted at this  
extension. For example, to restrict pool 881, press 8 8 1. The current  
restriction displays.  
4. To change the pool restriction for this extension, press D until the  
appropriate value displays—see Valid Entries” on the previous page.  
5. At this point:  
To restrict another pool at this extension, press n or p until the  
pool number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 4.  
To restrict another extension, press N or P and begin  
at Step 2.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Pool Extension Assignment (#314)  
Description  
This feature applies only to pooled extensions in Hybrid mode.  
This System Programming procedure identifies the pools that are assigned to  
buttons at a pooled extension. The system uses two buttons to represent the main  
pool (880) and one for each auxiliary pool (881, 882, 883). Up to five pool buttons  
can be assigned per extension.  
Related Features  
You should use Pool Line Assignment (#207) prior to this procedure to  
assign lines to or remove lines from pools.  
You can use Line Assignment (#301) to assign individual outside lines to  
buttons on a pooled extension.  
Users must have access to an outside line or pool in order to dial numbers  
on the Emergency Phone Number List (#406).  
You can use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the  
system selects lines or pools when the user at that extension lifts the  
handset or presses S to make a call. Note that auxiliary pools (881, 882,  
and 883) are not automatically added to an extension’s Automatic Line  
Selection.  
You can use Line Ringing to identify when each pool and individual line  
assigned to an extension should start ringing (the factory setting for pools  
is No Ring and for lines is Immediate Ring).  
If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all the lines in  
a pool, you must restrict the extension using Pool Access Restriction  
(#315).  
If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing an individual  
line, you must use Line Access Restriction (#302).  
Remove pools from Hotline (#603) and Doorphone (#604/#605)  
extensions, to prevent calls from being made or received on them.  
You can use Line Access Mode (#313) to change an extension from a  
pooled extension to a key extension.  
5-172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pool Extension Assignment (#314)  
Considerations  
You cannot assign pool buttons to extension 10 or to any key extension.  
The main pool buttons are always assigned to the two leftmost buttons on  
the bottom row of a system phone. You cannot use Select Button (Setting  
3) for the main pool (880) during Pool Extension Assignment programming.  
If you select Not Assigned (Setting 2) for the main pool (880) during Pool  
Extension Assignment programming, the main pool is removed from the  
two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of the system phone at that  
extension. The buttons are then available for programming lines, auxiliary  
pools, or system features. If the main pool is ever reassigned to that  
extension, previous programming will be erased.  
Auxiliary pool buttons will be located next to the main pool buttons unless  
you select Setting 3 to choose a button location when programming.  
You can assign up to four pools to a standard phone, but a single-line  
phone can make only one call at a time. To make a call, the user lifts the  
handset and dials 9; the system selects the first available pool based on  
the Automatic Line Selection programmed for that extension. Alternatively,  
the user can dial a pool access code to make a call using a specific pool.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned Main pool  
2 = Not Assigned Auxiliary pool  
3 = Select Button (auxiliary pools only), then press a button to assign the auxiliary  
pool to that button  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To assign pools to a pooled extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 1 4.  
2. Enter the system extension number to be programmed. For example, to  
program extension 15, press 1 5.  
There is a steady red light next to each button that has a line assigned and  
a flashing red light next to each button that has a pool assigned. To remove  
all existing pool assignments, press r before selecting a pool.  
3. Enter the desired pool access code (880, 881, 882, or 883). For example,  
to select pool 881, press 8 8 1.  
5-173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
4. At this point:  
If you want to assign the pool to the first available button with lights,  
press D until the following appears on the display:  
PoolAssign15P881  
1 Assigned  
If you want to remove a pool assignment, press D until the  
following appears on the display:  
PoolAssign15P881  
2 Not Assigned  
For auxiliary pools only, if you want to assign the pool to a specific  
button, press 3. The following appears on the display:  
PoolAssign15P881  
3 Select Button  
Then press a button with lights to assign the auxiliary pool to that button. If  
you use option 3 after an auxiliary pool has been assigned, the auxiliary  
pool moves from the old button to the new button you select.  
5. At this point:  
To assign another pool for this extension, press n or p  
until the pool access code shows on the display. Then repeat Step 4.  
To program another extension, press N P and  
begin at Step 2.  
6. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pool Line Assignment (#207)  
Pool Line Assignment (#207)  
Description  
This procedure applies only to systems configured for Hybrid mode.  
This System Programming procedure assigns lines to or removes lines from the  
main and auxiliary pools supported for Hybrid mode. You can change line  
assignments in the main pool (880) or in any of three auxiliary pools (881, 882, or  
883).  
Related Features  
You can use Pool Extension Assignment (#314) to assign pools created  
with this procedure to specific extensions.  
If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all lines in a  
specific pool, you must restrict the extension using Pool Access  
Restriction (#315).  
You can use Line Access Mode (#313) to change a pooled extension to a  
key extension.  
Considerations  
You can assign some or all outside lines to a specific pool, but you cannot  
assign a specific outside line to more than one pool.  
Because users cannot control which line they get when they access a pool,  
you should group lines with similar purposes (WATS lines, FX lines, lines  
designated for a particular set of users) together in a unique pool.  
If you have individual lines assigned to a pooled extension and you use this  
procedure to change pool line assignment, be careful not to press D  
or d to specify a pool assignment. If you do, the system will remove  
that line from all extensions that have the line assigned.  
Valid Entries  
1 = No Pool  
2 = Main Pool 880 all lines assigned  
3 = Pool 881  
4 = Pool 882  
5 = Pool 883  
5-175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the assignment of lines to pools:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 2 0 7.  
2. Enter the first line to be programmed. For example, to program line 8, press  
0 8. The following appears on the display:  
LinestoPools L08  
2 Pool 880  
3. Enter the desired value (1–5)—see “Valid Entries” on the previous  
page.  
4. To program another line, press n or p until the line number  
shows on the display. Then repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Privacy (F07)  
Privacy (F07)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones.  
This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn Privacy  
on and off, preventing or allowing other users to join calls at the user’s extension  
as needed.  
Related Procedures  
If Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) is Assigned for an extension, that  
extension normally is private. However, if a user sometimes needs to have  
co-workers join conversations, the user can program a Privacy button to  
turn Privacy on and off as needed. Once a Privacy button is programmed,  
the user must use the button to turn Privacy on and off even though  
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) is Assigned. Automatic Extension  
Privacy (#304) is appropriate for use with standard phones.  
Privacy applies to active calls—any user can retrieve a held call unless the  
call is placed on hold with Exclusive Hold.  
If you have Caller ID, you can use Privacy at your extension to prevent  
other users from joining your call and from accessing the Caller ID  
information displayed for active calls at your extension.  
Considerations  
Privacy must be programmed on a button with lights. (Users cannot dial the  
Privacy code manually, or use a programmed button without lights, to  
activate this feature.) When Privacy is on, the button light at the extension  
is also on, indicating that others cannot join calls.  
Privacy can be turned on and off at any time, even during a call.  
Users cannot join calls using pool buttons regardless of the Automatic  
Extension Privacy setting or the state of the Privacy Button.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Privacy button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button with lights.  
5-177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
4. Press f 0 7.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
From a system phone, press the programmed button to turn Privacy on; press it  
again to turn it off. Use the button like a switch—when the light is on, Privacy is on.  
5-178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recall (F03)  
Recall (F03)  
Description  
This feature causes the system to send a timed switchhook flash over the  
telephone line to “recall” a new dial tone or to access a PBX, central office, or  
Centrex feature, such as Call Waiting.  
Related Features  
If users have trouble with Recall, use Recall Timer Duration (#107) to  
adjust the length of the Recall signal. Your local phone company can tell  
you the correct setting—for most Centrex systems, the correct setting is  
800 msec. (or 32).  
You can press S to insert a Recall signal in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial  
number, provided it is the first character in the stored number. (For  
Considerations  
Using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call.  
Whenever your PBX or Centrex documentation tells you to press the  
switchhook when you are on an outside call, use the Recall feature instead.  
If you are already on a call, most PBX or Centrex systems require that you  
press the switchhook to get a new dial tone, then dial a feature access  
code to access a specific PBX or Centrex service.  
— On a system phone, press a programmed button or press f 0  
3 to use Recall.  
— On a standard phone, first press and release the switchhook to get  
intercom dial tone, then send a Recall signal by pressing # 0 3.  
— On a (standard) feature phone that has a Recall or Flash button, first  
press the Recall or Flash button to get intercom dial tone, then send  
a system Recall signal by pressing # 0 3.  
You can program a Recall button on a system phone to send a Recall  
signal with one touch.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Recall button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
5-179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 0 3.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
To access a PBX, central office, or Centrex feature (such as Call Waiting) while  
active on an outside line:  
System Phone  
1. Press the programmed button or press f 0 3.  
2. Enter the access code for the feature (if required).  
3. To return to your original call, press the programmed button or press f  
0 3 again.  
Standard Phone  
1. Press the switchhook (or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature  
phone that has one).  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 0 3.  
3. Enter the access code for the feature (if required).  
4. To return to your original call, press the switchhook (or press the Recall or  
Flash button on a feature phone) again.  
5-180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recall Timer Duration (#107)  
Recall Timer Duration (#107)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you change the length of the timed  
signal, or switchhook flash, generated by the system Recall feature (as well as by  
the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers). Recall sends this  
timed signal over the phone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which  
the system is connected. Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX,  
central office, or Centrex feature, such as Call Waiting. Your local phone company  
can tell you the correct setting—for most Centrex systems, the correct setting is  
800 msec (or 32).  
Considerations  
You should change the factory setting only under two conditions:  
If using the system Recall feature has no effect, lengthen the time.  
If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and Recall drops  
calls, shorten the time.  
Valid Entries  
01 through 80 (25 to 2000 msec in 25 msec increments)  
18 (450 msec) ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the duration of the Recall Timer signal:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 0 7 at extension  
10 or 11. The following appears on the display:  
Recall Timer  
18 450-msec  
2. Enter a different Recall Timer setting by pressing D or d. For  
example, to increase the Recall Timer setting to 750 msec., press d  
until the following appears on the display:  
Recall Timer  
30 750-msec  
Alternatively, you can enter the setting number directly. For example, to set  
the Recall timer to 750 msec., press 3 0.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
4. If you are using Recall to access PBX or Centrex features, test the new  
Recall Timer setting:  
If a call is disconnected, shorten the time.  
If the Recall signal has no effect, lengthen the time.  
5-181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Restore Programming (#125)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure enables you to reinstate your system and  
telephone programming (except the System Day, System Date, and System  
Time) to the settings saved on a PC Card at the last system backup (manual or  
automatic). This procedure is useful if your system settings become corrupted, if  
you make changes and decide you would rather use the former settings, or if you  
replace your processor module and want to retain the system settings you had on  
the previous processor module. A successful restore takes about five seconds.  
NOTE:  
When a restore completes successfully, the Restore Complete message  
displays for two seconds at idle extension 10 or 11, and then a System  
Reset—Programming Saved (#728) occurs, disconnecting any calls in  
progress. It is recommended that you warn users before beginning a restore,  
or do the restore during non-business hours.  
Related Features  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) automatically saves your  
programmed settings at regular intervals.  
Backup Programming—Manual (#124) is a manual procedure that you  
can perform at any time to back up your system and telephone  
programming settings.  
System Reset—Programming Saved (#728) automatically occurs  
following a successful restore. The reset disconnects any calls in progress.  
Considerations  
If the restore is not successful, the display shows Restore Failedfor  
two seconds. All calls that were in progress are disconnected and all of the  
system and telephone programming settings revert to the default settings.  
The PC Card in the PC Card slot must be a PARTNER Backup/Restore PC  
Card, which can be purchased from Lucent Technologies.  
Valid Entries  
1 = MAN. mmddyy (where mmddyy = the month, day, and year)  
2 = AUTO. mmddyy  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
5-182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Restore Programming (#125)  
To initiate a restore:  
1. If you have a Backup/Restore PC Card installed, skip to Step 2. If you do  
not have a PC Card installed, refer to the PARTNER PC Card Installation  
Instructions.  
2. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 2 5 at extension  
10 or 11.  
The top line of the display shows Sys Set Restore.  
If no PC Card is present in the PARTNER Endeavor processor module, the  
error message Insert Card is displayed. Install a new PC Card using  
the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions. Then repeat this  
procedure from Step 2. You must power down the system before  
removing or inserting a Backup/Restore PC Card.  
You are prompted to choose the backup file you want to use for the restore.  
The bottom line of the display shows 1 MAN.mmddyy, where mmddyy  
represents the date of the manual backup on this card.  
3. To change to the file created by an automatic backup, press 2.  
The bottom line of the display shows 2 AUTO.mmddyy,where mmddyy  
represents the date of the automatic backup on this card.  
NOTE:  
If the date of the file (AUTO. mmddyy or MAN. mmddyy) indicates  
that this is not the file you intended to use, refer to the PARTNER PC  
Card Installation Instructions on how to install the Backup/Restore PC  
Card.  
If the Backup/Restore PC Card is fresh from the factory, and no  
backups have been recorded on it yet, the filenames will be  
MAN.****** and AUTO.******, respectively. You cannot use  
these files for a restore; they will generate the error message Empty  
File after you press e in Step 4.  
4. Press e to start the restore.  
If the system detects an error before beginning the restore, the bottom line  
of the display shows an error message. (See Chapter 6,  
‘‘Troubleshooting,’’ for more information about these messages.)  
If the system does not detect an error, the restore begins.  
If the restore is not successful, the display shows Restore Failedfor  
two seconds. All calls that were in progress are disconnected and all of the  
system and telephone programming settings revert to the default settings.  
You are no longer in System Programming mode. Try the restore again.  
5-183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Ring on Transfer (#119)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure lets you specify what callers hear while they  
are being transferred. If Ring on Transfer is set to Active, callers hear ringing as  
they are being transferred; if it is set to Not Active, callers hear silence unless  
Music-On-Hold is activated and an audio source is connected to the system. If this  
is the case, callers hear music while the call is being transferred to the destination  
extension. Once there, callers hear ringing until the call is answered or it is sent to  
the voice messaging system.  
Related Features  
If you have an audio source connected to the system, set Music-On-Hold  
(#602) to Active and Ring on Transfer to Not Active, so callers hear music  
as they are being transferred to the destination extension.  
This procedure has no effect on Direct Extension Dial or Call Park.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Active ✔  
2 = Not Active  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change Ring on Transfer:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 1 9 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Press D until the appropriate value displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Rotary Dialing Timeout (#108)  
Rotary Dialing Timeout (#108)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure changes the length of the Rotary Dialing  
Timeout. You may need to change the length of the timeout if you have any rotary  
lines and you are having trouble calling out on standard touch-tone phones. For  
example, if users dial slowly and calls are not completed or are connected to  
wrong numbers, lengthen the timeout.  
Related Features  
Use this procedure only if the Dial Mode (#201) for at least one outside line in the  
system is set to rotary.  
Considerations  
Do not change this setting unless the system is experiencing problems.  
Valid Entries  
1 = 4 seconds  
2 = 8 seconds ✔  
3 = 12 seconds  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 0 8 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Press D until the appropriate value displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Save Number Redial (F04)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones.  
This feature saves into temporary memory the last outside number (up to 28  
digits) dialed from an extension with a system phone. Users can use this feature  
to save a number before they hang up on a busy or unanswered call. Once saved,  
the number can be redialed at any time. The number stays in memory until a  
different one is saved.  
Related Features  
Unlike Last Number Redial, this feature lets the user make other calls  
before redialing the saved number.  
System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be saved using this feature.  
A Save Number Redial number can begin with a star code; the system  
automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
setting.  
Considerations  
This feature redials all digits dialed on the outside call for which the feature  
was used.  
You can program a Save Number Redial button on a system phone to  
access the feature with one touch. If you do, you can press the button to  
save the number and press the button later to redial the number.  
You can program this feature on more than one button to save more than  
one number.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 0 4.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Save Number Redial (F04)  
Using  
To save a number, from a system phone:  
1. Press the programmed button,  
–or–  
Press f 0 4 after dialing the number, but before hanging up.  
To redial a stored number:  
1. Press the programmed button again,  
–or–  
Press f 0 4 again.  
5-187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Send All Calls  
Description  
You can use the Call Coverage or VMS Cover with Do Not Disturb buttons to send  
intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on owned lines immediately to  
your voice mailbox.  
Related Features  
If Call Coverage is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring,  
you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls  
immediately to the covering extension. This allows callers to receive  
coverage without waiting for the number of rings specified with Call  
Coverage Rings (#116).  
If VMS Cover is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring,  
you can turn on Do Not Disturb to immediately send that call and  
subsequent calls to your voice mailbox. This allows callers to leave a  
message without waiting for the number of rings specified with VMS Cover  
Rings (#117).  
If Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on, you can turn on Do Not  
Disturb to send that coverage call and all subsequent calls immediately to  
the covering extension. If there is no answer at the covering extension, the  
calls go to your voice mailbox after the number of rings specified with VMS  
Cover Rings (#117).  
Use Line Coverage Extension (#208) to identify an extension as the  
owner of a specific outside line.  
Using  
To send a covered call immediately to the covering extension:  
If Call Coverage is not turned on, while the call is ringing, press the Call  
Coverage button.  
The ringing call is sent immediately to the covering extension; subsequent  
calls go to the covering extension after the specified number of Call  
Coverage Rings.  
If Call Coverage is turned on, press the Do Not Disturb button.  
All Covered calls are sent immediately to the covering extension until you  
turn off Do Not Disturb.  
To send a call immediately to the voice messaging system:  
If VMS Cover is not turned on, while the call is ringing, press the VMS  
Cover button.  
The ringing call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox; subsequent calls  
go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings.  
5-188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Send All Calls  
If VMS Cover is already turned on, press the Do Not Disturb button.  
All covered calls are sent immediately to the voice messaging system until  
you turn off Do Not Disturb.  
To send covered calls immediately to coverage when Call Coverage and VMS  
Cover are both on, press Do Not Disturb.  
All calls go to the covering extension. If there is no answer, the calls go to your  
voice mailbox.  
5-189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Special Dialing Functions  
Description  
This feature lets you add special characters for System Speed Dial numbers,  
Personal Speed Dial numbers, and Auto Dial numbers, as follows:  
Function  
Button  
Display  
Description  
Pause  
P
Inserts a 1.5-second pause in the dialing  
sequence to wait for a response, such  
as a dial tone or computer voice  
message.  
h
Recall  
R
Sends a timed switchhook flash needed  
to alert the system on the other end  
(such as a PBX or Centrex system), and  
to use some local telephone company  
custom calling features (such as Call  
Waiting). Use Recall only as the first  
entry in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial  
number.  
S
Stop  
S
Stops the dialing sequence until the  
Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number  
is used again (for example, so the user  
can enter additional digits, such as a  
credit card number or password). To  
continue, press the Auto Dial button or  
f and the two- or three-digit Speed  
Dial code. (Stop cannot be programmed  
from a TransTalk 9000-series phone,  
since it has no! button.)  
!
Touch-Tone  
Enable  
T
Sends touch tones over a rotary line, to  
electronic equipment such as answering  
machines and bank computers.  
&
Considerations  
Special characters cannot be used when dialing a number manually.  
Examples  
Pause: To call an answering machine at 555-0529, wait 4.5 seconds, then  
dial 321 to retrieve messages, enter 5 5 5 0 5 2 9 h h  
h 3 2 1.  
Recall/Centrex Feature Button: The following entry shows how to  
program an Auto Dial button with a Centrex feature that you use while on a  
call, for which the feature access code is *32. This example includes a  
Recall signal to send a switchhook flash to the Centrex system when you  
5-190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Special Dialing Functions  
are already on a call. (You can store a Recall signal by pressing S, but  
only if it is the first character stored.) It also includes a 1.5-second pause  
(which you insert by pressing h) to allow time to get a new Centrex dial  
tone: S h * 3 2.  
Stop: Your local bank-by-phone service requires that you enter a password  
before the account number. To program a Personal Speed Dial number or  
an Auto Dial button to call the bank at 555-7898, include a stop for  
manually entering the password, and continue with the account number  
(679 88), enter 5 5 5 7 8 9 8! 6 7 9 8 8.  
Touch-Tone Enable: Your system is connected to rotary lines but you want  
to call an answering machine at 555-3454 to retrieve messages. Since the  
machine requires touch tones, enter 5 5 5 3 4 5 4 &. All  
digits pressed during the rest of the call are sent as touch tones.  
On/Off Centrex Feature Button: To include both the activation and  
deactivation codes for a Centrex feature on the same button, press!  
to include a stop between the two codes. For instance, if the code to  
activate a Centrex feature is *30 and the code to deactivate the feature is  
*31, store * 3 0! * 3 1 on the Auto Dial button.  
The first time you press the Auto Dial button, only the number before the  
stop is dialed (to activate the feature). When you press the button again,  
the rest of the stored number is dialed (to deactivate the feature).  
Number Outside a PBX or Centrex System: To store a number that dials  
out of a PBX or Centrex system, include a dial-out code in the Speed Dial  
number. This entry, to dial the number 201 555-4321, includes a dial-out  
code, a 1.5-second pause, and a toll call prefix of 1 for direct dialing (which  
may not be required for your dialing area):  
9 h 1 2 0 1 5 5 5 4 3 2 1.  
5-191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
Description  
Central Offices of some phone companies support the use of star codes before  
the dialed phone number to obtain special services; for example, in some areas,  
you can dial *67 to prevent Caller ID information from being sent to the called  
party. (Rotary phones use 11 in place of the *.) Star Code Dial Delay (#410) is  
designed to help prevent misdialing when star codes are used. For information  
about the star codes that your Central Office supports, contact your local phone  
company.  
Restriction Resetting  
If Star Code Dial Delay is Not Active, the system uses the normal processing of  
restricted numbers: it checks, digit by digit, to see whether the number is  
restricted. If the first digit dialed is a * and is not restricted, the call goes through  
without further checking, since it can no longer match any number on the list.  
If Star Code Dial Delay is Active, the system permits star codes that meet the  
Bellcore® standard:  
2-digit codes, where the first digit is 0, 1, or 4–9 and the second digit is 0–9  
(for example *67, *70).  
3-digit codes, where the first digit is 2 or 3, the second digit is 0–9, and the  
third digit is 0–9 (for example *210).  
Therefore, when Star Code Dial Delay is Active, the system resets dialing  
restrictions after leading star codes. The system checks the first two digits dialed.  
If the first digit is a * or the first two digits are 11, the system then checks whether  
the following two or three digits are a star code. The digits that follow the star code  
are then compared again to the restrictions. More than one star code can be  
dialed at the beginning of a dialing sequence; the system’s number restrictions will  
still work properly, with restriction-checking resetting as often as necessary. For  
example, *67*705552539 could be dialed to block Caller ID information and to turn  
off Call Waiting; the system would still check to see whether the 555-2539 number  
is restricted.  
Second Dial Tone  
After a star code is dialed, some Central Offices respond by providing a second  
dial tone as a prompt for the caller to enter more digits. Usually the second dial  
tone is provided immediately, but if the tone is delayed, the caller should wait for  
the dial tone before continuing to dial. The system may not recognize the numbers  
dialed before the second dial tone, which may cause the call to be misrouted.  
You can use the Star Code Dial Delay setting to force a delay in Auto Dialed calls  
after the star code, so that the system waits to dial the rest of the digits until the  
second dial tone begins. You can program an automatic pause of 0 to 5 seconds  
after each star code that is autodialed, whether from a touch-tone or a rotary  
phone.  
5-192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
Related Features  
You can include star codes in Allowed Phone Number Lists and  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists.  
Star Code Dial Delay settings apply to Auto Dialing, Last Number Redial,  
Personal Speed Dial Numbers, Save Number Redial, and System  
Speed Dial Numbers.  
If Dial Mode (#201) is set to Rotary, star codes are entered by dialing 11  
instead of *. If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call  
Restriction (#401) set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the  
Dial Mode (#201) set to Rotary, you should add “11” to an Allowed Phone  
Numbers List (#407) and assign the list to these extensions. Otherwise,  
when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code, the  
system interprets this as an attempt to place a long-distance call, the call is  
blocked, and the user hears the reorder tone.  
System Speed Dial Numbers can begin with a star code; the system  
automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
setting. To program, enter a Pause followed by the star code and the phone  
number. For example, press h*675551001.  
A marked System Speed Dial number can also begin with a star code. To  
enter it, press * followed by the star code and the phone number. For  
example, press **675551001.  
Considerations  
The Star Code Dial Delay is not inserted in manually dialed numbers.  
If your Central Office provides the second dial tone immediately, you do not  
need the delay provided by Star Code Dial Delay. In this case, choose the 0  
setting to enable restriction checking but avoid the delay.  
Valid Entries  
0 = 0 Seconds Delay ✔  
1 = 1 Second Delay  
2 = 2 Seconds Delay  
3 = 3 Seconds Delay  
4 = 4 Seconds Delay  
5 = 5 Seconds Delay  
6 = Not Active  
5-193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Star Code Dial Delay setting:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 1 0 at extension  
10 or 11.  
The current setting is displayed.  
2. Press the number on the dialpad for the setting you want (see “Valid  
Entries,” above), or press D or d until the correct setting is  
displayed.  
3. To return to the default setting, press r.  
4. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Station Lock (F21)  
Station Lock (F21)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system and standard touch-tone phones.  
This feature lets users enter a four-digit code on their telephone dialpad to “lock”  
their extension. Later, the user enters the identical code to unlock the extension.  
Station Lock helps to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from  
these extensions. You should recommend that users lock their extensions  
whenever they leave their desks for extended periods of time.  
Related Features  
All outside numbers except marked System Speed Dial Numbers and  
numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List (#406) are restricted  
from locked extensions.  
If a user forgets the code, use Station Unlock to unlock the extension.  
Do not lock External Hotline extensions.  
Station Lock returns to the status (on/off) it was in before a power failure  
occurred or System Reset (#728) was used.  
Considerations  
You can program a Station Lock button on a system phone. A button with  
lights is recommended, so the user can quickly determine whether or not  
the extension is locked.  
Users can enter a different code each time they lock their extension.  
A user at a locked extension can make intercom calls and can receive  
intercom and outside calls.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Station Lock button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 2 1.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Using  
System Phone  
You can lock an extension when the phone is idle or while active on an intercom or  
outside call using the handset or speakerphone.  
1. Press the Station Lock button or press f 2 1.  
On a programmed button with lights, the green light flashes.  
2. Enter a four-digit code using digits 0–9.  
3. Re-enter the four-digit code.  
If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code entered in Step 2, the  
extension is locked. On a button with lights, the green light changes to on  
steady. On a display phone, the display shows ****.  
If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code entered in Step 2,  
the extension remains unlocked. On a button with lights, the green light  
turns off. Repeat the locking procedure on the previous page.  
To unlock a locked extension:  
1. Press the Station Lock button or press f 2 1.  
On a programmed button with lights, the green light flashes.  
2. Enter the four-digit code that you used to lock the extension.  
If the code entered in Step 2 matches the code used to lock the extension,  
the extension is unlocked. On a button with lights, the green light turns off.  
If the code entered in Step 2 does not match the code used to lock the  
extension, the extension remains locked. On a button with lights, the green  
light remains on steady. Repeat the unlocking procedure above.  
Standard Phone  
To lock a standard touch-tone phone:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 2 1.  
You hear intercom dial tone again.  
3. Enter a four-digit code using digits 0–9.  
You hear intercom dial tone again.  
4. Re-enter the four-digit code.  
If the code entered in Step 4 matches the code entered in Step 3, you hear  
silence. The extension is locked.  
If the code entered in Step 4 does not match the code entered in Step 3,  
you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains unlocked. Repeat the  
locking procedure above.  
5-196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Station Lock (F21)  
To unlock a standard touch-tone phone:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 2 1.  
You hear intercom dial tone again.  
3. Enter the four-digit code that you used to lock the extension.  
If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code used to lock the extension,  
you hear silence and the extension is unlocked.  
If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code used to lock the  
extension, you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains locked.  
Repeat the unlocking procedure above.  
5-197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Station Unlock (F22)  
Description  
This feature is available only at extensions 10 and 11.  
This feature lets you unlock a specific user’s locked extension. Use this feature  
when a user forgets the code he or she used to lock the extension.  
Related Features  
Use Station Lock to lock and unlock from an extension.  
Considerations  
It is recommended that you do not program this feature on a button.  
Using  
System Phone  
From extension 10 or 11 only:  
1. Press f 2 2.  
2. Dial the extension number or use an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button  
for the extension that you want to unlock.  
The extension is unlocked. If that extension used a Station Lock button with  
lights to activate the feature, the green light goes off.  
Standard Phone  
From extension 10 or 11 only:  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear the intercom dial tone.  
2. Press # 2 2.  
3. Dial the number of the extension that you want to unlock.  
The extension is unlocked.  
5-198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Date (#101)  
System Date (#101)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure sets the month, day, and year. The system  
displays only the month and day on display phones when the phone is idle.  
Related Features  
The System Date is used to date-stamp the backup files when you use  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and Backup Programming—  
Manual (#124).  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) uses the System Date to  
schedule the automatic backups.  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and Backup Programming—  
Manual (#124) do not backup the System Date.  
Restore Programming (#125) does not restore the System Date.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the System Date:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 0 1 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter today’s date in the form mmddyy (month, day, and year), including  
leading zeros for single-digit months or days. For example, to enter April  
26, 1997, press 0 4 2 6 9 7. The following appears on the display:  
System Date  
Data 042697  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
System Day (#102)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure sets the day of the week that appears on  
system display phones.  
Related Features  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and Backup Programming—  
Manual (#124) do not backup up the System Day.  
Restore Programming (#125) does not restore the System Day.  
Considerations  
Be sure that the System Day is set correctly before using backup or restore  
procedures.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Sun ✔  
2 = Mon  
3 = Tue  
4 = Wed  
5 = Thu  
6 = Fri  
7 = Sat  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the System Day:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 0 2 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Change the day by entering a new setting number as listed in “Valid  
Entries” above. For example, to set the day to Tuesday, press D until  
the display reads:  
System Day  
3 Tue  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Password (#403)  
System Password (#403)  
Description  
This feature is available only on PARTNER and PARTNER Endeavor phones.  
This System Programming procedure defines a four-digit password that users can  
enter from the phones to override dialing restrictions (if the extension has access  
to an outside line).  
Related Features  
The password overrides all dialing restrictions except Line Access  
Restriction (#302) and Pool Access Restriction (#315).  
Once a password is programmed, you must enter it to turn Night Service on  
and off. Additionally, if Night Service is on, users in the Night Service  
Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls (except calls to  
numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List (#406) and marked  
System Speed Dial Numbers). Dialing restrictions for extensions not in  
the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime  
operation.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a System Password:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 3 at extension  
10 or 11. The following appears on the display:  
Set Password  
Data - - - -  
2. Enter a four-digit password or press r to delete the existing  
password.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
Using  
1. Before lifting the handset or turning on the speaker, press h.  
2. Enter the password.  
The System Password does not appear on display phones.  
3. Press an outside line button (or press i 8 and a two-digit line  
number) or a pool button (or press i and a three-digit access code)  
and lift the handset.  
4. Dial the number.  
The password is in effect until you hang up the phone.  
5-201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
System Release Status (F59)  
Description  
When calling for customer support, you need to know the release level of your  
system. This feature enables you to determine that information at any system  
display phone.  
The following appears on the display:  
PECS-S-R1.0  
PECS-L-R1.0  
For a 2-slot system  
For a 5-slot system  
Using  
To use this feature, press f 5 9 at any system display phone. The system  
release message replaces the default information on the top line of the telephone  
display for 15 seconds.  
5-202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Reset—Programming Saved (#728)  
System Reset—Programming Saved  
(#728)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure resets the system while retaining the  
currently programmed settings. Reset the system only when advised to do so by  
technical support personnel.  
Related Features  
After a power failure or system reset:  
Automatic System Answer Button (#111), Direct Extension Dial  
Button (#113), Night Service Button (#503) and Station Lock return to  
the status (on or off) that they were in immediately prior to the power failure  
or system reset.  
The VMS Cover button and Privacy button return to the status (on or off)  
determined by the programmed setting of Automatic VMS Cover (#310)  
and Automatic Extension Privacy (#304), respectively. For example, If  
Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned and the Privacy button is on when  
a system reset occurs, the Privacy button will be on again after the system  
reset. However, if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned and the  
Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs, the Privacy button will be  
off after the system reset.  
All other active features at an extension are reset to the default settings.  
For example, if an extension has calls forwarded to another extension,  
resetting the system turns off Call Forwarding (if the feature is  
programmed on a button with lights, the reset also turns off the light for the  
Call Forwarding button).  
A successful use of Restore Programming (#125) causes a System  
Reset—Programming Saved (#728) to occur.  
The information stored in the Save Number Redial (F04) and the Last  
Number Redial (F05) buffers is lost when a System Reset—Programming  
Saved (#728) occurs.  
Considerations  
Resetting the system disconnects all active calls.  
This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures  
when cycling. To use this procedure, enter the code directly.  
The system reset begins immediately and takes only a few seconds.  
You cannot interrupt the reset process or use any telephones in the system  
during the reset process.  
5-203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
All of the system and telephone programming settings that were in effect  
before the power failure or down period are retained (except those  
mentioned in the “Related Features” section above); they do not revert to  
the default settings.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To reset the system, press f 0 0 s s # 7 2 8  
at extension 10 or 11. The following appears on the display:  
Reset-Save All  
When the reset is completed, the system is no longer in Programming Mode and  
the date and time appear on the display.  
5-204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Speed Dial Numbers  
System Speed Dial Numbers  
Description  
This feature lets you program a list of up to 100 frequently-dialed numbers for the  
system. Anyone on the system can dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing  
f (or # at intercom dial tone on a standard phone) and the three-digit code  
from 600 through 699. You can mark System Speed Dial numbers to override  
dialing restrictions.  
Related Features  
System Speed Dialing, which lets users dial a number by pressing four  
buttons, is different from Auto Dialing, which lets users dial a number by  
pressing a single button.  
For instructions on entering special characters (such as Pause) in a  
Individuals can have up to 20 additional Personal Speed Dial Numbers for  
use on their own phones.  
A System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code; the system  
automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
setting. To program, enter a Pause followed by the star code and the phone  
number. (For example, press h*675551001.)  
Considerations  
To program System Speed Dial numbers that override dialing restrictions,  
mark them by entering a star * before the phone number.  
A marked System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code. To enter  
it, press * followed by the star code and the phone number. (For example,  
press **675551001.)  
System Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed on Auto Dial buttons.  
System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed only from extension 10  
or 11, but can be used from any extension.  
Refer to a completed System Speed Dial form for the list of numbers to be  
programmed. After programming the numbers, distribute a copy of the  
completed form to users. See Appendix C for a blank form.  
If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial-out code  
(usually 9) is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system,  
include the dial-out code and one or more pauses (if available) in Speed  
Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system.  
5-205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
If you program 911 or other emergency numbers as Speed Dial numbers  
and want to place test calls, you should: 1) perform such activities in the  
off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening and 2) remain on the  
line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before  
hanging up.  
You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the  
course of a single call.  
Valid Entries  
Any phone number—up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0–9, *, #, and  
special dialing functions that you can access by pressing h (Pause),!  
(Stop), S (Recall), and & (Touch-Tone Enable)—assigned to codes 600  
through 699  
No number assigned to any code ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program System Speed Dial numbers:  
1. Press f 0 0 at extension 10 or 11. the following appears on the  
display:  
PROGRAM EXT 10  
2. Select a three-digit code by pressing f and dialing three digits  
between 600 and 699. For example, to select code 600, press f 6  
0 0.  
If a number is assigned already to the code, the number appears on the  
display. If no number is assigned to the code, the display reads:  
Blank  
3. Enter the number. For example, to program 555-4757, press 5 5 5 4  
7 5 7. The following display appears:  
5554757  
To mark the System Speed Dial number to override dialing restrictions,  
precede the number by a *. For example, to mark the number 555-1001,  
press * 5 5 5 1 0 0 1. The following display appears:  
*5551001  
At this point:  
To program another System Speed Dial number, start from Step 2.  
To program over an existing number, enter the new number after  
selecting the three-digit code.  
To remove a System Speed Dial number, enter the number’s  
three-digit code and press! once.  
4. Press f 0 0 to exit programming mode.  
5-206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Speed Dial Numbers  
Using  
System Phone  
You can lift the handset or press S before dialing:  
1. If you want to call on a specific line, press the line button (or press i  
8 and the two-digit line number).If you want to call on a line in a specific  
pool at a pooled extension, press the pool button (or press i and dial  
the three digit pool access code 880, 881,882, or 883).  
2. Press f.  
3. Dial the three-digit System Speed Dial code (600–699).  
If you did not specify an outside line or pool, the system automatically  
selects one, turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle, and dials  
the number. The number being dialed shows on a display phone unless it is  
a marked System Speed Dial number.  
Standard Phone  
1. Lift the handset.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Press #.  
3. Dial the three-digit System Speed Dial code (600–699).  
The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number.  
5-207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
System Time (#103)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure sets the time that appears on system  
display phones.  
Related Features  
schedule the automatic backups.  
Manual (#124) do not backup the System Time.  
Restore Programming (#125) does not restore the System Time.  
Considerations  
Be sure that the System Time is set correctly before using backup or  
restore procedures.  
Enter the time in 24-hour notation. In this scheme, the hours of the day are  
0000 (12 midnight) to 2359 (11:59 p.m.). Since each time must have four  
digits, use leading zeros when necessary. For example, to set the time to  
9:00 a.m., enter 0 9 0 0. For 4:45 p.m., enter 1 6 4 5.  
The time appears on system display phones as a.m. or p.m. (not in 24-hour  
notation).  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the System Time:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 03 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter a new time in 24-hour notation. For example, to set the time to 2:15  
p.m., press 1 4 1 5 The following appears on the display:  
System Time  
Data 1415  
This time appears on system display phones as 2:15 p.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Toll Call Prefix (#402)  
Toll Call Prefix (#402)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure indicates whether users must dial a 0 or 1  
before the area code to make a long-distance call, or just the area code and  
number. This feature should be set to reflect the dialing patterns of your local  
telephone company.  
Related Features  
This procedure affects the operation of dialing restrictions and permissions. For  
Valid Entries  
1 = 0 or 1 required before Area Code and Number ✔  
2 = Area Code and Number Only  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Toll Call Prefix setting:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 4 0 2 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Press D until the appropriate value displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Touch-Tone Enable (F08)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones.  
This feature lets a system phone user send touch-tone signals on an outside call  
over a rotary line. For example, a user may need to dial touch-tone digits while on  
a call to a bank-by-phone service.  
Related Procedures  
You must use Dial Mode (#201) to identify rotary lines to the system.  
To activate this feature from within a number stored on an Auto Dial button  
or as part of a Speed Dial number, press & when storing the number—  
Considerations  
This feature is needed only when dialing on a rotary line.  
Use Touch-Tone Enable only after a call is connected. For example, use  
this feature after dialing a bank-by-phone service that requires you to dial  
touch-tone digits.  
You can program a Touch-Tone Enable button on a system phone to turn on  
Touch-Tone Enable with one touch.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Touch-Tone Enable button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 0 8.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
5-210  
From a system phone, press the programmed button or press f 0 8 when  
you need to enter touch-tone digits. Touch-Tone Enable stays in effect until you  
hang up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transfer Return Extension (#306)  
Transfer Return Extension (#306)  
Description  
By default, transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not  
answered. This System Programming procedure can be used to identify a  
different return extension for the extension that transfers a call.  
Related Features  
You can use Transfer Return Rings (#105) to define the number of times  
all system extensions should ring with transferred calls before they return to  
their transfer return extensions.  
The transfer return extension for any extensions associated with auto  
attendant or voice messaging system hardware should be extension 10 (or  
another extension with a person who can assist the caller). AA Extensions  
(#607) is used to identify the extensions associated with auto attendant  
hardware and Hunt Group Extensions (#505) is used to identify the  
extensions associated with voice messaging system hardware.  
If an extension has VMS Cover active, unanswered calls to that extension  
are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return  
extension.  
For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with Call  
Coverage: if the covering extension does not answer within the specified  
number of Call Coverage Rings (#116), the call rings the specified  
number of Transfer Return Rings (#105) before it transfer returns. If the  
covering extension has Do Not Disturb active, the call rings one more time  
after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings (#116) before it transfer  
returns.  
Considerations  
An unanswered transferred call returns to the transfer return extension  
identified for the extension transferring the call, not the extension receiving  
the call.  
Do not designate an extension associated with auto attendant or voice  
messaging system hardware as the transfer return extension for any user  
extension.  
Transfer return calls do not receive call coverage or voice mail coverage.  
Valid Entries  
Extension transferring call ✔  
Any extension other than the one transferring the call  
5-211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Transfer Return Extension for a specific extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 0 6 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Dial the number of the originating extension.  
3. Dial the number of the extension to which the call should return if it is not  
answered.  
4. To program another extension, press n or p until the  
extension number shows on the display. Repeat Step 3.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transfer Return Rings (#105)  
Transfer Return Rings (#105)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure, which applies to all system extensions,  
defines the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the transfer  
return extension.  
Related Features  
By default, transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are  
not answered. You can use Transfer Return Extension (#306) to specify a  
different return extension for the extension that transfers a call.  
If you program Hunt Group Extensions (#505), make sure this setting is  
four or more rings. This setting allows the call to continue hunting to other  
group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it  
rings.  
If an extension has VMS Cover active, unanswered calls to that extension  
are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return  
extension.  
For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with Call  
Coverage: if the covering extension does not answer within the specified  
number of Call Coverage Rings (#116), the call rings the specified  
number of Transfer Return Rings (#105) before it transfer returns. If the  
covering extension has Do Not Disturb active, the call rings one more time  
after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings (#116) before it transfer  
returns.  
Considerations  
If you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the  
system, set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of  
rings at which these devices answer. Doing so prevents a call transferred to  
a fax or answering machine from returning before it is answered.  
The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred  
call (to determine when it goes to the transfer return extension if it is not  
answered) until the transfer originator hangs up.  
Valid Entries  
0–9 (0 rings = no return)  
4 ✔  
5-213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the number of times a transferred call rings before returning to the  
transfer return extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 0 5 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter a setting (0–9). For example, to set a Transfer Return of 5 rings,  
press D until the following appears on the display:  
Transfer Return  
5 Rings  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transferring Calls  
Transferring Calls  
Description  
This section explains how to transfer calls using the & button on a system  
phone or the switchhook on a standard phone. Transferring a call lets users “pass”  
a call from one extension to another. Users can transfer both outside calls and  
intercom calls to other extensions.  
Related Features  
To transfer calls to an extension with a single touch, you can program the  
extension number on an Auto Dial button—see Auto Dialing.  
To transfer calls to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling  
button, press & before pressing the Manual Signaling button.  
While a call is being transferred, the caller hears ringing if Ring on  
Transfer (#119) is Active. If it is Not Active and Music-On-Hold (#602) is  
Active and an audio source is connected to the system, the caller hears  
music-on-hold while the call is being transferred to the destination  
extension. If Music-On-Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer (#119) is  
Not Active, the caller hears silence.  
The system is factory-set to return a transferred call, after it rings four times  
at the destination extension, to the extension that transferred it. You can  
use Transfer Return Rings (#105) to change the number of rings for all  
system extensions. You can use Transfer Return Extension (#306) to  
program a different extension to which unanswered calls from a particular  
extension should return.  
If users transfer a call, Caller ID information (if it is available) is passed to  
the destination extension.  
If you have a voice messaging system, you can use Voice Mailbox  
Transfer to transfer a caller directly to a subscriber’s voice mailbox.  
An extension programmed with Call Waiting (#316) cannot transfer either  
of two active calls.  
Considerations  
When you press &, the call is put on hold and its associated green  
light winks.  
A transferred call appears on the destination extension’s intercom button  
unless the destination extension has a line button for the line on which the  
call was received.  
When a call you transferred is answered, if you began the call on an  
individual line, the red light goes on next to the line button goes on; if you  
began the call on a line in a pool, the call no longer appears on your phone.  
5-215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
If you transfer a call to an extension for which you have an Auto Dial button  
and the call is unanswered, the green light next to the Auto Dial button  
flutters when the call returns to your extension.  
Calls can be transferred to Calling Groups and Hunt Groups. Hunt Group  
calls do not Transfer Return if the call is not answered and if Transfer  
Return Rings (#105) is set to 4 or more rings.  
When you transfer a call from a display phone, the number to which you are  
transferring the call briefly appears on the display. If a transferred call is  
unanswered, the number of the extension that is returning the transferred  
call also appears on display phones.  
If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system, the PBX or  
Centrex system may include a call transfer feature that lets you transfer a  
call to another Centrex extension, so that the line on which the call came in  
is free to place and receive other calls. However, to use Centrex transfer,  
you must be able to dial the extension directly using the Centrex extension  
number; if a Centrex line is shared by several extensions, you cannot use  
Centrex transfer to direct the call to a specific extension. For more  
information about such features, see the documentation for your PBX or  
Centrex system. (When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to  
use a switchhook flash, use the system Recall feature instead.)  
On a system phone, a transferred call rings with an intercom ring (ring  
BEEP) until the originator hangs up, then it changes to a transfer ring (ring  
BEEP BEEP). On a standard phone, a transferred call rings with an  
intercom ring s) until the originator hangs up, then it changes to a transfer  
ring (ring ring ring).  
How to Transfer a Call  
System Phone  
To pass a call to another extension:  
1. While active on the call, press &.  
The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone. The green  
light next to the line or pool button winks.  
2. Dial the extension number (or 7 7 and a Hunt Group number or  
7 and a Calling Group number) to which you want the call  
transferred.  
3. When someone answers, announce the call, then hang up.  
If no one answers or the call is refused, press the line or pool button  
next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller.  
If you do not wish to announce the call, hang up as soon as you hear  
ringing (after Step 2 above). If no one answers, the call rings back at your  
extension (unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for  
your extension)—lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller.  
5-216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transferring Calls  
To make a voice-signaled transfer to a system phone, in Step 2 of the  
procedure on the previous page, press * plus the two-digit extension  
number. Then listen for one of the following responses:  
— If you hear one beep, you have reached an idle system phone. You  
can speak after the beep.  
Your voice is heard through the other extension’s speaker. If no one  
answers or the call is refused, press the line or pool button next to  
the winking green light to reconnect to the caller. If the call is  
accepted, hang up.  
— If you hear two beeps, you have reached a busy system phone with  
Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned. You can speak after the beeps.  
Your voice is heard through the recipient’s handset or speaker. Be  
aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably  
also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice. Be  
brief and discreet in your interruption. If the recipient has a Voice  
Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button, wait for a response. If the call is  
accepted, hang up to complete the transfer. The call rings at the  
recipient’s extension. If the call is refused, press the line or pool  
button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller.  
— If you hear ringing, you have reached a standard phone, an idle  
TransTalk 9000-series phone, or a busy system phone with Voice  
Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned.  
When someone answers, announce the call, then hang up. If no one  
answers or the call is refused, press the line or pool button next to  
the winking green light to reconnect to the caller.  
To transfer a call with one button touch:  
While on a call, press the Auto Dial button programmed for the extension,  
or the Hunt Group or Calling Group button for the group, to which you want  
to transfer the call. (There is no need to press & or n; this takes  
the place of Steps 1 and 2 in the procedure on the previous page.)  
For an extension that has a system phone, you can program * plus the  
extension number on the Auto Dial button, so you can announce the calls  
when you transfer them.  
5-217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature Reference  
Standard Phone  
To pass a call to another extension:  
1. While on a call, press the switchhook down once rapidly.  
You hear intercom dial tone.  
2. Dial the extension number (or 7 7 and a Hunt Group number or  
7 and a Calling Group number) to which you want the call  
transferred.  
3. When someone answers, announce the call, then hang up.  
If no one answers or the call is refused, press the switchhook again  
to reconnect to the caller.  
If you do not wish to announce the call, hang up as soon as you hear  
ringing (after Step 2 above). If no one answers, the call rings back at your  
extension (unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for  
your extension)—lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller.  
To make a voice-signaled transfer to a system phone, in Step 2 above  
press * plus the two-digit extension number. Then listen for one of the  
following responses:  
— If you hear one beep, you have reached an idle system phone. You  
can speak after the beep.  
Your voice is heard through the other extension’s speaker. If no one  
answers or the call is refused, press the switchhook again to  
reconnect to the caller. If the call is accepted, hang up.  
— If you hear two beeps, you have reached a busy system phone with  
Voice interrupt On Busy Assigned. You can speak after the beeps.  
Your voice is heard through the recipient’s handset or speaker. Be  
aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably  
also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice. Be  
brief and discreet in your interruption. If the recipient has a Voice  
Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button, wait for a response. If the call is  
accepted, hang up to complete the transfer. The call rings at the  
recipient’s extension. If the call is refused, press the switchhook  
again to reconnect to the caller.  
— If you hear ringing, you have reached a standard phone, an idle  
TransTalk 9000-series phone, or a busy system phone with Voice  
Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned.  
When someone answers, announce the call, then hang up. If no one  
answers or the call is refused, press the switchhook again to  
reconnect to the caller.  
5-218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VMS Cover (F15)  
VMS Cover (F15)  
Description  
This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system. It is  
available only on system phones.  
This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn VMS  
Cover on and off, routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for their  
extension to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the  
specified number of rings (factory setting is three rings).  
Related Features  
If Automatic VMS Cover (#310) is Assigned to an extension, that  
extension normally is covered by the voice messaging system. For greater  
flexibility, the user can use this feature to program a VMS Cover button to  
turn coverage on and off as needed. Once a VMS Cover button is  
programmed, the user must use the button to turn VMS Cover on and off  
even though Automatic VMS Cover (#310) is Assigned.  
VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with  
Line Coverage Extension (#208).  
Use VMS Cover Rings (#117) to change the number of times intercom  
and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at  
extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system.  
A user can turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing to send that call  
immediately to his or her voice mailbox. See Send All Calls.  
Users with VMS Cover already turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to  
Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox.  
If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Coverage active, calls ring at the  
covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings  
(#116). If the covering extension does not answer, the call is routed to the  
voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the  
specified number of VMS cover rings.  
If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active, calls ring at  
the call forwarding destination extension; they are not covered by the voice  
messaging system.  
Considerations  
This feature must be programmed on a button with lights.  
This feature does not apply to coverage calls, forwarded calls, group calls,  
parked calls, transfer-return calls, Voice Interrupt on Busy calls, or  
voice-signaled calls.  
5-219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature Reference  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a VMS Cover button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button with lights.  
4. Press f 1 5.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
Using  
From a system phone, press the programmed button to turn VMS Cover on; press  
it again to turn it off. Use the button like a switch—when the light is on, VMS Cover  
is on and your unanswered intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines  
assigned ownership go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS  
Cover Rings.  
If you turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing, the call is sent immediately to your  
voice mailbox.  
If VMS Cover is already on and a call begins to ring, you can turn on Do Not  
Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice  
mailbox.  
5-220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VMS Cover Rings (#117)  
VMS Cover Rings (#117)  
Description  
This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system.  
This System Programming procedure, which applies to all system extensions  
programmed for VMS Cover, defines the number of times a call rings before it is  
sent to a user’s voice mailbox.  
Related Features  
VMS Cover also applies to lines that have been designated an owner with  
Line Coverage Extension (#208).  
If an extension has VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover (#310) active,  
unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging  
system after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings.  
Valid Entries  
1–9  
3 ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging  
system:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 1 7 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter a setting (1–9). For example, to set VMS Cover Rings to 4, press  
D or d until the following appears on the display:  
VMS Cover  
4 Rings  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
VMS Hunt Delay (#506)  
Description  
This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system.  
This System Programming procedure determines when outside calls should be  
answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system.  
You can set the system for either immediate call handling (after the second ring) or  
delayed call handling (after the fourth ring). Delayed call handling gives the  
receptionist an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the Automated  
Attendant Service.  
Related Features  
You must use Group Call Distribution (#206) to assign lines to Hunt  
Group 7.  
You must use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to assign the extensions  
associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Immediate ✔  
2 = Delayed  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system’s  
Automated Attendant service:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 5 0 6 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Press D until the appropriate value displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)  
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)  
Description Voice mail  
This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system.  
This System Programming procedure determines whether the outside lines  
assigned to Hunt Group 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time, only  
during Day operation (Night Service is off), or only during Night operation (Night  
Service is on). This feature affects only the Automated Attendant Service of the  
voice messaging system.  
Related Features  
You must use Group Call Distribution (#206) to assign lines to Hunt  
Group 7.  
You must use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to assign the extensions  
associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7.  
If you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for Day Only or Night Only, you must use  
Night Service Button (#503) to program a Night Service button for  
extension 10.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Always ✔  
2 = Day Only  
3 = Night Only  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system’s  
Automated Attendant Service:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 5 0 7 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Press D until the appropriate value displays.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
5-223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature Reference  
Voice Interrupt on Busy (#312)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones.  
This System Programming procedure identifies extensions that can receive voice  
interrupt on busy calls. A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that  
lets a user (the originator) interrupt and speak to another user (the recipient) who  
is busy on an intercom or outside call with one other party. When voice interrupt on  
busy is initiated, the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator’s  
voice. The originator and the recipient should be aware that the third party to whom  
the recipient is speaking probably will hear both the beeps and the faint sound of  
the originator’s voice. This feature typically is used by the receptionist to alert the  
boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call.  
Related Features  
Making Calls and Transferring Calls provide more instructions for making  
and transferring voice interrupt on busy calls.  
The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back button to  
respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call. The recipient’s  
response will not be heard by the third party.  
Users cannot receive voice interrupt on busy calls if:  
Do Not Disturb is active at their extension.  
— They are part of a joined call (Joining Calls).  
— They are part of a Conference Call.  
Considerations  
The voice interrupt on busy tone (two beeps) is unique to distinguish it from  
a voice-signaled intercom call tone (one beep).  
If a voice interrupt on busy call is made to an idle extension, the originator  
and the recipient hear a voice-signaled intercom call tone (one beep)  
instead.  
If you receive a voice interrupt on busy call and press h, the third party  
is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have  
ended the voice interrupt on busy call. At this point:  
To talk to the originator, if the green light next to the i button is  
flashing, press i. (You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy  
Talk-Back button once a voice interrupt on busy call has ended.)  
To resume your conversation with the third party, press the line or  
pool button next to the winking green light.  
5-224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Voice Interrupt on Busy (#312)  
Any party involved in a voice interrupt on busy call cannot be involved in a  
second voice interrupt on busy call until the first is finished.  
Valid Entries  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✔  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To change the Voice Interrupt On Busy setting for an extension:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 3 1 2 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. To assign or unassign Voice Interrupt On Busy, press D until the  
appropriate value displays.  
4. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
Using  
To initiate a voice interrupt on busy call:  
1. From a system phone, press i.  
2. Press * plus a two-digit extension number (or use an Auto Dial button).  
3. Listen for one of the following responses:  
If you hear one beep, you have reached an idle system phone. You  
can speak after the beep.  
Your voice is heard through the other extension’s speaker. If the  
recipient is present, he or she can reply.  
If you hear two beeps, you have reached a busy system phone with  
Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned. You can speak after the beeps.  
Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking  
probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your  
voice.  
If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back button, wait  
for a response. If you hear a second set of beeps, the recipient has  
ended the voice interrupt on busy call. In either case, hang up to end  
your part of the voice interrupt on busy call.  
If you hear ringing, you have reached a standard phone, an idle  
TransTalk 9000-series phone, or a system phone that is idle, has Do  
Not Disturb turned off, and has Voice Interrupt On Busy Not  
Assigned. Your call is not completed until someone answers.  
5-225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F18)  
Description  
This feature is available only on system phones.  
This feature lets you program a button that is used to respond to a voice interrupt  
on busy call while the user is active on another call.  
Related Procedures  
You must use Voice Interrupt on Busy (#312) to identify extensions that can  
receive an intercom call while busy on another call.  
Considerations  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back must be programmed on a button with lights.  
This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button with lights.  
4. Press f 1 8.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F18)  
Using  
To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call (you hear two beeps and the  
originator’s voice—be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking  
probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator’s voice):  
1. Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold, but do not put the call  
on hold.  
2. Press the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back button.  
The green light next to the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back button turns  
on. Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back is activated.  
3. Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call.  
The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your  
response, but you can hear that third party.  
4. Press the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back button again (whether or not  
the originator has hung up) to resume the conversation with the third party.  
The green light next to the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back button turns  
off. Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back is deactivated. The originator hears  
two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously.  
5-227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F14)  
Description  
This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system. It is  
available only on system phones.  
This feature lets a system phone user transfer a caller directly to a specific  
extension’s voice mailbox, in order for the caller to leave a message without first  
ringing the extension. This feature is useful when a user knows that a co-worker is  
away from his or her desk.  
Related Features  
While a call is being transferred, the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer  
(#119) is Active. If it is Not Active and Music-On-Hold (#602) is Active and an  
audio source is connected to the system, the caller hears music-on-hold while the  
call is being transferred to the voice mailbox. If Music-On-Hold is Not Active and  
Ring on Transfer (#119) is Not Active, the caller hears silence.  
Considerations  
You can program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button on a system phone to transfer a  
caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button then dialing the mailbox  
subscriber’s extension number.  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s c at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press f 1 4.  
5. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode.  
5-228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F14)  
Using  
To transfer a caller to a specific subscriber’s mailbox:  
1. From a system phone, press the programmed button or press f 1  
4.  
2. Dial the two-digit extension number (or press an Auto Dial button) of the  
mailbox subscriber for whom the caller wants to leave a message.  
The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that  
mailbox.  
3. Hang up.  
5-229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
Wake Up Service Button (#115)  
Description  
This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at  
extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up (or reminder) calls for system  
extensions. When a wake up call is scheduled, the system makes an intercom call  
to the target extension at the scheduled time. If the first call is not answered or the  
called extension is busy, the system makes a second attempt five minutes later.  
Related Features  
Wake up time is based on System Time (#103).  
If users answer a wake up call, they hear Music-On-Hold (#602) if it is  
Active. If Music-On-Hold is Not Active, users hear silence.  
Wake up calls ring at target extensions even if Do Not Disturb is active at  
the extension.  
Wake up calls to a target extension that has Call Forwarding active ring at  
the extension—the calls are not forwarded  
Wake up calls that are not answered do not go to voice mail coverage, even  
if VMS Cover is active at the target extension.  
Considerations  
A Wake Up Service button must be programmed on the system display  
phone at extension 10.  
Wake Up Service must be programmed on a button with lights. This feature  
will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights.  
A scheduled wake up call occurs once in a 24-hour period. If you want to  
send a wake up call at the same time on the next day, you must reschedule  
the call.  
Wake up calls ring the target extension for approximately 30 seconds (or  
six rings).  
Wake up calls are not placed to extensions assigned as doorphones.  
Valid Entries  
1 =Assigned to next available button at extension 10  
2 =Not Assigned ✔  
3 =Select button (then press a programmable button to assign Wake Up Service  
to that button)  
5-230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Wake Up Service Button (#115)  
Programming  
(See Figure 2-2 on page 2-19 for the location of special programming buttons  
such as s and e on system phones.)  
To program a Wake Up Service button at extension 10:  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 1 5 at extension  
10 or 11.  
2. At this point:  
If you want to assign Wake Up Service to the first available button,  
press D until the following appears on the display:  
Wake Up Button  
1 Assigned-Ext10  
If you want to remove the Wake Up Service button assignment,  
press D until the following appears on the display:  
Wake Up Button  
2 Not Assigned  
If you want to assign Wake Up Service to a specific button, press 3.  
The following appears on the display:  
Wake Up Button  
3 Select Button  
Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Wake Up  
Service to that button.  
3. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
4. Label the Wake Up Service button at extension 10.  
Using  
To schedule a wake up call for a specific extension:  
1. Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10.  
The green light next to the Wake Up Service button flutters. Wake Up  
Service is activated and the display reads:  
Wake Up  
2. Dial the two-digit extension number of the desired extension (or use an  
Auto Dial button). For example, to schedule a wake up call for extension 32,  
press 3 2. The following appears on the display:  
Wake Up 32 -:-  
5-231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature Reference  
3. Enter the wake-up time in 24-hour notation. For example, to set the time to  
2:15 p.m., press 1 4 1 5. When you have finished entering the time,  
the display reads:  
Wake Up 32 14:15  
The wake up call is scheduled, and the green light next to the Wake Up  
Service button turns off.  
To review a scheduled wake up time for a specific extension:  
1. Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10.  
2. Dial the two-digit target extension number (or use an Auto Dial button).  
3. Review the displayed wake up time and target extension number.  
4. Press the Wake Up Service button to exit.  
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to review wake up times for other extensions.  
To cancel a scheduled wake up call:  
1. Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10.  
2. Dial the two-digit target extension number (or use an Auto Dial button).  
3. Press #.  
4. Repeat Steps 1–3 to cancel a scheduled wake-up call for another  
extension.  
5-232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur, possible  
causes for the difficulty, and procedures you can follow to try to solve the problem.  
Programming procedure names are shown in boldface type; for more information  
about a specific procedure, refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Customer Self-Service Center on the  
Internet  
If you can access the Internet, you can use the Customer Self-Service Center to  
get on-line information such as:  
Answers to frequently asked questions  
800 number directory  
If you have a service agreement, active lease, or warranty, you also can get  
on-line information such as:  
Feature programming tips  
Notification of changes to products  
Product documentation  
Chat service  
The Internet address for the Customer Self-Service Center is:  
http://www.lucent.com/enterprise/selfservice  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When You Need Help  
When You Need Help  
If you have a problem with your system, you may be able to solve it by following  
the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter. If not, you  
can call for help. In the continental U.S., Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free  
customer hotline 24 hours a day. Inside the continental U.S., call the hotline at  
1-800-721-7071 or your Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer if you need  
assistance when installing, programming, or using your system. Consultation  
charges may apply. Outside the continental U.S., contact your Lucent  
Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.  
If you call, have the following information ready so that the representative can  
better help you:  
The kind of system you have. To determine the release number,  
press f 5 9 at any display phone.  
The number of lines and extensions in your system.  
The type of phone (system or standard) and the model number, if  
applicable. System phone model numbers are located either on the  
upper right-hand corner of the phone or on the dialpad overlay.  
If you followed a troubleshooting procedure and need more help, tell  
the representative what you did.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Power Failure Operation  
When power to the system is cut off, the first line on the PARTNER Endeavor  
processing module automatically connects to the first extension on the module,  
extension 10.  
This enables you to receive calls during a power failure on a standard phone that  
is connected to extension 10. You can also make calls on that phone during a  
power outage.  
The system can stay programmed for a minimum of 45 days and a maximum of  
six months after it stops receiving power, depending on the freshness of the  
batteries. When the batteries are drained, all of the system’s programmed settings  
return to the factory settings. It is recommended that you install fresh batteries  
every year. See ‘‘Battery Replacement’’ on page 6-5 for more information.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Battery Replacement  
Battery Replacement  
IMPORTANT:  
Do not turn off the power or remove the processor module before replacing the  
batteries! If you do, all settings for system and telephone programming will revert  
to the default settings. If you have a Backup/Restore PC Card, it is highly  
recommended that you do a backup before changing the batteries.  
Display Shows “ChgBat W/PowerOn” at  
Extensions 10 and 11  
Possible Cause: System battery power is low.  
What to do: Replace the system batteries. See instructions below.  
The PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module uses two user-replaceable AAA  
alkaline batteries. These batteries provide enough power to retain the system  
programming settings during a power failure for 45 days to six months, depending  
on the freshness of the batteries. When battery power is getting low, the system  
displays a ChgBat W/PowerOn message on the top line of display phones at  
extensions 10 and 11 in place of the default day/date/time message. Users at  
these extensions should be instructed to notify you when they see this message.  
You should replace the batteries within 45 days of seeing the message.  
NOTE:  
The message may flicker on and off as the batteries approach the low-power  
threshold.  
It is recommended that you change the batteries in the processor module every  
year, even if the system has not yet displayed the ChgBat W/PowerOnmessage.  
Choose good quality alkaline batteries.  
Use the following procedure to replace the batteries.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
1. With the power on, locate the battery compartment at the bottom of the  
PARTNER Endeavor processor module, below the extension jacks (see  
Figure 6-1). Push gently on the battery icon (the locking latch) and slide  
the battery icon up to cover the “plus” icon.  
Battery  
Compartment  
Locking  
Latch  
Locked Position  
Unlocked Position  
Figure 6-1. Battery Compartment PARTNER Endeavor processor module  
2. Remove the battery assembly by gently pulling the tab at the bottom of the  
battery compartment cover (see Figure 6-2)  
.
Tab  
Figure 6-2. Removing the Battery Assembly  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Replacement  
3. Pull the batteries straight out of the metal spring clips (see Figure 6-3), and  
dispose of the batteries properly.  
!
CAUTION:  
Do not dispose of batteries in fire. Do not recharge, disassemble, install  
backwards, or mix with used or other battery types—batteries may explode  
or leak and cause a burn injury.  
Pull to  
remove  
Push to  
insert  
Figure 6-3. Removing or Inserting Batteries in the Battery Assembly  
4. Insert two new AAA-size standard alkaline batteries into the metal spring  
clips by pushing them straight in, placing the negative (–) end of one  
battery into the bottom clip, and the positive (+) end of the other battery into  
the top clip.  
5. With the locking latch in the unlocked position (battery icon and “minus”  
icon visible), slide the battery assembly into the processor module along  
the battery guides on the inside of the battery compartment (see Figure  
6-4).  
Locking Latch  
Tab  
Figure 6-4. Inserting Battery Assembly and Batteries into Battery  
Compartment  
6. Make sure the battery assembly is pushed in far enough that the edges of  
the assembly slip behind the plastic housing of the processor module.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
7. Pressing lightly on the battery icon on the front of the battery assembly,  
slide the locking latch downward to secure the assembly in place (see  
Figure 6-5). The “plus” icon and the battery icon should now be visible on  
the front of the battery assembly. This is the locked position.  
Unlocked Position  
Locked Position  
Figure 6-5. Battery Assembly in Unlocked and Locked Position  
8. Go to extension 10 and 11 and verify that the ChgBat W/PowerOn  
message is no longer displayed. If it is displayed, check that the batteries  
are installed correctly and that they are new. If the message is still  
displayed, call the hotline.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing a Backup-Failure Alarm  
Clearing a Backup-Failure Alarm  
If you use Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and the automatic backup  
fails, a Backup-Failure Alarm message appears (instead of the default  
day/date/time message) on the top line of the telephone display at idle extensions  
10 and 11.  
After correcting the problem that caused the failure, you can clear the  
Backup-Failure Alarm using the following procedure. (See Figure 2-2 on page  
2-19 for the location of special programming buttons such as s and  
e on system phones.)  
1. Press f 0 0 s s # 1 2 3.  
The current setting is displayed.  
2. Press 3 to choose Option 3, “Backup Alarm Cleared.”  
NOTE:  
You cannot use D or d in this procedure to choose Option 3.  
NOTE:  
If an ASA/DXD or PARTNER Voice Mail PC card is in use, perform Backup  
Programming—Manual (#124) as described in Chapter 5. Deactivate  
automatic backup to prevent this from re-occurring.  
3. Exit programming mode.  
NOTE:  
Using Option 3 to clear a Backup-Failure Alarm does not change the setting  
for Backup Programming—Automatic (#123). It remains either Active or  
Not Active.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problems with System Phones  
System Phone Does Not Ring  
Possible Cause 1: Ringer volume is set too low.  
What to do: Press the volume control button while the phone is idle and the  
handset is in the cradle.  
If the phone rings increasingly louder, the problem is solved.  
If the phone still does not ring, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: The Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding feature is turned on.  
What to do: Check to see if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on.  
If Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on, turn it off.  
If Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is not turned on, go to Possible Cause  
3.  
Possible Cause 3: Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring.  
What to do: Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension.  
If Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring, change the setting if  
appropriate.  
If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a  
on page 6-21.  
If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension  
by itself, go to Possible Cause 4.  
Possible Cause 4: Phone is faulty.  
What to do: Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone. Then plug the  
cord into a phone that you know rings properly.  
If the replacement phone rings properly, the problem phone is defective.  
Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement.  
If the replacement phone does not ring properly, call the hotline.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problems with System Phones  
System Phone Does Not Work  
Possible Cause 1: Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of system  
phone.  
What to do: Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack—see the  
PARTNER Endeavor Installation guide for instructions.  
If the phone works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Phone needs to be reset.  
What to do: Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone. With the  
handset hung up, plug the cord in again.  
If the phone works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: The telephone is defective.  
What to do: Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone. Then plug the  
cord into a phone that you know works.  
If the replacement phone works, the problem phone is faulty. Call the  
hotline to arrange for a replacement.  
If the replacement phone does not work, go to Possible Cause 4.  
Possible Cause 4: The telephone cord is defective.  
What to do: Unplug the cord from the base of the phone and the wall jack.  
Replace the cord with a cord that you know works.  
If the phone works, the cord is faulty. Call the hotline to arrange for a  
replacement.  
If the phone does not work and it is part of a combination extension, see  
Cause 3.  
If the phone does not work and it is not part of a combination extension, call  
the hotline.  
Display Is Incorrect  
Possible Cause: Date, day, and time are not set properly.  
What to do: Re-enter the date, day, and time using System Date (#101), System  
Day (#102), and System Time (#103).  
If the display is correct, the problem is solved.  
If the display is still not correct, see ‘‘System Phone Does Not Work’’  
above.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Display Does Not Show Caller ID  
Name/Number  
Possible Cause 1: Not receiving Caller ID service from local phone company.  
What to do: Contact your local phone company to check on Caller ID service.  
If you are not receiving Caller ID service, subscribe to it.  
If you are receiving Caller ID service, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Someone activated Call Coverage.What to do: Check the  
system phone display.  
If “Cover for XX” (where XX is the extension that activated the Call  
Coverage) displays, the call is a coverage call. Call Coverage displays the  
extension number of the person who activated the feature rather than  
Caller ID information.  
If “Cover for XX” does not display, call the hotline.  
“Privacy” Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID  
Information  
Possible Cause: The caller used a star code, *67, to block Caller ID information or  
has instructed their telephone company to block Caller ID information.  
What to do: Nothing; this is the normal operation for these conditions.  
“- - - - - - - - - - - -” Is Displayed Instead of  
Caller ID Information  
Possible Cause: The call originated outside the area for which the phone company  
can provide Caller ID information.  
What to do: Nothing; this is normal operation for the Caller ID service.  
Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display  
Possible Cause: Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed. This varies by local  
phone company.  
What to do: If Caller ID information for a large number of calls is not displayed,  
contact your local telephone company.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problems with System Phones  
Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly  
Possible Cause 1: Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of  
Intercom Autodialer.  
What to do: Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack—see the  
PARTNER Endeavor Installation guide for instructions.  
If the Intercom Autodialer works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Intercom Autodialer is not receiving auxiliary power.  
What to do: Make sure the Intercom Autodialer is plugged into an electrical outlet.  
If the Intercom Autodialer works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: The cord is defective.  
What to do: Unplug the cord from the base of the Intercom Autodialer and the wall  
jack. Replace the cord with a cord that you know works.  
If the Intercom Autodialer works, the cord is faulty. Call the hotline to  
arrange for a replacement.  
If the Intercom Autodialer does not work, call the hotline.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Problems with Standard Phones  
Standard Phone Does Not Ring  
Possible Cause 1: Standard phone is not plugged into the Tip Ring ports, which  
are the bottom two ports on the processor or 362EC module.  
What to do: Plug the standard phone into the bottom two ports of any module.  
If the phone rings, the problem is solved.  
If the phone still does not ring, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Ringer is turned off.  
What to do: Turn on the ringer.  
If the phone rings, the problem is solved.  
If the phone still does not ring, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: Call Forwarding is turned on.  
What to do: Check to see if Call Forwarding is turned on.  
If Call Forwarding is turned on, turn it off.  
If Call Forwarding is not turned on, go to Possible Cause 4.  
Possible Cause 4: Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring.  
What to do: Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension.  
If Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring, change the setting if  
appropriate.  
If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a  
on page 6-21.  
If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension  
by itself, go to Possible Cause 5.  
Possible Cause 5: Phone is faulty.  
What to do: Unplug the problem phone. Plug in a standard phone that you know  
rings properly.  
If the replacement phone rings properly, the problem phone is defective.  
Replace it.  
If the replacement phone does not ring properly, call the hotline.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Problems with Standard Phones  
Standard Phone Rings Back after Intercom Call with  
No One at Other End  
Possible Cause 1: The switchhook is accidentally pressed and released, causing  
a call to ring back.  
What to do: Be sure that the handset is always replaced carefully. If the problem is  
not solved, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Automatic Line Selection is programmed incorrectly.  
What to do: If one of the phones involved is a standard single-line rotary or  
touch-tone telephone, set its Automatic Line Selection to intercom first. If the  
problem is not solved, call the hotline.  
Standard Phone’s Message Waiting Light Does Not  
Light  
Possible Cause 1: The standard phone is part of a combination extension which  
includes a system phone that has Background Music on.  
What to do: Check to see if the system phone has Background Music on. A  
standard phone’s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at  
the system phone.  
If Background Music is on, turn it off. If the standard phone’s message  
waiting light lights properly, the problem is solved.  
If Background Music is not on, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: The standard phone’s message waiting light is not compatible  
with the system.  
What to do: See ‘‘Standard Telephones’’ on page 1-12 for a list of supported  
standard phones with message waiting lights. Also check with your Lucent  
Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if there are  
others.  
If the phone is not supported, you can use it without message waiting  
capability.  
If the phone is supported, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: The standard phone is not connected to the bottom two ports.  
What to do: Make sure the phone is connected to the bottom two ports of the  
processor module or a 362EC module. If the problem is not solved, call the  
hotline.  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Other Problems with Phones  
Trouble Making Outside Calls  
Trouble making outside calls could be one of the following:  
You hear a dial tone, but the dial tone continues as you try to dial.  
You hear a dial tone, which cuts off when you dial, but the line does not  
ring.  
You hear a busy signal as you dial.  
You hear nothing at all.  
Possible Cause 1: Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension.  
What to do: Find out if Forced Account Code Entry (#307) is assigned to the  
extension. If it is, enter a valid account code.  
If you can make a call, the problem is solved.  
If Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Dial Mode is set incorrectly.  
What to do: Find out if you have touch-tone or rotary service. Then set the Dial  
Mode (#201) to Touch-Tone or Rotary as appropriate.  
If you can make a call, the problem is solved.  
If the Dial Mode is set correctly, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: Someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting for the  
extension.  
What to do: If calls could be made without trouble before, find out if someone  
changed the Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) for the extension.  
If someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting, verify that the  
change was an appropriate one.  
If no one changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting, go to Possible  
Cause 4.  
Possible Cause 4: Station Lock was used to lock the extension.  
What to do: Use Station Unlock from extension 10 to unlock the extension.  
If you can make a call, the problem is solved.  
If the extension was not locked, go to Possible Cause 5.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Other Problems with Phones  
Possible Cause 5: Local phone company is not accurately receiving the dialing  
signals.  
What to do: Isolate the problem. Use the telephone to make calls on different  
lines. Then, make calls on different phones using the same line.  
If you cannot make calls from one phone on all lines, follow the procedure  
for “System Phone Does Not Work,” Possible Cause 2.  
If you cannot make calls using different phones, go to Possible Cause 6.  
Possible Cause 6: Too many standard devices are trying to dial simultaneously. (If  
the problem is on a system phone, go to Possible Cause 7.)  
What to do: Stay on the line and wait for dial tone, or try to call later.  
If you can make a call, you may want to increase the number of touch-tone  
receivers by adding 362EC (6 receivers) modules to avoid future problems.  
Call the hotline.  
If you wait 30 seconds and still do not hear a dial tone, go to Possible  
Cause 7.  
Possible Cause 7: Local phone company line is faulty.  
What to do: One at a time, unplug each outside line from each 362EC module in  
the control unit. Then plug each line into a standard telephone and try to make a  
call.  
If the trouble occurs on the standard phone, try another line cord; if the  
trouble persists, report it to your local phone company.  
If the trouble does not occur on the standard phone, the trouble is with your  
control unit. Call the hotline.  
Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool  
Buttons on Pooled Extensions  
Trouble making outside calls from a pool button could be one of the following:  
You hear nothing at all.  
You hear a dial tone, but the dial tone continues as you try to dial.  
You hear a dial tone, and the dial tone cuts off when you try to dial.  
You hear a reorder or busy signal if you try to dial a pool access code (880,  
881, 882, or 883) at intercom dial tone.  
You notice that the red light next to a pool button is on steady most or all of  
the time, indicating that the pool is busy.  
Possible Cause 1: Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
What to do: Find out if Forced Account Code Entry (#307) is assigned to the  
extension. If it is, enter a valid account code.  
If you can make a call, the problem is solved.  
If Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Dial Mode is set incorrectly.  
What to do: Find out if you have touch-tone or rotary service. Then set the Dial  
Mode (#201) to Touch-Tone or Rotary as appropriate for all lines in the pool.  
If you can make a call, the problem is solved.  
If the Dial Mode is set correctly, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: Someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting for the  
extension.  
What to do: If calls could be made without trouble before, find out if someone  
changed the Pool Access Restriction (#315) for the extension.  
If someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting, verify that the  
change was an appropriate one.  
If no one changed the Pool Access Restriction setting, go to Possible  
Cause 4.  
Possible Cause 4: The pool may not be assigned to the extension.  
What to do: Check Pool Extension Assignment (#314) to see if the pool is  
assigned to the extension.  
If the pool is not assigned, assign it.  
If the pool is assigned, go to Possible Cause 5.  
Possible Cause 5: Not enough lines are assigned to the pool to support usage.  
What to do: Check Pool Line Assignment (#207) to see if an appropriate number  
of lines are assigned to the pool.  
If an appropriate number of lines are not assigned, you may need to add  
more lines.  
If an appropriate number of lines are assigned, go to Possible Cause 6.  
Possible Cause 6: One or more local phone company lines in the pool are faulty.  
What to do: At extension 10, try to access each individual line assigned to the  
pool.  
If the lines accessed from individual line buttons on extension 10 are still  
faulty, refer to Possible Cause 7 in “Other Problems with Phones: Trouble  
Making Outside Calls.”  
If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Problems with Phones  
Calls Are Answered Automatically  
A call rings once, then disappears as if it were answered.  
Possible Cause 1: Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned  
on.  
What to do: Check to see if Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is  
turned on.  
If Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on, turn it off  
by pressing the programmed button at extension 10.  
If Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is not turned on, go to  
Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: An auxiliary device answers when it should not (this could  
occur with a fax machine, voice messaging system, answering machine, or  
modem).  
What to do: Be sure the device is set to answer correctly. If the device answers  
before it should, adjust it to answer on a later ring. If the device should not answer  
calls at all, turn off its auto-answer feature. Refer to the device’s user manual.  
For every auxiliary device connected to your system, either set the device  
itself to answer on a later ring (when the Line Ringing for the device’s  
extension is set to Immediate Ring) or set the extension’s Line Ringing to  
Delayed Ring. For a voice messaging system, check all of the settings  
associated with it. Refer to the documentation package with your voice mail  
system for complete details on installing, programming, and using your  
system. Refer to the documentation with your voice messaging system for  
complete details. If the auxiliary device no longer answers calls  
automatically, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer  
Possible Cause 1: If you are using a speakerphone, there may be environmental  
factors that affect the performance of the speaker or microphone (for example, too  
much background noise).  
suggestions on the proper use of the speakerphone. If the problem is not solved,  
go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: If the system is set for touch-tone dialing, you may have a faulty  
phone or cord. See ‘‘System Phone Does Not Work’’ on page 6-11. If the  
system is set for rotary dialing, the Rotary Dialing Timeout interval is too long.  
What to do: Reset the interval using Rotary Dialing Timeout (#108).  
If you can hear the called party answer, the problem is solved.  
If the problem is not solved, call the hotline.  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with  
Star Codes Are Misrouted  
Possible Cause: The Star Code Dial Delay setting is not inserting a long enough  
pause, allowing a portion of the phone number to be dialed before the second dial  
tone from the Central Office is established.  
What to do: Use Star Code Dial Delay (#410) to increase the Star Code Dial  
Delay setting.  
Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect  
Possible Cause: Recall Timer Duration setting is too short.  
What to do: Increase the Recall Timer Duration (#107) by 100 milliseconds.  
If the Recall feature works, the problem is solved.  
If the Recall feature still does not work, continue increasing the Recall  
Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is  
solved.  
Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call  
This problem applies when the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex  
system or with the local phone company’s “Call Waiting” feature.  
Possible Cause: Recall Timer Duration setting is too long.  
What to do: Decrease the Recall Timer Duration (#107) by 100 milliseconds.  
If the Recall feature works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the Recall feature still disconnects calls, continue decreasing the Recall  
Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is  
solved.  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problems with Combination Extensions  
Problems with Combination Extensions  
Phone Does Not Work Properly  
Possible Cause 1: Standard phone is not plugged into the Tip Ring ports, which  
are the bottom two ports on the processor or 362EC module.  
What to do: Plug the standard phone into the bottom two ports of any module.  
If the phone rings, the problem is solved.  
If the phone still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Ringer equivalents are too high for the extension.  
What to do: Be sure the total of the two devices’ Ringer Equivalence Numbers  
(REN) does not exceed 2.0. If it does, unplug one of the devices.  
If the phone works properly, the problem is the REN was too high.  
If the phone still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: Auxiliary device (such as a fax, answering machine, or modem)  
is faulty.  
What to do: Remove the auxiliary device from the extension. Then plug in an  
auxiliary device that you know works properly.  
If the phone works properly, the problem is the auxiliary device. Replace  
the auxiliary device.  
If the phone still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 4.  
Possible Cause 4: Phone is plugged into the wrong jack of the system phone or  
the bridging adapter.  
What to do: Plug the phone into the correct jack—see the PARTNER Endeavor  
Installation guide for instructions.  
If the phone works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, go to Possible Cause 5.  
Possible Cause 5: Wrong bridging adapter is used in combination extension.  
What to do: First, unplug the bridging adapter from the wall jack. Then, unplug the  
phone from the adapter and plug the phone directly into the wall jack.  
If the phone works, there is a problem with the bridging adapter. Replace  
the bridging adapter (use only a Lucent Technologies 267F2 bridging  
adapter).  
If the phone still does not work properly, call the hotline.  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problems with Standard Devices  
Standard Device Does Not Answer  
Possible Cause 1: Standard phone is not plugged into the Tip Ring ports, which  
are the bottom two ports on the processor or 362EC module.  
What to do: Plug the standard phone into the bottom two ports of any module.  
If the device rings, the problem is solved.  
If the device still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: A standard device (such as a fax machine or answering  
machine) does not answer intercom calls or transferred calls because it does not  
recognize the distinctive ringing pattern used by the system.  
What to do: Change the extension’s setting for Distinctive Ring (#308) to Not  
Active, so the extension uses the same ringing for intercom and transferred calls  
as it does for outside calls.  
If the device works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
Standard Device Does Not Dial Out Properly  
Possible Cause: A standard device with autodialing (such as a modem) does not  
recognize the intercom dial tone generated by the system.  
What to do: Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone (#309) for the extension to  
Machine, so the system generates outside line dial tone for the extension.  
If the device works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problems with ASA/DXD Cards  
Problems with ASA/DXD Cards  
An ASA/DXD Missing Card Error Message Appears  
Possible Cause: You are attempting to record an Automatic System Answer  
message (I891) or a Direct Extension Dial (DXD) message (I892) and an  
ASA/DXD PC card is not installed in the processor module.  
What to do: To clear the message, at extensions 10 and 11, program an  
Automatic System Answer button (#111) if you used I891 to attempt to  
record the greeting or a Direct Extension Dial button (#112) if you used  
I892 to attempt to record the greeting. Press the programmed button to turn  
the feature on then press the programmed button to turn it off again. After  
you turn the feature off, the error message should be cleared and you can  
remove the button assignment using (#111) or #112).  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problems with Automatic Backup  
Display Shows “Backup Failed IC” at  
Idle Extension 10 and 11  
Possible Cause: The system did not detect a valid Backup/Restore PC Card while  
trying to do an automatic backup.  
NOTE:  
If an ASA/DXD or PARTNER Voice Mail PC card is in use, perform Backup  
Programming—Manual (#124) as described in Chapter 5. Deactivate  
automatic backup to prevent this from re-occurring.  
What to do: Power down the system, insert a valid Backup/Restore PC Card in the  
PC Card Slot of the PARTNER Endeavor processor module, and reapply power to  
the system. The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2:00 a.m.  
Enter Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and select Option 3 to clear the  
Display Shows “Backup Failed WP” at  
Idle Extension 10 and 11  
Possible Cause: The Backup/Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is  
write-protected, and an automatic backup was attempted.  
What to do: Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object, push the  
write-protect tab upward to the non-protected position (see Figure 6-6). You do  
not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write-protect tab up.  
The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2:00 a.m.  
Slide the switch on the PC card  
up to the nonprotected position  
Figure 6-6. Write-Protect Tab on a Backup/Restore PC Card  
Enter Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and select Option 3 to clear the  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Problems with Automatic Backup  
Display Shows “Backup Failed CC”  
at Idle Extension 10 and 11  
Possible Cause 1: The Backup/Restore PC Card was removed while the backup  
was in progress.  
What to do: Check to see whether the PC Card was removed. If it was not, go to  
Possible Cause 2. If it was, power down the system, reinsert the PC Card, and  
reapply power to the system. The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2:00  
a.m.  
Enter Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and select Option 3 to clear the  
Possible Cause 2: The Backup/Restore PC Card or the PARTNER Endeavor  
processor module is corrupted.  
What to do: Try to do a backup using the manual backup procedure— Backup  
Programming—Manual (#124)—to test the system.  
If the backup completes successfully, the problem may be solved. An  
automatic backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2:00 a.m. Enter  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and select Option 3 to clear  
If the backup fails, try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC  
Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two  
different Backup/Restore PC Cards:  
— If the system will not write to either PC Card, the processor module  
is probably corrupted; call the hotline.  
— If the system writes to one of the PC Cards, the original PC Card is  
corrupted. See Table B-1 on page B-5 for information about  
ordering a new Backup/Restore PC Card.  
Display Shows “Backup Failed SB”  
at Idle Extension 10 and 11  
Possible Cause: Changes were being made to system programming or central  
telephone programming while a backup was in progress.  
What to do: The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2:00 a.m. Enter  
Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) and select Option 3 to clear the alarm  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Problems with Manual Backup  
Display Shows “Insert Card” in  
System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: The system did not detect a valid Backup/Restore PC Card when  
you tried to do a manual backup using Backup Programming—Manual (#124).  
NOTE:  
If an ASA/DXD or PARTNER Voice Mail PC card is in use, perform Backup  
Programming—Manual (#124) as described in Chapter 5. Deactivate  
automatic backup to prevent this from reoccurring.  
What to do: Power down the system, insert a valid Backup/Restore PC Card in the  
PC Card Slot of the PARTNER Endeavor processor module, and reapply power to  
the system. Restart the procedure.  
Display Shows “Write Protected” in  
System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: You tried to do a manual backup using Backup Programming—  
Manual (#124), but the Backup/Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is  
write-protected.  
What to do: Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object, gently push  
the write-protect tab upward to the non-protected position (see Figure 6-7), and  
try the procedure again. (You do not need to remove the card from the processor  
to slide the write-protect tab up.)  
Slide the switch on the PC card  
up to the nonprotected position  
Figure 6-7. Write-Protect Tab on a Backup/Restore PC Card  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Problems with Manual Backup  
Display Shows “System Busy” in  
System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: An automatic or manual backup was in progress at the time you  
requested a manual backup.  
What to do: Exit the procedure and retry the manual backup after a few minutes.  
Display Shows “Backup Failed CC”  
in System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause 1: The Backup/Restore PC Card was removed while the backup  
was in progress.  
What to do: Check to see whether the PC Card was removed. If it was not, go to  
Possible Cause 2. If it was, power down the system, reinsert the PC Card, and  
reapply power to the system. Restart the Backup Programming—Manual (#124)  
procedure.  
Possible Cause 2: The Backup/Restore PC Card or the PARTNER Endeavor  
processor module is corrupted.  
What to do: Try the backup again using the backup procedure— Backup  
Programming—Manual (#124).  
If the backup completes successfully, the problem is solved.  
If the backup fails again, try to determine whether the problem is a  
corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup  
twice using two different Backup/Restore PC Cards:  
— If the system will not write to either PC Card, the processor module  
is probably corrupted; call the hotline.  
— If the system writes to one of the PC Cards, the original PC Card is  
corrupted. See Table B-1 on page B-5 for the information about  
ordering a new Backup/Restore PC Card.  
Display Shows “Backup Failed SB”  
in System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: Changes were being made to system programming or central  
telephone programming while a backup was in progress.  
What to do: Try Backup Programming—Manual (#124) later when the system is  
idle or during non-business hours  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Problems with System Restore  
Display Shows “Insert Card” in  
System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: The system did not detect a valid Backup/Restore PC Card when  
you tried to do a restore using Restore Programming (#125).  
What to do: Power down the system, insert a valid Backup/Restore PC Card in the  
PC Card Slot of the PARTNER Endeavor processor module, and reapply power to  
the system. Restart the procedure.  
Display Shows “Bad File” in  
System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: You attempted a restore and the file was corrupted.  
What to do: Try Restore Programming (#125) again with a different backup file.  
Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove  
Backup/Restore PC Cards.  
Display Shows “Empty File” in  
System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: You selected a file named AUTO.****** or MAN.****** for the  
restore. The file is empty; no backups have been stored in it yet.  
What to do: Try Restore Programming (#125) again using a file created during a  
backup procedure. Remember to power down the system before you insert or  
remove Backup/Restore PC Cards.  
Display Shows “Incompat Versions” in  
System Programming Mode  
Possible Cause: You attempted to restore a file that was created with an  
incompatible software release.  
What to do: Try Restore Programming (#125) again using a backup file that was  
created with the current software release.  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Problems with System Restore  
Display Shows “Restore Failed” for  
Two Seconds in System Programming Mode  
NOTE:  
This display indicates that all system and telephone programming has  
reverted to the default settings.  
Possible Cause 1: The Backup/Restore PC Card was removed while the restore  
was in progress.  
What to do: Check to see whether the PC Card was removed. If it was not, go to  
Possible Cause 2. If it was, power down the system, reinsert the Backup/Restore  
PC Card, reapply power to the system, and restart the Restore Programming  
(#125) procedure.  
Possible Cause 2: The backup file is corrupted.  
What to do: Retry the Restore Programming (#125) procedure. If you get the  
same result, try again using a different backup file from the same Backup/Restore  
PC Card or a file from a different Backup/Restore PC Card. Remember to power  
down the system before you insert or remove Backup/Restore PC Cards.  
System Programming Settings  
Reverted to Default Settings  
Possible Cause: You ran the Restore Programming (#125) procedure, but the  
restore failed.  
What to do: See Possible Causes 1 and 2 under “Display Shows ‘Restore Failed’  
for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode.”  
Display Shows “Restore Complete,”  
but All Calls Were Disconnected  
Possible Cause: You just ran the Restore Programming (#125) procedure.  
What to do: Nothing. This is normal behavior after a restore; the system resets  
itself. In the future, warn users before beginning the restore, or perform the restore  
during non-business hours.  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
System Problems  
Call Rings Continuously; When Answered,  
No One at Other End  
Possible Cause: Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is used on a  
system that does not support far end disconnect.  
What to do: Call your local phone company and find out whether they support far  
end disconnect. If the local phone company does not support far end disconnect,  
you should not set the Automatic System Answer Mode (#121) to either Hold or  
Ring and you should not use the Direct Extension Dial feature. If the local phone  
company supports far end disconnect but the problem still occurs, call the hotline.  
Calls on Hold Are Disconnected  
Possible Cause: Hold Disconnect Time setting is too short.  
What to do: Change Hold Disconnect Time (#203) to a longer interval.  
If calls on hold no longer disconnect, the problem is solved.  
If calls on hold still get disconnected, or the Hold Disconnect Time was  
already set to the longest interval, call the hotline.  
Calls on Automatic System Answer Lines  
Are Disconnected  
Possible Cause: Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Disconnect.  
What to do: Change Automatic System Answer Mode (#121) from Disconnect  
to either Hold or Ring.  
If calls on Automatic System Answer lines no longer disconnect, the  
problem is solved.  
If calls on Automatic System Answer lines still get disconnected, or the  
Automatic System Answer Mode already was set to Hold or Ring, call the  
hotline.  
Call on Hold Hangs Up,  
but Line Does Not Disconnect  
Possible Cause 1: Hold Disconnect Time setting is too long.  
What to do: Change Hold Disconnect Time (#203) to a shorter interval.  
If abandoned calls on hold are disconnected, the problem is solved.  
If abandoned calls on hold still do not disconnect, or if the Hold Disconnect  
Time was already set to the shortest interval, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Local phone company does not send hold release signal.  
6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Problems  
What to do: Call your local phone company and find out whether they send a hold  
release signal. If the local phone company does not send a hold release signal, or  
if they do but the problem still occurs, call the hotline.  
All Calls Disconnected  
Possible Cause 1: You just ran the Restore Programming (#125) procedure.  
What to do: This is normal behavior after running Restore Programming (#125);  
the system resets itself. In the future, warn users before beginning the restore, or  
perform the restore during non-business hours. If you did not run Restore  
Programming (#125), go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: Power was interrupted to the control unit.  
What to do: Make sure the control unit’s power cord is plugged securely into the  
wall outlet. Also make sure the on/off switch is in the “ON” position (“O”) if you  
have a 5-Slot carrier.  
If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone, the  
problem is corrected.  
If the green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains, call the  
hotline.  
If the green LEDs on the modules are out, go to Possible Cause 2 in “All  
Phones Dead: No Dial Tone or Lights.”  
If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing, call the hotline.  
All Phones Dead: No Dial Tone or Lights  
Possible Cause 1: Control unit is not receiving power.  
What to do: Make sure the control unit’s power cord is plugged securely into the  
wall outlet. Also make sure the on/off switch is in the “ON” position (“O”) if you  
have a 5-Slot carrier.  
If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone, the  
problem is corrected.  
If the green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains, call the  
hotline.  
If the green LEDs on the modules are out, go to Possible Cause 2.  
If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing, call the hotline.  
Possible Cause 2: The power outlet is faulty.  
What to do: Test the outlet by plugging in an appliance, like a lamp or radio.  
If the appliance does not work, the outlet is faulty. If possible, plug the  
control unit into a different outlet. Then check the fuse box or call an  
electrician.  
If the appliance works, call the hotline.  
6-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Multiple Phones Dead: No Dial Tone or Lights  
Possible Cause 1: The LED on one system module is out.  
What to do: If the green LED on the front of a module is out, try re-seating the  
module in the control unit.  
If the LED lights, the problem is corrected.  
If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
Possible Cause 2: The green LEDs on several system modules are out.  
What to do: If the LEDs on the front of several system modules are out, try  
re-seating the leftmost module of the ones with the lights out (see “Replacing  
System Modules” in the PARTNER Endeavor Installation guide).  
If the LEDs light, the problem is corrected.  
If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
Poor Transmission Quality on Modem  
Possible Cause: A high-speed modem is connected through an extension jack on  
the control unit to a standard Central Office telephone line; but the line quality is  
not sufficient to generate a clear signal when the modem transmits through the  
system interface.  
What to do: Either connect the modem directly to the network interface jack for a  
line, or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading the  
line quality.  
If the device works properly, the problem is solved.  
If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
6-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other Problems with System  
Other Problems with System  
The following procedure resets the system. Use it when you have any problems  
that are not covered elsewhere in this chapter. The procedure disconnects all calls  
in progress, but does not erase any system settings, provided that the system  
batteries are installed and not low on power.  
Possible Cause: System needs a hardware reset.  
What to do: Unplug the control unit’s power cord from the wall. Wait 10 seconds,  
then plug it back in. If the problem remains, call the hotline.  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
6-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Capacities  
System  
Module  
Extension Jack  
40 extensions via extension jacks on one PARTNER  
Endeavor 362 processor module plus four 362EC  
expansion modules  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor  
Module  
3 outside lines  
Maximum two devices per extension  
jack, total REN on jack not to exceed  
2.0 [System phone REN is 0.0 (zero)]  
1 audio source via Music-On-Hold jack on PARTNER  
Endeavor 362 processor module (RCA phono plug  
required)  
2 doorphones, using two extension jacks  
1 voice messaging system-PARTNER MAIL VS or  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card, which uses a  
slot in the 2- or 5- Slot Carrier, or PARTNER MAIL,  
which connects to either 2, 4, or 6 extension jacks  
8 extensions  
NOTE:  
2 touch-tone receivers when used in  
a stand-alone system, 0 touch-tone  
receivers when used with a 362EC  
expansion module  
The two devices combined on an  
extension jack can be a system  
phone with a standard device, or  
two standard devices.  
1 power-failure transfer extension  
362EC Expansion Module  
If a device lists two RENs, use the  
higher number when adding up the  
RENs.  
No more than one system phone per  
jack  
3 outside lines  
8 extensions  
6 touch-tone receivers  
NOTE:  
Doorphones and PARTNER MAIL can only be  
used in bottom two ports on the processor or  
362EC module.  
For programming, a system display  
phone must be connected to  
extensions 10 and 11.  
Dimensions and Weights (approx.)  
11"(D) x 17" (H) x 1.5" (W) or 27.9 x 43.2 x 3.8 cm  
11"(D) x 17" (H) x 1.5" (W) or 27.9 x 43.2 x 3.8 cm  
2" (D) x 9.75" (H) x 5.5" (W) or 5.1x 24.8 x14 cm  
12" (D) x 19" (H) x 11" (W) or 30.5 x 48.3 x 27.9 cm  
9.8 " (D) x 3.75" (H) x 9.3" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 23.6 cm  
9.8 " (D) x 3.75" (H) x 7.9" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 20.1 cm  
9.8 " (D) x 3.75" (H) x 7.9" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 20.1 cm  
9.8 " (D) x 3.75" (H) x 6.1" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 15.5 cm  
9.8 " (D) x 3.75" (H) x 6.1" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 15.5 cm  
4.5 lbs or 2 kg  
362 Processor Module  
4.5 lbs or 2 kg  
362EC Expansion Module  
2-Slot Carrier  
1.0 lbs or .46 kg  
5.5 lbs or 2.5 kg  
2.7 lbs or 1.2 kg  
2.4 lbs or 1.1 kg  
2.3 lbs or 1.0 kg  
1.9 lbs or 0.9 kg  
1.5 lbs or 0.7 kg  
5-Slot Carrier  
PARTNER Endeavor-34D Phone  
PARTNER Endeavor-18D Phone  
PARTNER Endeavor-18 Phone  
PARTNER Endeavor-6 Phone  
PARTNER-CA48 Autodialer  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications  
Other Specifications  
Specification  
Description  
Switch Fabric  
Full digital, nonblocking  
Electrical  
Specifications  
35 watts (120 BTUs/hr) per PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module during normal power consumption  
45 watts (154 BTUs/hr) per PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module during maximum power consumption  
30 watts (105 BTUs/hr) per 362EC expansion module during normal power consumption  
40 watts (140 BTUs/hr) per 362EC expansion module during maximum power consumption  
45 days to 6 months memory backup with 2 AAA-size standard alkaline batteries (IEC LR03)  
Processor Module  
Specifications  
68306 16 Mhz processor  
256Kbyte RAM  
512Kbyte FLASH ROM  
Custom VLSI DSP ASIC—16bit, 52 Mhz  
—VLSI = Very Large Scale Integration  
—DSP = Digital Signal Processor  
—ASIC = Application Specific Integrated Circuit  
Extension Jack  
Specifications  
Ringing voltage: +55VRMS Balanced ringing within a trapezoidal wave shaping  
38- to 42-volt talk battery  
Ringing frequency: 20 HZ  
(Endeavor  
Processor and  
362EC module)  
Music-On-Hold  
Accepts 2 volts at 50 Kohms maximum input  
Jack Specifications  
0 – 18 dB attenuation  
Environmental  
Requirements-  
Control Unit  
Mount on a wall at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) from the floor (wall mounting required)  
Locate within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not  
controlled by a switch, using supplied 7-foot (2.1-meter) cords  
Operating temperature 32° to + 104°F (0° to + 40°C), not in direct sunlight  
Humidity 15% – 90%, noncondensing  
For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules, provide the following minimum clearance around the  
control unit:  
—5-Slot Carrier: 1 foot (0.3 meter) clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet (0.6 meter) at the front and bottom  
—2-Slot Carrier or Stand-alone Endeavor processor module: 1 foot (0.3 meter) clearance at the front, top and  
right side, and 2 feet (0.6 meter) at the bottom and left side  
Locate in an area free of excess moisture, corrosive gases, dust, and chemicals  
Electrical  
U.S. and Canada: 90-130 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 3-prong outlet separate ground, separately fused at 15 Amps  
Requirements-  
Control Unit  
Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1459:  
A. An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and  
thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors, except that it is green with or  
without one or more yellow stripes, is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or  
system  
B. The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment  
C. The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type,  
and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service  
equipment  
(continued)  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Other Specifications  
Specification  
Definition  
Requirements for  
Out-of-  
Installation of a telephone or other standard (tip/ring) device in another building requires the following  
In-Range-Out-Of-Building (IROB) protectors to protect the control unit and device from electrical surges:  
Building Installation  
—System phone: two Lucent Technologies IROB protectors  
—System phone: two Lucent Technologies IROB protectors  
Wiring  
System phones: Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX® Bulk Nonplenum (DIW) cable, Lucent Technologies  
SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum (HALAR/HALAR) cable, or at least 2-pair (4-wire) star ("home run" not "loop")  
Other standard telecommunications equipment (single-line phones, fax machines, answering machines, etc.):  
1-pair (2-wire) mounting cords (Lucent Technologies D2R mounting cords recommended)  
Bridging adapter: Lucent Technologies 267F2  
Range: 1,000 feet (305 meters) for system phones; 3,000 feet (915 meters) for standard devices  
Safety  
U.S.: Meets UL 1459 Issue 2  
Requirements  
Canada: Meets CSA C22.2, 225  
Government  
Approvals and  
Local Phone  
Company  
U.S.:  
FCC Part 68 Key System registration: FCC #AS5USA-61630-KF-E  
FCC Part 68 Pooling and Hybrid System registration number: FCC #AS5USA-21213-MF3  
Information  
Class A:  
5-Slot Configuration  
2-Slot Configuration with 362EC or PARTNER MAIL VS  
Class B:  
PARTNER Endeavor Stand-Alone Configuration  
REN (outside line jack): 0.9A per line jack  
Jack type: RJ11C  
Loop start lines  
Canada:  
IC CP01, Issue 7  
IC registration number (Canada): See the label on the side of the control unit.  
IC CS03, Issues 6 & 7  
Load Number = 7  
Loop start lines  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance, Repair,  
and Ordering Information  
Maintenance  
Your system is designed to provide trouble-free performance without any special  
maintenance procedures. To reduce the risk of accidental damage:  
Keep the system modules in an area free of dust, smoke, and moisture,  
and do not block the air vents by placing objects on top of the control unit.  
Do not place telephones near a heating duct, radiator, or other heat source,  
and do not drop or expose them to excessive shock or vibration.  
Unplug the telephone if its cord is damaged, if liquid is spilled into it, or if its  
housing becomes cracked or otherwise damaged.  
To clean your telephone, wipe the outside housing with a soft, dust-free  
cloth. If absolutely necessary, you may use a cloth slightly dampened with  
a mild soap and water solution. Dry quickly with a soft cloth.  
!
CAUTION:  
Your telephone contains sensitive electronic parts. Never submerge it in any  
kind of liquid, and never use detergents, alcohols, solvents, abrasive  
cleaners, or an excessive amount of water when cleaning the housing and  
faceplate. To do so could result in irreparable damage.  
Repair Information  
Contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for  
warranty and repair information applicable to your system.  
In-Warranty Repairs  
If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies  
Authorized Dealer, contact your dealer for repairs.  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Maintenance, Repair, and Ordering Information  
Post-Warranty Repairs  
If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies  
Authorized Dealer, contact your dealer for repairs.  
Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty  
and Limitation of Liability  
Lucent Technologies warrants to you, the customer, that your system will be in  
good working order on the date the authorized reseller delivers or installs the  
system, whichever is later (“Warranty Date”). If you notify the authorized reseller  
within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working  
order, Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace, at its  
option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or  
replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an  
exchange basis.  
If you purchased your system from a Lucent Technologies authorized reseller,  
contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your  
system.  
This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system caused  
by power surges.  
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent  
Technologies, Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under this limited  
warranty for damages resulting from:  
Failure to follow Lucent Technologies’ installation, operation, or  
maintenance instructions;  
Unauthorized system modification, movement, or alteration;  
Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed  
through the system;  
Abuse, misuse, or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons  
under the customer’s control; or  
Acts of third parties and acts of God.  
For warranted items that were not installed by Lucent Technologies (self-installed),  
and are not covered by a Service Protection Plan, the means of warranty fulfillment  
on the product is to ship the replacement item to you, or at Lucent Technologies’  
discretion, to dispatch a technician to repair or replace the product.  
Lucent Technologies’ OBLIGATION TO REPAIR, REPLACE, OR REFUND, AS  
SET FORTH ABOVE, IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.  
EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE, Lucent Technologies, ITS  
AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Product Ordering Information  
Limitation of Liability  
Except as provided below, the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and  
suppliers for any claims, losses, damages, or expenses from any cause  
whatsoever (including acts or omissions of third parties), regardless of the form of  
action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, shall not exceed the lesser of: (1)  
the direct damages proven; or (2) the repair cost, replacement cost, license fee,  
annual rental charge, or purchase price, as the case may be, of the equipment  
that directly gives rise to the claim. Except as provided below, Lucent  
Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental,  
special, reliance, consequential, or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection  
with the equipment. As used in this paragraph, consequential damages include,  
but are not limited to, the following: lost profits, lost revenues, and losses arising  
out of unauthorized use (or charges for such use) of common carrier  
telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected to the  
equipment. For personal injury caused by Lucent Technologies’ negligence,  
Lucent Technologies’ liability shall be limited to proven damages to person. No  
action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may  
be commenced more than twenty-four (24) months after the cause of action  
accrues. THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY.  
Product Ordering Information  
Reference Materials  
In addition to this guide, the following materials are available (the order numbers  
are in parentheses):  
PARTNER Endeavor Communication System Installation (518-458-100)  
provides instructions for installing the system.  
Telephone User Cards (518-458-108) contains basic instructions for using  
PARTNER Endeavor system phones.  
PARTNER Endeavor-34D and PARTNER-34D Programming Overlay  
(847531696) helps with System Programming from a PARTNER-34D  
phone.  
PARTNER Endeavor-18D and PARTNER-18D Programming Overlay  
(847531688) helps with System Programming from a PARTNER-18D  
phone.  
MDW 9031P Wireless Pocketphone Installation and Use (503-801-166)  
explains how to install and use the MDW 9030P pocketphone.  
MDW 9031P Wireless Pocketphone Quick Reference (503-801-165)  
contains basic information for using the MDW 9030P pocketphone.  
PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 4 Installation and  
Programming (518-322-521) provides instructions for installing,  
programming, and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL VS system.  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance, Repair, and Ordering Information  
PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 4 Planning Forms  
(585-322-520) provides the forms needed to plan and record how your  
PARTNER MAIL VS system is to be programmed.  
Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 4  
(518-322-523) contains instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL VS  
system.  
PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Release 3 Planning, Installation,  
and Use (585-322-516) provides instructions for planning, installing,  
programming, and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL system.  
PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Release 3 Planning Forms  
(585-322-517) provides the forms needed to plan and record how your  
PARTNER MAIL system is to be programmed.  
PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Release 3 User’s Guide  
(585-322-518) contains instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL system.  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Installation, Programming and Use  
(518-456-100) contains instructions for installing, programming and using  
the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card.  
Some of these materials also are available in Spanish and French. For more  
information, or to order materials, contact the Lucent Technologies BCS  
Publications Center at 1-800-457-1235 or 1-317-361-5353, or your Lucent  
Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.  
Hardware Components  
Ordering additional telephones and modules, accessories, and replacement parts  
for your system is convenient. Table B-1 shows where you can buy system  
components in the continental United States.  
To take full advantage of your system, the sources shown below also can provide  
you with the optional equipment you might want for your system, such as Lucent  
Technologies fax machines, answering machines, standard phones, voice  
messaging systems, modems, doorphones, headsets, bells, lights, strobes,  
music-on-hold systems, and printers.  
You can obtain most items from more than one source, either directly from Lucent  
Technologies or from authorized dealers. Sources in the U.S. are:  
Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealers. You can also buy most items  
from one of Lucent Technologies’ authorized dealers. Check your local  
telephone directory’s yellow pages for the Lucent Technologies Authorized  
Dealer nearest you.  
Lucent Technologies National Parts Sales Center. This national sales  
center, located in Little Rock, stocks replacement parts. Telephone orders  
can be placed by calling 1-800-222-7278.  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product Ordering Information  
In Canada, order these items from Lucent Technologies Canada:  
Eastern Canada and Ottawa:  
Ontario:  
Central and Western Canada:  
1-514 335-7200  
1-416-756-5236  
1-800-561-5165  
Table B-1. Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacements Parts (U.S.)  
Lucent  
Lucent  
Technologies  
Authorized  
Technologies  
National Parts  
Sale Center  
1
Dealer  
System Modules and Wiring:  
(800) 222-7278  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module  
Includes module, three 7-ft. cords and installation  
instructions  
*
*
*
Line/Extension module (362EC)  
Includes module, two 7-ft. line cords and installation  
instructions  
*
2-Slot Carrier  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
5-Slot Carrier  
*
Cover for 5-slot carrier  
*
Software Upgrade PC Card for PARTNER Endeavor only  
*
AC Power Cord  
*
267F2 bridging adapter  
Connects two devices to one extension  
*
In-Range Out-of-Building (IROB) protector  
*
*
Required when installing extensions in another building  
from the control unit (two required per PARTNER-Endeavor  
model telephone, one per standard phone or device)  
Z300A Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter  
Includes filter, 7-ft. cord, and installation instructions  
*
*
267C line adapter  
*
Splits two outside lines from an RJ14 network interface jack,  
so that each line has its own modular plug (do not use at  
extension jacks)  
(continued)  
1. To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer, check your local telephone  
directory’s yellow pages.  
*
Indicates that you can obtain the item from this source.  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance, Repair, and Ordering Information  
Table B-1. (continued) Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacements Parts (U.S.)  
Lucent  
Lucent  
Technologies  
Authorized  
Technologies  
National Parts  
Sale Center  
1
Dealer  
System Telephones and Accessories:  
1-800-222-7278  
PARTNER Endeavor-34D corded telephone  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PARTNER Endeavor-18D corded telephone  
PARTNER Endeavor-18 corded telephone  
PARTNER Endeavor-6 corded telephone  
Backup/Restore PC Card  
*
*
*
*
*
*
ASA/DXD Announcement PC Card  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card  
PARTNER-CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer  
Button label package (specify telephone model)  
Button label package (PARTNER-CA48 Intercom  
Autodialer)  
Telephone Wall Mount Kit for PARTNER Endeavor-6  
*
*
Telephone Wall Mount Kit for PARTNER Endeavor-18 and  
-18D  
Telephone Wall Mount Kit for PARTNER Endeavor-34D  
Handset (AB1A) Standard for PARTNER-model phones  
*
*
*
*
*
Amplified handset (K6S) Optional for hard-of-hearing users  
with PARTNER Endeavor phones  
Handset cord 9 ft., coiled Connects handset to telephone  
*
*
*
*
Telephone mounting cord (D4BU) connects phone to wall  
jack or jack panel. Specify length: 2, 7, or 14 ft.  
Modular telephone extension cord -8 connector. Extends  
the D4BU mounting cords. Specify length: 14, 25, 50, 75, or  
100 ft.  
*
1. To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer, check your local telephone  
directory’s yellow pages.  
*
Indicates that you can obtain the item from this source.  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Dial Form  
Speed Dial Form  
This appendix contains a Speed Dial Form to be photocopied and handed out to  
system users. It provides space for System and Personal Speed Dial numbers.  
For instructions on programming and using System and Personal Speed Dial  
numbers, see Chapter 5.  
We suggest that you fill in a photocopy of the form, leaving the blank original in the  
book, in case you need to distribute revisions in the future.  
To Dial:  
On a system phone, press i + Code.  
On a standard phone, press # + Code while receiving intercom dial tone.  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Speed Dial Form  
Table C-1. PARTNER Endeavor System Speed Dial Numbers  
Code  
600  
601  
602  
603  
604  
605  
606  
607  
608  
609  
610  
611  
612  
613  
614  
615  
616  
617  
618  
619  
620  
621  
622  
623  
624  
625  
626  
627  
Name/Company  
*
Telephone Number  
Code  
650  
651  
652  
653  
654  
655  
656  
657  
658  
669  
660  
661  
662  
663  
664  
665  
666  
667  
668  
669  
670  
671  
672  
673  
674  
675  
676  
677  
Name/Company  
*
Telephone Number  
(continued)  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Dial Form  
Table C-1 (continued). PARTNER Endeavor System Speed Dial Numbers  
Code  
628  
629  
630  
631  
632  
633  
634  
635  
636  
637  
638  
639  
640  
641  
642  
643  
644  
645  
646  
647  
648  
649  
Name/Company  
*
Telephone Number  
Code  
678  
679  
680  
681  
682  
683  
684  
685  
686  
687  
688  
689  
690  
691  
692  
693  
694  
695  
696  
697  
698  
699  
Name/Company  
*
Telephone Number  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Dial Form  
Table C-2. PARTNER Endeavor Personal Speed Dial Numbers  
Code  
80  
Name/Company  
*
Telephone Number  
Code  
90  
Name/Company  
*
Telephone Number  
81  
91  
82  
92  
83  
93  
84  
94  
85  
95  
86  
96  
87  
97  
88  
98  
89  
99  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Glossary  
Numbers  
362EC module  
The Lucent technologies equipment component has line jacks for connecting three outside lines  
and up to eight extensions to the control unit. There are eight Enhanced Tip Ring (ETR) ports per  
362EC expansion module. The top six station ports support only ETR devices and the bottom two  
ports support both ETR and Tip Ring (T/R) devices.  
A
Auto Dial button  
A programmable telephone button that lets you dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button.  
An Auto Dial button can be used to store a feature code, or a phone number so that it can be dialed  
with one touch. See also Programmable button.  
Auto Attendant  
An optional device that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller  
responses to a recorded announcement.  
Automated Attendant Service  
A voice messaging system feature that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension  
based on caller responses to a recorded announcement. See also Auto Attendant and Voice  
Automatic System Answer (ASA)  
An optional system feature that causes incoming calls to be answered by the system if the  
receptionist cannot answer within a specified number of rings. The system plays a brief  
announcement and places the call on hold, continues ringing, or disconnects the call. See also  
Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial PC Card.  
Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial PC Card  
A Lucent Technologies proprietary PC Card (purchased separately) that is used like a floppy disk to  
store Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial messages. See also, Automatic System  
GL-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
Auxiliary equipment  
Telecommunications equipment (other than system phones) that can be connected to the control  
unit. Auxiliary equipment includes industry-standard devices that can connect directly to the public  
telephone network (such as standard phones or fax machines), as well as devices that require the  
interface provided by the control unit.  
B
Background Music  
A feature that provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user’s  
work area. Background Music plays the pre-recorded material from the Music-On-Hold audio  
source.  
Backup  
The system and telephone programming settings can be saved on a Backup/Restore PC Card  
using either of two features: Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) or Backup  
Programming—Manual (#124).  
Backup/Restore PC Card  
A Lucent Technologies proprietary PC Card that is used like a floppy disk to back up system and  
telephone programming settings and to restore these settings if they become corrupted. This card  
must be inserted in the PARTNER Endeavor processor module before you use the system’s  
backup or restore features [Backup Programming—Automatic (#123), Backup Programming—  
Manual (#124), or Restore Programming (#125)]. See also PC Card.  
C
Call Answer Service  
A voice messaging system feature that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or  
transfer themselves to another extension.  
Call Assistant  
Call Coverage  
A feature that lets users send their intercom and transferred calls and calls on their owned lines to  
a covering extension when they are unable to answer calls.  
Call Park  
A feature that lets a user put a call on a special type of hold, so it can be picked up from any  
extension in the system.  
Call Waiting  
A feature that lets standard phone users receive notification of a second incoming call when they  
are busy on a call. The user can press the switchhook to put the first call on hold and answer the  
second call.  
Caller ID  
A feature that displays an incoming caller’s number (or name) on a system display phone. To get  
Caller ID, you must subscribe to the service (if it is available) from your local phone company and  
connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules.  
GL-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
Caller ID Inspect  
A feature that allows you to view incoming Caller ID or Call Coverage information on other lines  
while active on a call, without placing the call on hold or hanging up.  
Caller ID Name/Number  
A feature that allows you to toggle between a caller’s Caller ID name and Caller ID number.  
Caller ID service  
A subscription service available from some local telephone companies, providing the telephone  
number and/or name of the caller on lines that have the service.  
Calling Group  
A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously by dialing a group calling code. See also  
Calling restriction  
A feature that lets you control telephone use at specific extensions.  
Centralized Telephone Programming  
A method of telephone programming that lets you program individual extensions in the system from  
a system display phone at extension 10. Centralized Telephone Programming is an alternative to  
Extension Programming.  
CO Line  
Combination Extension  
An extension that has two devices connected to it. Combination extensions can connect two  
standard devices or a standard device and a system phone, but not two system phones.  
Control unit  
Made up of a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, and, optionally, a 2-Slot or a 5-Slot  
molded plastic carrier to hold additional system modules. The 5-Slot Carrier also has a cover. The  
control unit connects lines coming into your building to the extensions in your system, and also  
provides system features.  
D
DGC Group  
Direct Extension Dial  
An optional feature that enables outside callers to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly, without  
waiting for the receptionist to transfer the call. See also Automatic System Answer and Automatic  
Doorphone  
A Lucent Technologies proprietary phone that can be wall mounted outside your office or in a lobby  
to allow visitors to alert any number of system extensions by pressing a button. The doorphone  
includes a speaker and microphone, to allow two-way conversation between the doorphone and  
the phone that answers.  
Do Not Disturb  
A feature that prevents incoming calls from ringing at an extension. See also Send All Calls.  
GL-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
E
Extension  
An endpoint in the system that connects telephones or standard devices, which can be dialed  
using the i button. See also Programming Extension.  
Extension Jack  
The location on a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module and 362EC expansion modules that  
allows you to connect extension wiring to the control unit for phones (or other telecommunications  
devices).  
Extension Number  
The number assigned to each extension jack on a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module.  
Extension numbers are used for intercom calling.  
Extension Name Display  
A feature that lets users assign a name to their extension. The name appears along with the  
extension number on system display phones when users make an intercom call or a group call, or  
transfer a call.  
Extension Programming  
A method of telephone programming that lets users program their own extensions from their  
External Hotline  
A standard phone that is programmed to dial a predetermined outside number when a user lifts the  
handset. See also Hotline Phone.  
F
Fax Management Button  
A system phone button with lights that is programmed with the extension number of a fax machine.  
A user can monitor the lights next to this button to determine when the fax machine is in use,  
available, or not answering.  
Feature Phone  
An industry-standard phone that includes programmable buttons or other built-in features.  
G
Group Call Distribution  
A system setting that automatically directs incoming calls on specific lines to a Hunt Group. See  
GL-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
H
Hold Reminder Tone  
On system phones, a short beep that is generated for a call that is left on hold for longer than one  
minute. The tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved, or until the caller hangs  
up.  
Hotline phone  
A standard phone at an extension which rings another extension automatically when the handset is  
lifted. See also External Hotline.  
Hunt Group  
A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred calls in round-robin fashion. Calls to the  
hunt group go to the first available extension in the group, with the extension that answered most  
recently being the last one in the hunt order. See also Calling Group and VMS Hunt Group.  
Hybrid mode  
An operating mode in which outside lines are grouped together in pools. To access outside lines,  
users press pool buttons on their phones or enter the pool access code. In this mode, users do not  
know which lines they are using to make and receive calls. See also Key Mode and System Mode.  
I
Industry-Standard Device  
A telephone or other telecommunications device that can be connected directly to the public  
telephone network. See also Proprietary Device and Standard Phone.  
Inside Call  
See Intercom call.  
Intercom Autodialer  
An auxiliary device that can be connected to the system phones at extensions 10. The device has  
an Auto Dial button for each extension in the system, which can be used to dial or transfer calls to  
the extension with one touch.  
Intercom Auto Dial Button  
A button that is programmed to ring or page another extension whenever the button is pressed.  
The button can be used to call the extension or to transfer a call to the extension with one touch;  
the lights next to the button also show calling activity for the extension. See also Manual Signaling.  
Intercom Call  
A call that is made to another system extension.  
Internal Call  
See Intercom call.  
GL-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Glossary  
K
Key Extension  
An extension that has line buttons but not pool buttons. See also Key Mode and Pooled Extension.  
Key Mode  
An operating mode in which outside lines are assigned one per line button. To access outside lines,  
users press line buttons or enter a Direct Line Pickup code. See also Hybrid mode and System  
mode.  
L
Line  
The transmission path between your control unit and the local phone company’s Central Office,  
used for incoming and outgoing calls.  
Line Button  
A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific line for making calls. See  
also Key extension and Pooled extension.  
Line Hunting  
Line Jack  
The location on a PARTNER Endeavor processor module that allows you to connect outside lines  
to the control unit.  
Line Number  
The number assigned to each line jack on a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or a  
362EC expansion module.  
Line Pooling  
Line Reserve  
A system feature that lets you reserve a busy line or pool (by pressing the busy line or pool button  
without lifting the handset) so your phone beeps when the line or pool becomes free.  
M
Mailbox  
Manual Signaling  
A feature that lets a user signal an extension by pressing a programmed button. The phone at the  
target extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed. Alternatively, the Manual Signaling  
button can be used to ring or voice signal the target extension. See also Intercom Auto Dial button.  
GL-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
Music-On-Hold System  
Equipment that lets you play recorded music or messages to callers who are placed on hold. A  
music-on-hold audio source can be connected to the RCA jack on the processor module in the  
control unit. See also Background Music.  
N
Network Interface Jack  
A jack, generally located in your equipment room, that provides access to an outside line coming  
into your building from your local telephone company. A line cord from the network interface jack to  
a line jack on a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or a 362EC expansion module that  
connects the line to your system.  
Night Service  
A feature that automatically redirects calls received after hours or when a receptionist is not  
available to answer calls. (This feature also activates night service operation of the voice  
messaging system.) See also Password.  
O
One-Touch Intercom Calling button  
Outside Line  
Outside Pool  
P
Park  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module  
The Lucent Technologies equipment component that provides the software intelligence that  
controls the system’s features. This module may be a stand-alone unit, or it may be installed in the  
center slot of the 5-Slot Carrier or the leftmost slot of the 2-Slot Carrier. The top six station ports  
support only Enhanced Tip Ring (ETR) devices and the bottom two ports support both ETR and  
Tip Ring (T/R) devices.  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card  
An optional voice messaging service, provided on a PC Card, that allows users to record a  
greeting and callers to leave messages. Provides solutions for after-hour calls and backup for the  
receptionist.  
PARTNER Endeavor-Model Telephones  
GL-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer  
Password  
A four-digit code assigned by the System Manager that users can enter from a PARTNER- or  
MLS-model phone to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. See also  
PC Card  
A computer card that can be inserted in the PCMCIA slot on the PARTNER Endeavor processor  
Pickup Group  
A group of extensions for which calls to any extension in the group can be picked up, from any  
extension in the system, by dialing a group pickup code.  
Pool  
A group of outside lines used for making and receiving calls on pooled extensions. A pool typically  
contains lines of a similar type or purpose (WATS, FX, etc.) and is identified by a pool access code.  
The system supports four pools: a main pool and three auxiliary pools. See also Hybrid Mode, Pool  
Access Code, and Pooled Extension.  
Pool Access Code  
A three-digit code used to access outside lines in a specific pool. The main pool and each auxiliary  
pool are known to the system as 880, 881, 882, and 883, respectively. Users can either dial the  
pool access code or press a pool button representing one of the pools to make a call.  
Pool Button  
A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific pool for making calls. See  
also Pooled Extension.  
Pool Number  
See Pool Access Code.  
Pooled Extension  
An extension in Hybrid mode that has pool buttons or pool and line buttons. See also Hybrid Mode  
Programmable Button  
A telephone button that does not have a line or pool assigned; it can be set up to dial a number or  
access a feature.  
Programming  
Programming Extension  
An extension from which you can program the system; this can be either extension 10.  
Proprietary Device  
A telephone or other device that is designed to work with a specific system, and requires a special  
interface to connect to the public telephone network. For example, system phones are proprietary  
devices that can be used only with the control unit described in this guide. See also Industry-  
GL-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
R
RAU (Remote Administration Unit)  
An auxiliary device that lets you perform system programming from a remote location.  
Recall  
A system feature that sends a timed switchhook flash to let you “recall” a dial tone to make another  
call or to access a PBX or Centrex service. (Use Recall only on an outside call; using Recall on an  
intercom call disconnects the call.)  
Reorder Tone  
A fast busy signal that the system transmits to an extension when a user attempts to use a feature  
that is not available to that extension.  
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)  
A measure of the power it takes to ring a phone or other telecommunications device, usually shown  
on a label on the bottom of the device.  
Restore  
The reinstating of system and telephone programming settings that have been saved on a  
Backup/Restore PC Card using either Backup Programming—Automatic (#123) or Backup  
Programming—Manual (#124). If necessary, this backed up information can be restored using  
Restore Programming (#125).  
S
Send All Calls  
Lets you send calls immediately to Call Coverage or to the voice messaging system.  
Speed Dialing  
A feature that lets a user dial a telephone number quickly by dialing a short code.  
Standard Phone  
An industry-standard touch-tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home. Some  
standard phones include special feature buttons for frequently-used calling functions. See also  
Star Codes  
Codes, typically dialed before an outgoing call, that provide special services from the local phone  
company Central Office. For example, *67 enables a dialer to block the sending of Caller ID  
information to the called party.  
Station  
Station Lock  
A feature that lets a user lock his or her extension to prevent other users from making outside calls  
from the locked extension.  
Subscriber  
(1) On a voice messaging system, a user who has a mailbox in the system. (2) A user who has  
access to an outside line with special features, such as Caller ID.  
GL-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
System  
The Lucent Technologies control unit and system phones that you purchased, plus all other  
telecommunications devices that are connected to your control unit.  
System Manager  
The person in your business who is responsible for managing your system, including system  
programming.  
System Phones  
The Lucent Technologies telephones that are specifically designed for use with PARTNER  
systems. Models include the PARTNER Endeavor-34D, PARTNER Endeavor-18D, PARTNER  
Endeavor-18, PARTNER Endeavor-6, PARTNER-34D, PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-18,  
PARTNER-6, MDW 9000, MDW 9010, and MDW 9030P phones.  
System Programming  
Procedures that allow you to customize system settings for your business. System Programming  
requires a system display phone and must be done from extension 10.  
System Restore  
T
Talk-Back  
Telephone Programming  
Procedures that allow you to customize extensions to meet the needs of individual users, including  
the assignment of features to programmable buttons. Telephone Programming can be done either  
centrally or from the user’s own extension. See also Centralized Telephone Programming and  
U
Upgrade Card  
This card allows you to upgrade to a 5-slot carrier by using the PCMCIA slot on the PARTNER  
Endeavor 362 processor module only.  
V
VMS (Voice Messaging System)  
VMS Hunt Group  
Hunt Group 7, reserved by the system to identify extensions that are associated with the voice  
messaging system hardware. See also Group Call Distribution and Hunt Group.  
GL-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
Voice Interrupt on Busy  
A special intercom call that lets a user interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call.  
See also Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back.  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back  
A feature that lets the recipient of a voice interrupt on busy intercom call respond to the originator  
of that call. See also Voice Interrupt on Busy.  
Voice Mail Coverage  
A voice messaging system feature that provides Call Answer Service when a call is not answered  
by a covered extension. See also Call Answer Service.  
Voice Mail Service  
A voice messaging system feature that lets users retrieve messages and record greetings.  
Voice Mailbox  
A storage area for greetings and messages in a voice messaging system.  
Voice Messaging System (VMS)  
An optional call routing and messaging device that provides call coverage by answering calls and  
routing them to caller designated extensions. It also lets callers leave messages at unanswered  
extensions and lets subscribers retrieve their messages. (The system supports the PARTNER  
MAIL VS system, the PARTNER MAIL system, or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card.)  
W
Wake Up Service  
A special application feature that lets the receptionist at extension 10 schedule wake up or  
reminder calls for specific extensions.  
GL-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Glossary  
GL-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Index  
A
B
AA (Automated Attendant) Extensions (#607), 5-4  
Abbreviated Ringing (#305), 5-5  
Accidental Damage  
Background Music  
description, 5-35  
Backup, 6-9  
reducing risks, B-1  
Backup for Receptionist  
Adding Lines and Extensions, 2-3  
Adding New Pools, 2-8  
Auto Attendant, 4-8  
Backup Problems  
automatic, 6-9, 6-24 to 6-25  
Backup Programming  
Alarm  
backup failure, 6-9  
Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407), 5-7  
Amplified Handset, 4-3  
automatic (#123), 2-15, 5-37 to 5-38, 6-9, 6-24 to 6-25  
Answering a Call  
at your extension, 5-10  
identifying a call type by ringing pattern, 3-6, 3-9  
ringing at another extension, 5-51, 5-113  
Answering Machines, 4-4 to 4-8  
ASA/DXD Cards  
Backup/Restore PC Card, 1-2, 2-15  
inserting, 5-37 to 5-38  
problems with, 6-26  
removing, 5-37 to 5-38  
problems, 6-23  
Assigning Lines, 2-3  
Attendants, automated, 4-8  
Auto Answer Intercom (see Hands-Free Answer on Inter-  
Auto Attendant, 4-8  
Auto Attendant Extensions, 5-4  
Auto Dial Buttons, 2-7  
Backup-Failure Alarm, 6-9  
Batteries, 1-6, 6-5 to 6-8  
Battery Replacement, 6-5  
Bed and Breakfast Features  
outgoing call restriction button (#114), 2-11, 2-16, 5-162  
wake up service button (#115), 5-230  
Busy Extension Indication  
description, 2-22, 2-24, 5-13  
programming, 5-13, 5-14  
Busy Lamp Fields (BLF) Feature (see Light Patterns)  
Button Locations For Programming At Extension 10/11  
description, 2-19  
Auto Dial Numbers, 5-14  
Autodialers, intercom, 5-13  
description, 1-12, 2-25, 5-15  
problems, 6-13  
Automated Attendants (see Auto Attendant)  
Automatic Backup  
Buttons  
auto dial, 2-10, 2-24  
intercom, 1-8, 3-3  
line, 1-8  
programming, 2-22  
system phone, 1-8  
problems, 6-24  
Buttons and Indicators, 3-2  
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304), 5-16  
Automatic Line Selection, 2-21, 5-18  
Automatic System Answer  
button (#111),description, 5-21  
delay (#110), 5-24  
C
lines (#204), 5-26  
Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer, 1-12, 5-13  
Call Coverage (F20, XX, XX), 5-41  
Call Coverage (#116) Rings, 5-45  
Call Follow-Me  
mode (#121), 5-28  
record/playback, 5-30  
Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial PC  
Card, 1-7  
description, 5-46 to 5-48  
Automatic VMS Cover (#310), 5-33  
Auxiliary Equipment  
light patterns, 3-5  
Call Forwarding  
adjust system settings, 4-4  
example setups, 4-1 to 4-24  
overview, 1-13  
description, 5-46 to 5-48  
light patterns, 3-5  
Call Handling  
programming for, 2-13  
features, 3-14  
Call Intercept Feature, 4-4  
requirements, 1-13  
with night service, 4-20  
IN-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
Call Park, 5-49  
overview, 1-5  
Call Pickup, 5-51  
stand-alone, 1-3  
Call Restriction, outgoing (#401), 5-160  
Call Waiting (#316), 5-52  
Caller, 6-12  
Connecting Standard Devices, 1-14  
Control Unit  
definition, 1-3  
Copy Settings (#399), 2-6, 5-65  
Copying Settings, 2-6  
Coverage, 5-221 to 5-223  
Covering Calls, 5-41  
Credit Card Scanners, 4-9  
Customer, 6-2  
Customer Self Service Center, 6-2  
Customer Self Service Center on the Internet, 6-2  
Customizing Extensions, 2-5  
Cycle Programming Method, 2-19  
Caller ID  
call waiting, with, 5-55  
description, 5-54  
device, 4-3  
information, viewing, 5-54, 5-56  
modules required for, 1-5  
Caller ID Inspect, 5-56  
Caller ID Name Display  
description, 5-58  
Caller ID Type (#122), 5-59  
Calling  
extensions simultaneously, 5-61, 5-105  
intercom (inside), 5-142  
outside, 5-141  
D
Calling Group, 5-61  
Calling Group Extensions (#502), 5-61  
Calls  
can’t make outside call, 6-16  
Calls Automatically Answered, 6-19  
Capabilities, system, 1-1  
Capacities  
specifications, A-1  
Capacities, system, 1-7  
Carrier  
Date, system, 2-3  
Date, system (#101), 5-199  
Day, system, 2-3  
Day, system (#102), 5-200  
Dead Phones, 6-31, 6-32  
Delayed Call Handling, 4-23  
Delayed Ring, 5-139  
Dial Mode (#201), 5-67  
Dial Tone  
2-Slot, 2-2  
5-Slot, 2-2  
intercom, 3-6, 3-10, 5-123  
outside, 3-6, 3-10  
Centralized Telephone Programming, 2-1, 2-26 to 2-28  
Changing System Settings, 2-1, 2-2, 2-6, 2-9, 2-10  
Clock, changing system, 2-3, 2-7, 5-199 to 5-200, 5-208  
Combination Extension  
problems with, 6-21  
using, 3-13  
Comments  
sending, viii  
Components  
standard phones, 3-10  
system phones, 3-6  
Dial-code Features, 3-15  
Dialing Restrictions, 2-9  
Dialing Restrictions and Permissions  
disallowed phone numbers, 5-81, 5-82  
emergency phone numbers, 5-94  
fax machine, for, 4-13  
line access, 5-130  
batteries, 1-6  
long-distance, for, 5-209  
outside lines, controlling calls on, 2-11  
PBX/Centrex services with, 2-9  
pooled extensions, for, 5-170  
programming, 2-10  
description, 1-3  
modules, 1-5  
PC Card slot, 1-6  
telephones, 1-10 to 1-12  
Components, system  
description, 1-3  
star codes with, 2-10  
summary of, 2-10  
Conference  
call, making a, 5-62  
types of outgoing calls, 5-160  
Dimensions and Weights, A-1  
specifications, A-1  
Direct Department Calling (see Hunt Groups)  
Direct Extension Dial  
conf button, 5-62  
drop, 5-64  
limit outside participants, 5-165  
outside restriction, 5-165  
Configurations  
button, 5-68  
2-Slot, 1-5, 2-2  
5-Slot, 1-5, 2-2  
extensions, maximum, 1-5  
lines, maximum, 1-7  
button (#113), 5-68  
delay, 5-71  
delay (#112), 5-71  
IN-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
lines, 5-72  
button locations for programming, 2-19  
programming from, 2-1  
record/playback, 5-74  
Direct Facility Termination (see Line)  
Direct Group Calling, 5-222  
Direct Line Pickup  
active line, 5-77  
idle line, 5-79  
Direct Programming Method, 2-19  
Direct Station Select (see Auto Dial Buttons and Intercom  
programming overlays, using with, 2-16  
Extension Jack, A-1  
specifications, A-1  
Extension Name Display, 2-21, 5-98  
Extension Programming, 2-1, 2-28  
Extension, locking, 2-11  
Extension, transfer return (#306), 5-211  
Extensions  
Disallowed List Assignments (#405), 5-81  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404), 5-82  
Display, 6-11  
maximum, 1-7  
External Hotline (#311), 5-100  
Extra Alerts, 4-2  
assigning a name to, 5-98  
extension name, 5-86, 5-98  
features, 5-85  
F
Display Extension Name, 2-21  
Display Language (#303), 5-87  
Display Phone  
Fax Line Saver, 4-14  
Fax Machine Extensions (#601), 5-102  
Fax Machines  
for programming, 2-1, 2-16, 2-19, 2-26  
for receptionist, 2-22  
Distinctive Ring (#308), 5-88  
Do Not Disturb  
description, 5-89  
Doorphones  
connecting to Tip/Ring ports, 2-14  
description, 4-1  
doorphone alert extensions (#606), 5-91  
doorphone extensions (#604/#605), 5-92  
programming for, 5-91, 5-92, 5-93  
Drop, conference, 5-64  
dialing restrictions, 4-13  
dialing restrictions for, 4-13  
end and receive, 4-12  
example setups, 4-12, 4-13, 4-16  
fax management, 4-11  
line saver, 4-12  
programming for, 5-13, 5-102  
send and receive, 4-16  
setting up, 4-12  
single, 4-12  
transferring calls to, 4-12  
using, 4-10  
Dropping Parties from a Conference Call, 5-62, 5-64  
Fax Management Button, 5-102  
Fax Management Feature, 4-11  
Feature Phones, 3-12  
Features  
E
hospitality, 2-16  
Electromagnetic Interference Filter, 4-3  
Emergency Phone Number List (#406), 5-94  
Enhanced Tip Ring Ports, 1-13  
Exclusive Hold, 5-96  
Features and Capabilities, 1-1  
Feedback Form, viii  
Follow-Me, 5-46  
Extension  
Forwarding Calls, 5-46  
adding an, 2-8  
5-Slot carrier  
combination, 3-13, 6-21  
copying settings, 2-6  
configuration overview, 1-5  
customizing an, 2-5  
groups, 2-13  
G
jacks, 2-2  
number, shared, 3-13  
numbering, 2-2  
receptionist, 2-22  
GCD (see Group Call Distribution)  
Group Call Distribution (#206), 5-103  
Group Calling, 5-61, 5-105  
Group Hunting, 5-109, 5-121, 5-222  
Group Paging, 5-105  
restricting access to a line, 2-11  
restricting outside dialing, 2-11  
swapping, 2-8  
transfer return, 5-211  
Extension 10/11, 2-1, 2-25  
Group Pickup, 5-113  
Groups  
IN-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
In-Range Out-of-Building (IROB) protectors, 4-3  
Inside Call, making an, 5-142  
night service, 5-157  
overview, 2-13  
Intercom Auto Dial Button, 3-3, 5-13  
Intercom Autodialer, 1-12, 2-25, 5-13  
Intercom Call, making an, 5-142  
Intercom Dial Tone (#309), 5-123  
Internal Hotline (see Hotline (#603)  
Internet  
setting up, 2-13  
customer self service center, 6-2  
IROB (see In-Range Out-of-Building Protectors)  
H
Handset  
for hard-of-hearing, 4-3  
J
using, 3-6  
volume controls, 3-8  
Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI), 3-7  
Hard-of-hearing Handsets, 4-3  
Hardware, 1-3, 1-13  
Jacks  
types per module, 2-2  
Joining a Call, 5-124  
Hardware Considerations, 2-2  
Headsets, 4-3  
Hearing Problems, 6-19  
Help  
troubleshooting, 6-3  
help, 6-3  
HFAI (see Hands-Free Answer on Intercom)  
Hold Button, 5-114  
K
Key Extensions, 5-128  
Key Mode, 1-7  
Hold Disconnect Time (#203), 5-117  
Hold Reminder Tone, 5-96, 5-115  
Hold, exclusive, 5-96  
Holding a Call, 5-96, 5-114  
Hospitality Features, 2-16  
Hotel/Motel Features  
L
Labeling  
line and extension jacks, 2-2  
description, 2-16  
system phones, 2-25  
outgoing call restriction button (#114), 5-162  
wake up service button (#115), 5-230  
Hotline  
Language, display (#303), 5-87  
Last Number Redial, 5-126  
Light Patterns, 3-3  
external, 5-100  
description of, 3-3  
inside front cover, 6-3  
Hotline (#603), 5-119  
Hunt Group  
fax management button, 4-11  
intercom auto dial button, 2-24  
Line  
adding to system, 2-7  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505), 5-121  
assigning to extensions, 2-3, 5-132, 5-158  
jacks, 2-2  
Hunt Groups  
description, 2-13  
programming  
using, 5-109  
numbering, 2-2  
pooling, 2-3  
restricting use at individual extension, 5-130  
type, 5-67  
Hunt Groups (see also Group Call Distribution)  
Hybrid Mode, 1-7  
Line Access Restriction (#302), 5-130  
Line Assignment (#301)  
default on PARTNER Endeavor phones, 5-132  
description, 5-132 to 5-135  
Line Coverage Extension (#208), 5-136  
Line Ownership, 5-136  
Line Pickup, 5-77  
I
Idle Line Preference (see Automatic Line Selection)  
Immediate Call Answering, 2-22  
Indicators and Buttons, 3-2  
Line Ringing, 2-21  
caller ID information, effect on display of, 5-138  
description, 5-138  
Industry Standard Devices (see Standard Devices)  
IN-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Index  
Line Selection  
automatic, 2-21  
N
Line Selection, automatic, 5-18  
Lines, 2-3  
maximum, 1-7  
Name Display, 5-98  
Night Service  
Lines, number of (#104), 5-158  
Lists  
auxiliary equipment with, 4-20  
dialing restrictions with, 2-11  
programming, 5-155  
allowed phone numbers, 5-7  
disallowed phone numbers, 5-82  
emergency phone numbers, 5-94  
Locking an Extension, 5-196  
Logging Center ID Calls [see Caller ID Logging and Dialing  
(F23)]  
using, 5-155  
with password, 5-201  
Night Service Button (#503)  
description, 5-154  
light patterns, 3-5  
Night Service Group Extensions (#504), 5-157  
nnnn, 6-13  
M
Number of Lines (#104), 5-158  
Numbering of Lines and Extensions, 2-2  
Maintenance, B-1  
Making a Call, 5-140  
Manual Signaling, 5-145  
Marked System Speed Dial Numbers, 2-12, 5-205  
Maximum Extensions, 1-7  
Maximum Lines, 1-7  
O
Message Light On/Off, 5-147, 5-149  
Message Waiting (see Standard Phones)  
Microphone, 3-6  
Off-Premises Range Extender, 4-3  
One-touch Transfer (see Auto Dial Numbers)  
Optional Equipment, 1-13, 2-13, 4-1  
Ordering  
Microphone (Mic) Button, 3-6  
Modems  
equipment, B-3  
send and receive, 4-19  
send only, 4-18  
standalone for placing calls, 4-18  
Module  
specifications, A-1  
Modules  
reference materials and books, B-3  
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401), 5-160  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button (#114)  
description, 5-162  
light patterns, 3-5  
Out-of-building Extension Requirements, 4-3  
Outside Auto Dial numbers, 5-14  
Outside Call, making an, 5-141  
Outside Conference Denial (#109), 5-165  
Outside Lines  
362EC, 1-5  
description, 1-5  
numbering order for extensions and lines, 2-2  
PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor, 1-3, 1-5, 2-2, 2-13  
PARTNER MAIL VS, 1-1  
processor, 1-5  
controlling calls, 2-11  
Outside Lines or Pools  
MOH (see Music-on-hold)  
Monitoring Call Activity, 2-24, 5-13  
Monitoring Pool Activity, 5-170  
Multiple Answering Machines, 4-6  
Music On Hold (#602)  
restricting access, 2-11  
Outward Restriction [see Outgoing Call Restriction (#401)]  
Overriding Dialing Restrictions, 2-12  
Owner  
line, 5-103  
as background music, 5-151  
description, 4-2, 5-151  
jack, 5-153  
programming, 5-152  
P
volume, setting system-wide, 5-153  
Music-On-Hold Volume (#614), 5-153  
Mute, 3-7  
Paging  
calling groups, 5-105  
PARTNER Endeavor-model phone, 5-105 to 5-109  
PARTNER Endeavor Processor Module, 1-5, 2-13  
PARTNER Endeavor-34D Telephone  
buttons and indicators, 3-2  
for receptionist, 2-16  
IN-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
illustration, 2-18  
mode, 2-19  
PARTNER PassageWay®Solution, 4-2  
options, 2-21  
PARTNER Phones  
overview, 2-1  
system phones, 1-10  
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card, 1-1, 1-7, 2-7, 2-16,  
PBX/Centrex, support for, 2-9  
Quick Reference Charts, End of book  
receptionist extension, 2-22  
remote, 2-1  
PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer, 1-12  
Password, system (#403), 5-201  
PBX or Centrex Services, 2-9  
PC Card slot, 1-6  
restore, 2-15  
restrictions and permissions, 2-10  
voice messaging system, 2-23  
PC Cards, 2-15  
Permissions, dialing, 2-12  
Personal Answering Machine, 4-7  
Personal Speed Dial Numbers, 2-22, 5-165  
Phone Features, 1-11  
Picking up a Held Call, 5-114, 5-116  
Pickup  
Programming Overlays Illustration, 2-18  
Properly, 6-13  
Pulse Dial, 5-67, 5-185  
Purpose of the Guide, vii  
call, 5-51  
Line, 5-77  
Q
line, 5-79  
Pickup Group Extensions (#501), 5-169  
Placing a Call, 5-140  
Quick Reference Cards (for system phones), B-3  
Quick Reference Charts, End of book  
Playback  
automatic system answer, 5-30  
direct extension dial, 5-74  
Pool Access Restriction (#315), 5-170  
Pool Buttons, 5-172  
Pool Extension Assignment (#314), 5-172  
Pool Line Assignment (#207), 5-175  
Pooled Extensions, 2-4  
assigning lines, 5-172  
R
RAU (see Remote Administration Unit)  
Recall  
programming feature on a button, 5-179  
programming function in phone number, 5-190  
using, 5-180  
assigning pools, 5-172  
buttons, 5-172  
restricting, 5-170  
Recall Button  
Pools, adding new, 2-8  
Power Failure, 3-8, 6-4  
Privacy  
description, 5-16, 5-177  
light patterns, 3-5  
Privacy, Automatic Extension (#304), 5-16  
Problems, solving, 6-3  
Processor Module  
description, 5-179  
switchhook, use instead of, 3-10  
Recall feature  
problems, 6-20  
Recall Timer Duration (#107), 5-181  
Receptionist Extension, 2-22  
Redial  
last number, 5-126  
save number, 5-186  
description, 1-5, 2-2  
Programmable Buttons, 2-22, 3-2  
Programming, 2-3  
Reference Materials, B-3  
Reminder Service, 5-230  
Remote Administration Unit (RAU), 2-21  
REN (Ringer Equivalence Number), 1-13, 1-14  
Repair, B-1  
Replacement Parts, B-3  
Resetting the System, 5-203, 6-33  
Restore Problems, 6-25  
Restore Programming (#125)  
calls in progress, effect on, 5-182  
description, 2-16, 5-182  
after installation, 2-6  
auxiliary equipment, 2-13  
backup, 2-16  
buttons, 2-22  
centralized telephone, 2-1, 2-26  
changing type, 2-28  
groups, 2-13  
initial setup, 2-2  
lines, 2-7  
methods, 2-19, 2-25  
IN-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
restore file, choosing manual or automatic, 5-182  
Restriction  
line access (#302), 5-130  
outgoing call (#401), 5-160  
Restrictions, dialing  
Speaker  
on standard phone, 3-11  
on system phone, 3-8  
Speaker (Spkr) Button, 3-3  
Speakerphone  
disallowed phone numbers, 2-12, 5-81, 5-82  
emergency phone numbers, 5-82  
fax machine, for, 4-13  
line access, 5-130  
performance tips, using, 3-8  
separate, 4-2  
Special Dialing Functions, 5-190  
Specifications  
locking an extension, 5-196  
overriding, 2-12  
362EC module, A-1  
Endeavor processor module, A-1  
Speed Dial Form, C-1  
Speed Dialing  
PBX/Centrex services with, 2-9  
pool access, 5-170  
star codes, 2-10, 5-83  
summary of, 2-10  
auto dial buttons, 5-13  
personal speed dial numbers, 5-165  
system speed dial numbers, 5-205  
Standard Devices  
Retrieving a Held Call, 5-114  
Ring on Transfer (#119), 5-184  
Ring, distinctive (#308), 5-88  
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN), 1-13, 3-14  
Ringer Volume Controls, 3-3  
Ringing  
answering machines, 4-4  
auto attendant, 4-8  
credit card scanner, 4-9  
fax machines, 4-10  
abbreviated (#305), 5-5  
limitations, 1-13, 3-10  
modems, 4-18  
line, 5-138  
Ringing Patterns  
problems with, 4-4  
telephones, 1-12, 3-8  
voice messaging system, 4-20  
Standard Phones  
standard phones, 3-9  
system phones, 3-6  
Ringing, line, 2-21  
automatic line selection for, 5-1, 5-18  
Ringing/Idle Line Preference (see Automatic Line Selection)  
Rings  
call handling, 3-14  
call waiting, 3-9  
transfer return (#105), 5-213  
VMS cover (#117), 5-221  
Rotary  
caller ID information, 3-11  
connecting, 1-14  
connecting to Tip/Ring ports, 3-9  
dial tones, 3-10  
dial-code features, 3-15  
display, 3-11  
does not ring, 6-14  
phones, 1-12  
Rotary Dialing Timeout (#108), 5-185  
feature buttons on, 3-12  
feature phones, 3-8  
limitations, 1-13, 3-10  
message light problem, 6-15  
message waiting compatibility, 5-147, 5-149  
overview, 1-12, 3-8  
S
SAC (see Send All Calls)  
Safety  
power failure, for use during, 3-8, 6-4  
problems with, 6-15  
instructions, viii  
ringing patterns, 3-9  
Safety Requirements  
specifications, A-3  
Save Number Redial, 5-186  
Self Service Center on the Internet, customer, 6-2  
Send All Calls, 5-188  
Set  
rotary, 1-12  
speaker on, 3-11  
switchhook, 3-10, 5-179  
system messages, 3-11  
telephones, 1-12  
using, 3-8  
date, 5-199  
time, 5-208  
Settings, Copy (#399), 5-65  
Settings, copying, 2-6  
Setup, initial, 2-2  
Sharing an Extension, 3-13  
IN-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
Star Code Dial Delay (#410)  
description, 2-10, 5-192  
programming for marked system speed dialing, 5-193  
Station Lock, 5-195  
star codes, using with marked numbers, 2-10  
System Time (#103), 5-208  
Station Programming (see Extension Programming)  
Station Unlock, 5-198  
Support, customer, 6-3, B-1  
Swapping Extensions, 2-8  
Switchhook Flash, 3-10, 5-179, 5-181  
System, 6-12  
T
Talk Back, 5-226  
Telephone Programming  
at extension, 2-28  
specifications, A-1  
auto dial buttons, 2-22, 5-13  
centrally (at extension 10 or 11), 2-26  
lines, 2-21  
System Answer, 5-26  
System Clock, 2-3, 2-7  
System Components, 1-3  
System Date (#101), 5-199  
System Day (#102), 5-200  
System Modes, 1-7  
System Modules, 1-5  
System Password (#403), 5-201  
System Phones  
methods, 2-25  
overview, 2-1, 2-21  
receptionist extension, 2-22  
speed dialing, 2-22  
Telephones, 1-10  
touch-tone phone, 3-8  
using, 3-8  
autodialer problem, 6-13  
buttons, 3-2  
Time, system, 2-3  
call handling, 3-14  
Time, system (#103), 5-208  
Timed Flash, 5-179, 5-181  
Tip Ring Devices, 1-13  
caller ID not shown, 6-12  
definition, 1-10  
dial code features, 3-14  
dial tones, 3-6  
Tip Ring Ports, 1-13  
Toll Call Prefix (#402), 5-209  
Toll Restrictions (see Dialing Restrictions and  
display incorrect, 6-11  
labeling sheets, 2-25  
lights, 3-3  
Touch-tone Dial, 5-67, 5-185  
Touch-Tone Enable  
microphone, 3-6  
overview, 1-10  
programming feature on a button, 5-210  
programming function in phone number, 5-190  
Transfer Button, 5-215  
Transfer Return Display Message, 5-216  
Transfer Return Extension (#306), 5-211  
Transfer Return Rings (#105), 5-213  
Transfer Ringing, 3-6, 3-9, 5-216  
Transfer, one-touch, 5-217  
Transfer, one-touch (see Auto Dial Numbers)  
Transferring a call  
privacy displays, 6-12  
problems with, 6-11  
programming  
Telephones (see System Phones and Standard  
ringing patterns, 3-6  
speaker, 3-6, 3-8  
System Problems, 6-30  
System Programming  
changing, 2-6, 2-16  
to a calling group, 5-105  
to another extension, 5-215  
to fax machine, 4-12  
individual procedures, 5-1  
initial, 2-2  
Troubleshooting, 6-1  
methods of, 2-19  
options, 2-10, 2-21  
overview, 2-1  
U
PBX/Centrex support for, 2-9  
System Programming (see Programming)  
System Reset (#728), 5-203  
System Restore  
Using the Guide, vii  
problems, 6-28  
System Settings, changing, 2-6, 2-16  
System Setup, 2-3  
V
System Speed Dial Numbers  
description, 5-205  
VMS Cover  
marking to override dial restrictions, 2-13  
IN-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Index  
description, 5-136, 5-219  
light patterns, 3-5  
VMS Cover Rings (#117), 5-221  
VMS Hunt Delay (#506), 5-222  
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507), 5-223  
Voice Interrupt On Busy (#312), 5-224  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Call  
description, 3-6, 5-224  
responding to a, 5-226  
Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back  
description, 5-226  
light patterns, 3-5  
Voice Mailbox Transfer, 5-228  
Voice Messaging Systems  
delayed call handling, 4-23  
overview, 4-22  
reference materials, B-4  
sending calls, 5-188  
summary of procedures, 2-14  
Voice-signaling, 3-6, 3-7, 5-105, 5-109  
Volume Controls, 3-3  
W
Wake Up Service Button (#115), 5-230  
Warranty Information, B-1, B-2, B-3  
Wildcard Character, 5-7, 5-82  
Wiring  
specifications, A-3  
Z
IN-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
IN-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Centralized Telephone Programming Quick Reference  
Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11  
TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE  
AT THE SAME EXTENSION  
TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE  
PRESS f 0 0  
DIAL the new extension’s number  
TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO  
DIAL BUTTON  
After you program one feature, continue  
with the instructions in the box for the next  
feature  
PRESS s s c  
PRESS the programmed button  
DIAL the extension number to be programmed  
PRESS !  
TO CHANGE SETTING FOR  
ANOTHER EXTENSION  
Buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension  
light up to show the current Line Ringing setting; remaining  
buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or  
features  
TO END PROGRAMING MODE  
PRESS f 0 0  
PRESS c  
N OT E : Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
(p. 5-185)  
EXTENSION NAME DISPLAY  
PRESS left i (p. 5-115)  
Enter the character codes for the  
Codes” on p. 5-116)  
AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION  
PRESS * * (p. 5-20)  
PRESS the line/pool/intercom  
buttons in the desired order  
DIAL the phone number—up to 28 digits  
PRESS f  
DIAL a two-digit code  
(80-99)  
PRESS * *  
AUTO DIAL NUMBERS—OUTSIDE AND INSIDE  
(p. 5-15)  
Key Extension: Outside lines  
left i ✓  
PRESS a programmable button  
To program an extension number:  
2.0  
To program an outside number:  
PRESS left i  
Pooled Extension: Pool 880  
button 1, button 2, left  
i, right i ✓  
Pools 881-883, individual  
lines  
DIAL the phone number—up to 28  
digits including special  
DIAL the extension number (to  
ring the extension) or  
* plus the extension number  
(to voice-signal the extension)  
LINE RINGING  
(p. 5-157)  
PRESS each line or pool button until the desired ringing option  
appears in the display  
Immediate ring (green steady) Lines  
No ring (green fast flutter) Pools  
Delayed ring—starts ringing after 20 seconds (green slow flashing)  
System Features  
DIRECT LINE PICKUP–ACTIVE LINE  
PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-95)  
DIAL left i 6 8  
ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 1 2  
(p. 5-6)  
CALL PICKUP  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS left i 6  
(p. 5-54)  
DIAL the two-digit extension number  
DIRECT LINE PICKUP–IDLE LINE  
PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-97)  
DIAL left i 8  
BACKGROUND MUSIC  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 1 9  
(p. 5-37)  
(p. 5-44)  
CALLER ID CALL LOGGING & DIALING  
PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-66)  
PRESS f 2 3  
CALL COVERAGE  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 2 0  
DO NOT DISTURB  
(p. 5-107)  
CALLER ID INSPECT  
(p. 5-60)  
2.0  
PRESS a programmable button with lights  
PRESS f 0 1  
PRESS a programmable button with lights  
PRESS f 1 7  
DIAL (optional) two-digit originating  
extension number  
EXCLUSIVE HOLD  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 0 2  
(p. 5-114)  
DIAL (optional) two-digit covering  
CALLER ID NAME DISPLAY  
PRESS a programmable button with lights  
PRESS f 1 6  
(p. 5-70)  
extension number  
CALL FORWARDING/CALL FOLLOW-ME  
PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-49)  
PRESS f 1 1  
GROUP CALLING—RING/PAGE (p. 5-126)  
For ringing the group:  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS left i 7  
DIAL a Calling Group number (1-4)  
For paging the group:  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS left i * 7  
DIAL a Calling Group number (1-4)  
CONFERENCE DROP  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 0 6  
(p. 5-77)  
(p. 5-78)  
DIAL (optional) two-digit originating  
extension number  
DIAL (optional) two-digit destination  
extension number  
CONTACT CLOSURE 1  
PRESS a programmable button  
DIAL left f 4 1  
CONTACT CLOSURE 2  
(p. 5-78)  
PRESS a programmable button  
DIAL left f 4 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Features Continued  
GROUP HUNTING–RING/VOICE SIGNAL  
For ringing the first available extension:  
PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-129)  
PRESS left i 7 7  
DIAL a Hunt Group number (1-7)  
For voice signaling the first available extension:  
PRESS a programmable button  
MANUAL SIGNALING  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 1 3  
(p. 5-165)  
SIMULTANEOUS PAGING  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS left i * 7 0  
(p. 5-210)  
(p. 5-223)  
DIAL the two-digit extension number (to ring  
extension) or  
STATION LOCK  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 2 1  
DIAL * plus the two-digit extension number  
(to voice-signal the extension)  
PRESS left i * 7 7  
DIAL a Hunt Group number (1-6)  
MESSAGE LIGHT OFF  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 1 0  
(p. 5-167)  
TOUCH-TONE ENABLE  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 0 8  
(p. 5-238)  
(p. 5-247)  
GROUP PICKUP  
(p. 5-132)  
DIAL (optional) two-digit extension number  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS left i 6 6  
DIAL a Pickup Group number (1-4)  
VMS COVER  
PRESS a programmable button with lights  
PRESS f 1 5  
MESSAGE LIGHT ON  
(p. 5-169)  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 0 9  
DIAL (optional) two-digit extension number  
LAST NUMBER REDIAL  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 0 5  
(p. 5-145)  
VOICE INTERRUPT  
ON BUSY TALK-BACK  
PRESS a programmable button with lights  
PRESS f 1 8  
(p. 5-254)  
PRIVACY (p. 5-196)  
PRESS a programmable button with lights  
PRESS f 0 7  
LOUDSPEAKER PAGING  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS left i 7 0  
(p. 5-159)  
VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER (p. 5-255)  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 1 4  
RECALL  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 0 3  
(p. 5-198)  
(p. 5-206)  
SAVE NUMBER REDIAL  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS f 0 4  
= Factory setting  
= Button with lights required  
= Button with lights recommended  
= PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later  
2.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Programming Quick Reference  
Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11  
TO START SYSTEM  
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING  
PRESS f 0 0  
TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE  
DIAL # and three-digit procedure code  
Example: # 1 0 1 for System Date  
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM  
TO CYCLE THROUGH  
PROGRAMMING  
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES  
AVAILABLE SETTINGS  
PRESS D or d  
TO RETURN TO FACTORY  
SETTING  
PRESS f 0 0  
PRESS s  
PRESS s  
PRESS N or P  
N OT E S: Procedures #399, #609,  
and #728—shown below in dashed  
boxes—are skipped when cycling.  
PRESS r  
System  
Lines  
DIAL MODE  
(p. 5-84)  
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL LINES  
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER  
2.0  
SYSTEM DATE  
(p. 5-227)  
BUTTON  
(p. 5-23)  
DIAL #201  
DIAL a system line number  
2.0  
(p. 5-90)  
DIAL #205  
DIAL #101  
DIAL the date in MMDDYY form  
DIAL a system line number  
DIAL #111  
DIAL 1 = Touch-Tone ✓  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
2 = Rotary  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
3 = Select Button then press  
PRESS n to program another line  
PRESS n to program another line  
SYSTEM DAY  
(p. 5-228)  
a programmable button  
DIAL #102  
HOLD DISCONNECT TIME  
GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION  
DIAL 1 = Sunday ✓  
5 = Thursday  
6 = Friday  
2.0  
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL DELAY  
2 = Monday  
DIAL #203  
(p. 5-136)  
DIAL #206  
(p. 5-124)  
3 = Tuesday  
7 = Saturday  
DIAL a system line number  
DIAL 00 = No Detection  
01 = 50 msec  
DIAL #112  
(p. 5-88)  
DIAL a group number  
(1–6, 7 for VMS)  
DIAL a system line number  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
3 = VMS Line Cover (only for  
hunt group 7)  
4 = Wednesday  
DIAL a ring delay number (0–9)  
= 2 rings  
02 = 100 msec  
03 = 150 msec  
04 = 200 msec  
05 = 250 msec  
06 = 300 msec  
07 = 350 msec  
08 = 400 msec  
09 = 450 msec  
10 = 500 msec  
11 = 550 msec  
12 = 600 msec  
SYSTEM TIME  
(p. 5-236)  
DIAL #103  
DIAL the time in HHMM 24-hour  
military format  
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON  
2.0  
DIAL #113  
(p. 5-59)  
PRESS n to program another line  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
3 = Select Button then press  
NUMBER OF LINES  
(p. 5-178)  
a programmable button  
2.0  
POOL LINE ASSIGNMENT  
*See IMPORTANT below  
DIAL #207  
(p. 5-194)  
DIAL  
#104  
PRESS n to program another line  
OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION  
BUTTON  
DIAL a system line number  
DIAL two digits (01–24) for the  
number of outside lines to be  
assigned to every extension  
(p. 5-182)  
DIAL 1 = No Pool  
2 = Main Pool 880 ✓  
3 = Pool 881  
4 = Pool 882  
5 = Pool 883  
PRESS n to program another  
DIAL #114  
2.0  
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER  
2 per 206 or 200 module  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
LINES  
(p. 5-28)  
4 per 400 module  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
DIAL #204  
DIAL a system line number  
3 = Select Button then press  
a programmable button  
line  
TRANSFER RETURN RINGS  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
DIAL #105  
(p. 5-241)  
WAKE UP SERVICE BUTTON  
PRESS n to program another line  
DIAL one digit (0–9) for the number  
of rings before the call returns  
LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION  
DIAL #115  
(p. 5-256)  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
DIAL #208  
DIAL a system line number  
DIAL an extension number  
PRESS n to program another line  
PRESS r to unassign ownership  
(p. 5-155)  
= 4 rings  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
0 rings = no return  
3 = Select Button then press  
a programmable button  
RECALL TIMER DURATION  
2.0  
DIAL #107  
(p. 5-200)  
CALL COVERAGE RINGS  
DIAL two digits (01–80) to set the  
length of a switchhook flash  
DIAL #116  
(p. 5-48)  
DIAL one digit (1–9) for the number  
of rings before the call is sent  
to the covering extension  
=18 (450 msec)  
= 2 rings  
ROTARY DIALING TIMEOUT  
For Centralized Telephone Programming, see previous pages.  
DIAL #108  
(p. 5-205)  
3 =12 sec  
VMS COVER RINGS  
(p. 5-249)  
DIAL 1 = 4 sec  
2 = 8 sec ✓  
DIAL #117  
DIAL one digit (1–9) for the number  
of rings before the call is sent  
to the voice messaging system  
OUTSIDE CONFERENCE DENIAL  
DIAL #109 (p. 5-184)  
DIAL 1 = Allowed ✓  
= 3 rings  
CALLER ID TYPE  
(p. 5-71)  
2 = Disallowed  
BACKUP PROGRAMMING—  
RING ON TRANSFER (p. 5-204)  
MANUAL  
(p. 5-42)  
DIAL #122  
DIAL #119  
DIAL 1 = USA ✓  
DIAL #124  
PRESS e to begin the backup  
2.0  
(p. 5-26)  
DIAL 1 = Active ✓  
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER  
2 = Singapore  
2 = Not Active  
DELAY  
DIAL #110  
BACKUP PROGRAMMING—  
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER MODE  
DIAL a ring delay number (0–9)  
RESTORE PROGRAMMING  
AUTOMATIC  
(p. 5-39)  
= 2 rings  
DIAL #121  
(p. 5-30)  
DIAL #125  
(p. 5-201)  
DIAL #123  
DIAL 1 = Active  
DIAL 1 = Hold ✓  
2 = Disconnect  
3 = Ring  
DIAL 1 = MAN. mmddyy ✓  
2.0  
2 = AUTO. mmddyy  
2 = Not Active ✓  
PRESS e to begin the restore  
3 = Backup Alarm Cleared  
a programmable button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM RESET – PROGRAMMING SAVED  
(p. 5-231)  
IMP OR T A N T : Using this procedure disconnects any active calls but retains system  
settings. Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period.  
DIAL #728  
Extensions  
LINE ASSIGNMENT  
DIAL #301  
DIAL a system extension number  
(p. 5-121)  
INTERCOM DIAL TONE (p. 5-142)  
AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY  
DIAL #304 (p. 5-18)  
DIAL a system extension number  
2.0  
POOL ACCESS RESTRICTION  
DIAL #309  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL #315 (p. 5-189)  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL a pool number (880, 881,  
882, or 883)  
To remove all existing line  
assignments, press r  
before selecting a line.  
DIAL 1 = Regular ✓  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Machine  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
PRESS n to program another  
PRESS n to program another  
DIAL 1 = No Restriction ✓  
2 = Outgoing Only  
3 = Incoming Only  
4 = No Access  
PRESS n to program  
another pool  
extension  
DIAL a line number.  
extension  
DIAL 1=Assigned ✓  
2=Not Assigned  
AUTOMATIC VMS COVER (p. 5-35)  
3=Select Button then press a  
programmable button (to  
assign the line to that button)  
ABBREVIATED RINGING (p.5-5)  
DIAL #310  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL #305  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL 1 = Active (1 ring) ✓  
2 = Not Active (repeated  
ringing)  
To program another extension:  
If you use option 3 after a line  
has been assigned, the line  
moves from the old button to  
the new button you select.  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
PRESS NP,  
enter a new extension  
number, and repeat  
above steps  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
PRESS n to program another  
extension  
PRESS n to program another  
PRESS n to program another  
extension  
line for this extension.  
To program another extension:  
EXTERNAL HOTLINE (p. 5-117)  
CALLWAITING  
(p. 5-55)  
PRESS NP,  
enter a new extension num-  
ber, and repeat above steps  
TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION  
DIAL #311  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL #316  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL #306  
(p. 5-239)  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
DIAL number of the extension  
(10–57) to which call should  
return if not answered  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION  
PRESS n to program another  
PRESS n to program another  
extension  
DIAL #302  
(p. 5-149)  
extension  
Extension transferring call  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL a system line number  
PRESS n to program another  
VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY  
2.0  
extension  
CALLER ID LOG ANSWERED CALLS  
DIAL 1 = No Restriction ✓  
DIAL #312  
(p. 5-252)  
2 = Outgoing Only  
DIAL #317  
DIAL a system extension number  
(p. 5-51)  
3 = Incoming Only  
DIAL a system extension number  
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY  
4 = No Access (line appears  
on button, but you can  
use line only to pick up a  
transferred or held call)  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
DIAL 1 = Active  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
DIAL #307  
(p. 5-120)  
2 = Not Active ✓  
PRESS n to program another  
DIAL a system extension number  
extension  
PRESS n to program another  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned  
PRESS n to program another  
extension  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
line  
PRESS n to program another  
To program another extension:  
LINE ACCESS MODE (p. 5-147)  
extension  
PRESS NP,  
enter a new extension num-  
ber, and repeat above steps  
CALLER ID CALL LOG LINE  
ASSOCIATION  
2.0  
2.0  
DIAL #313  
(p. 5-64)  
DIAL a system extension number  
DISTINCTIVE RING  
(p. 5-106)  
DIAL #318  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL a system line number  
PRESS n to associate another line  
with this extension  
To associate another extension:  
PRESS NP,  
enter a new extension number,  
and repeat above steps  
DIAL 1 = Pool all extensions  
DIAL #308  
DIAL a system extension number  
except 10  
DISPLAY LANGUAGE (p. 5-105)  
2 = Key extension 10  
only  
DIAL #303  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL 1 = Active ✓  
2 = Not Active  
DIAL 1 = English ✓  
PRESS n to program another  
POOL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT  
2 = Spanish  
extension  
3 = French  
DIAL #314  
(p. 5-191)  
PRESS n to program another  
DIAL a system extension number  
extension  
To remove all existing pool  
assignments, press r  
before selecting a line.  
COPY SETTINGS  
(p. 5-82)  
DIAL #399  
DIAL a source extension number  
DIAL target extension numbers  
DIAL a pool access code (880,  
881, 882, or 883)  
Procedures #207, #313, #314 and #315—shown in square dotted boxes—  
DIAL 1 = Assigned 880  
2 = Not Assigned 881,  
882, 883  
2.0  
3 = Select Button then 2.0  
press a program-  
IMP OR T A N T : In Key mode, the Number of Lines procedure changes Line  
Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection,  
and Line Ringing to factory settings. To change line assignments without  
affecting other settings, use Line Assignment (#301).  
mable button  
(auxiliary pools only)  
PRESS n to program  
another pool for this  
extension.  
In Hybrid mode, the Number of Lines procedure changes Pool Line  
Assignment (#207), Pool Extension Assignment (#314), and Pool Access  
Restriction (#315) for existing pools back to factory settings. Additionally, it  
changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic  
To program another extension:  
PRESS NP,  
enter a new extension  
number, and repeat  
= Factory setting  
Line Selection, and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings.  
To change pool assignments without affecting other settings, use Pool Line  
= Button with lights required  
= PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later  
Assignment (#207) and Pool Extension Assignment (#314).  
above steps  
2.0  
2.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Programming Quick Reference  
Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11  
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM  
TO START SYSTEM  
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING  
PRESS f 0 0  
TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE  
DIAL # and three-digit procedure code  
Example: # 1 0 1 for System Date  
TO CYCLE THROUGH  
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES  
PROGRAMMING  
AVAILABLE SETTINGS  
PRESS D or d  
TO RETURN TO FACTORY  
SETTING  
PRESS N or P  
PRESS f 0 0  
PRESS s  
PRESS s  
N OT E : Procedures #399, #609,  
and #728—shown below in dashed  
boxes—are skipped when cycling.  
PRESS r  
DialingRestrictionsandPermissions  
DISALLOWED PHONE NUMBER  
OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION  
EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBER  
ALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS  
LISTS  
(p. 5-100)  
LIST  
(p. 5-112)  
DIAL #401  
(p. 5-180)  
DIAL #408  
(p. 5-9)  
DIAL #404  
DIAL #406  
DIAL a list entry (01–10)  
To add entry:  
DIAL the telephone number (up to  
12 digits)  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL a list number (1–8)  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
PRESS n to assign another list  
DIAL a list number (1–8)  
DIAL a list entry (01–10)  
To add entry:  
DIAL the telephone number  
(up to 12 digits)  
DIAL 1 = No Restriction ✓  
2 = Inside (intercom) Only  
3 = Local (intercom and  
local) Only  
PRESS n to program  
anotherextension  
PRESS e  
PRESS r to remove a list entry  
To program another extension:  
PRESS e  
PRESS r to remove a list entry  
PRESS N P,  
enter a new extension  
number, and repeat above  
steps  
PRESS n to program another  
TOLL CALL PREFIX  
(p. 5-237)  
list entry  
PRESS n to program another  
DIAL #402  
list entry  
DIAL 1 = 0/1 plus Area Code  
To program another list:  
and Number ✓  
ALLOWED PHONE NUMBER  
PRESS N P,  
enter a new list number,  
LISTS  
(p. 5-10)  
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE LIST  
2 = Area Code and  
Number Only  
DIAL #407  
DIAL #409  
(p. 5-122)  
and repeat above steps  
DIAL a list number (1–8)  
DIAL a list entry (01–10)  
To add entry:  
DIAL the telephone number (up to  
12 digits)  
PRESS e  
PRESS r to remove a list entry  
DIAL a list entry (01–99)  
To add entry:  
DIAL the account code (up to  
6 digits)  
SYSTEM PASSWORD (p. 5-229)  
DIAL #403  
DIAL four digits to set the password  
DISALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS  
DIAL #405  
(p. 5-99)  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL a list number (1–8)  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
PRESS e  
PRESS r to remove a list entry  
PRESS n to program another  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
list entry  
PRESS n to program another  
PRESS n to assign another  
list entry  
list  
To program another list:  
To program another extension:  
PRESS N P,  
enter a new list number, and  
repeat above steps  
STAR CODE DIAL DELAY  
PRESS N P,  
enter a new extension  
number, and repeat above  
steps  
DIAL #410  
(p. 5-221)  
DIAL 0 = 0 Seconds Delay ✓  
1 = 1 Second Delay  
2 = 2 Seconds Delay  
3 = 3 Seconds Delay  
4 = 4 Seconds Delay  
5 = 5 Seconds Delay  
6 = Not Active  
System Speed Dial Numbers (p. 5-233)  
To program a number:  
To remove a number:  
PRESS f 0 0 to enter programming mode  
PRESS f  
PRESS f 0 0 to enter  
programming mode  
PRESS f  
DIAL a three-digit code (600–699)  
DIAL the telephone number—up to 28 digits  
dial * before the telephone number  
To program another number, or to change a  
number, repeat  
DIAL the System Speed Dial number’s  
code(600–699)  
PRESS !  
To remove another number, repeat  
PRESS f 0 0 to exit  
programming mode  
PRESS f 0 0 to exit programming mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Groups  
Auxiliary Equipment  
PICKUP GROUP EXTENSIONS  
NIGHT SERVICE GROUP EXTENSIONS  
DIAL #504 (p. 5-177)  
FAX MACHINE EXTENSIONS  
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT  
EXTENSIONS  
DIAL #501  
(p. 5-188)  
(p. 5-4)  
DIAL #601  
(p. 5-119)  
DIAL a group number (1–4)  
DIAL an extension number (10–57)  
DIAL 1 = Assigned to group  
DIAL a system extension number  
DIAL 1 = Assigned to group  
DIAL #607  
DIAL an system xtension number  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned  
DIAL a system extension number  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✓  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
2 = Not Assigned to group✓  
PRESS n to assign another  
PRESS n to identify another  
extension  
extension  
PRESS n to assign another  
PRESS n to assign another  
extension  
extension  
HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS  
MUSIC ON HOLD  
DIAL #602  
(p. 5-171)  
(p. 5-138)  
CALLING GROUP EXTENSIONS  
DIAL #505  
(p. 5-140)  
SMDR RECORD TYPE (p. 5-214)  
DIAL #502  
(p. 5-73)  
DIAL a group number (1-6, 7 for VMS) DIAL 1 = Active ✓  
DIAL an extension number (10–57)  
DIAL #608  
DIAL a group number (1–4)  
DIAL an extension number (10–57)  
2 = Not Active  
DIAL 1 = All calls ✓  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned to group  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✓  
2 = Outgoing calls only  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned to group  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✓  
HOTLINE  
DIAL #603  
DIAL the hotline extension number  
(not ext. 10 or the first two  
extensions on of any 206 or  
308 modules)  
DIAL the alerted extension number  
(not the hotline) or 7 0 to  
paging system  
PRESS n to assign another  
PRESS n to assign another  
extension  
SMDR TOP OF PAGE  
(p. 5-218)  
extension  
DIAL #609  
VMS HUNT DELAY  
(p. 5-250)  
NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON  
DIAL #506  
DIAL #503  
(p. 5-174)  
SMDR OUTPUT FORMAT  
DIAL #610 (p. 5-212)  
DIAL 1 = 15 digits ✓  
2 = 24 digits  
DIAL  
1 = Immediate ✓  
DIAL 1 = Assigned  
2 = Delayed  
2 = Not Assigned ✓  
3 = Select button then  
press a programmable  
button (to assign Night  
Service to that button)  
If you use option 3 after a  
Night Service button has  
been assigned, the Night  
Service button moves from the  
old button to the new button  
you select.  
To remove the hotline and alert:  
PRESS r  
VMS HUNT SCHEDULE (p. 5-251)  
DIAL #507  
SMDR TALK TIME  
(p. 5-216)  
DIAL  
1 = Always ✓  
2 = Day Only  
3 = Night Only  
DOORPHONE 1 EXTENSION  
DIAL #611  
2.0  
DIAL #604  
(p. 5-110)  
DIAL  
1 = Active  
2 = Not Active ✓  
DIAL any system extension except  
10, 11 or the first 2 extensions  
of any 206 or 308 modules.  
CONTACT CLOSURE GROUP  
To remove the doorphone  
extension:  
DIAL #612  
(p. 5-80)  
PRESS r  
DIAL a group number (1 or 2)  
DIAL an extension number (10-41)  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned to group  
2 = Not Assigned to group ✓  
DOORPHONE 2 EXTENSION  
DIAL #605  
(p. 5-110)  
DIAL any system extension except  
10, 11 or the first 2 extensions  
of any 206 or 308 modules.  
CONTACT CLOSURE OPERATION  
TYPE  
(p. 5-81)  
To remove the doorphone  
extension:  
PRESS r  
DIAL #613  
DIAL a Contact Closure (1 or 2)  
DIAL  
1 = 1-Second On  
2 = 3-Seconds On ✓  
3 = 5-Seconds On  
4 = Toggle  
DOORPHONE ALERT  
EXTENSIONS  
(p. 5-109)  
DIAL #606  
DIAL an extension number (except  
a doorphone extension)  
MUSIC ON HOLD VOLUME  
DIAL #614  
(p. 5-173)  
DIAL 1 = Not an alert ✓  
2 = Doorphone 1 alert  
3 = Doorphone 2 alert  
4 = Doorphones 1 and 2  
DIAL 1 =  
2 =  
+
■■  
+
3 =  
■■■  
■■■■  
■■■■■  
+
4 =  
+ ✓  
PRESS n to identify another  
extension (up to 48 alert  
5 =  
+
6 =  
■■■■■■  
+
extensions per doorphone)  
7 =  
■■■■■■■ +  
= Factory setting  
= Button with lights required  
= PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later  
2.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Kyocera Printer KM C830 User Manual
Lego Games 75041 User Manual
LG Electronics Refrigerator LFXS30726S User Manual
Linear Home Security System VB 2 User Manual
Listen Technologies Network Card DCN WAP User Manual
Loewe Flat Panel Television A 37 Full HD+ 100 User Manual
Makita Saw 5103R User Manual
Marantz DVD Player DV 12S1 User Manual
Maytag Dishwasher MDB4709AW User Manual
Maytag Washer MAT12CSD User Manual